WAKULLA COUNTY OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT … › ITB 2020 16 Bid Documents.pdf · 111803.10...

WAKULLA COUNTY

OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY (WWTF) INTERIM PROJECT

SPECIFICATIONS

PREPARED BY:

BASKERVILLE-DONOVAN, INC.

449 WEST MAIN STREET

PENSACOLA, FLORIDA 32502

BDI# 111803.10

ENGINEERING BUSINESS NO. EB-0000340

PREPARED FOR:

WAKULLA COUNTY

BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS

3093 CRAWFORDVILLE HWY.

CRAWFORDVILLE, FL 32326

May, 2020

RELEASED FOR BID

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB

111803.10 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0 - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR

OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY (WWTF) INTERIM

Division Section Title Pages

PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS GROUP

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

01 - EJCDC C-111 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 2

02 - EJCDC C-200 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 10

03 - EJCDC C-451 QUALIFICATIONS STATEMENT 12

04 - EJDCD C-410 BID FORM 16

05 - EJCDC C-430 BID BOND 2

06 - EJCDC C-510 NOTICE OF AWARD 2

07 - EJCDC C-520 AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND

CONTRACTOR

8

08 - EJCDC C-700 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS 70

09 - EJCDC C-800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 14

10 - EJCDC C-610 PERFORMANCE BOND 4

11 - EJCDC C-615 PAYMENT BOND 4

12 - EJCDC C-620 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 4

13 - EJCDC C-941 CHANGE ORDER 2

14 - EJCDC C-550 NOTICE TO PROCEED 2

15 - EJCDC C-625 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 2

16 - EJCDC RD-400 COMPLIANCE STATEMENT 2

17 - EJCDC AD-1048 CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT 2

18 - EJCDC 1940-Q CERTIFICATION FOR CONTRACTS, GRANTS AND

LOANS

2

19 - EJCDC 1780-28 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SIGN 2

20 - EJCDC 1780-26 Exhibit GC-A CERTIFICATE OF OWNER’S

ATTORNEY

2

21 - EJCDC 1780-26 Exhibit GC-B ENGINEER’S CERTIFICATION OF

FINAL PLANS & SPECIFICATONS

2

SPECIFICATIONS GROUP

General Requirements Subgroup

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 SUMMARY 4

01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 4

01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6

01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 12

01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 8

01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 4

01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 4

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 12

01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 10

01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 8

01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 8

01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 6

01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 6

Facility Construction Subgroup

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 8

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

03 30 53 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 6

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 05 - METALS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

NOT APPLICABLE

Facility Services Subgroup

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 96 36 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER

FACILITIES

12

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 15 - RESERVED

NOT APPLICABLE


NOT APPLICABLE


NOT APPLICABLE


NOT APPLICABLE


NOT APPLICABLE


NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

NOT APPLICABLE

Facility Services Subgroup

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

NOT APPLICABLE


NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 10

26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS 6

26 05 23 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 12

26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6

26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6

26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 12

26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6

26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 12

26 22 00 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 6

26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 10

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 4

26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 10

DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

NOT APPLICABLE


NOT APPLICABLE

Site and Infrastructure Subgroup


NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 6

31 20 00 EARTH MOVING 14

31 23 16 EXCAVATION 4

31 23 17 TRENCHING 6

31 23 20 DEWATERING 6

31 23 23 FILL 4

31 25 01 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL 8

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING 4

32 17 14 WHEEL STOPS 2

32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 2

32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES 6

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES

33 32 13 SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 6

33 32 14 PUMP CONTROL PANELS, ENCLOSURES 4

Site and Infrastructure Subgroup

DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION

NOT APPLICABLE


NOT APPLICABLE

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020




NOT APPLICABLE


NOT APPLICABLE


NOT APPLICABLE

Process Equipment Subgroup

DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS

40 05 13.54 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 10

40 05 13.55 POLY(VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLANT PIPING 6

40 05 23.15 GATE VALVES 4

40 05 23.21 PLUG VALVES 4

40 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCES PIPING 6

40 05 63.01 BALL VALVES AND TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES 4

40 90 00 SYSTEM INTEGRATION 14

40 91 23 FIELD INSTRUMENTS 6

40 94 50 PROCESS LOOP DESCRIPTION 10

40 95 13 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 16

DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 42 - PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE

EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION AND WASTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 45 - INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT

NOT APPLICABLE

DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

46 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 4

46 21 83 SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN 8

Process Equipment Subgroup


NOT APPLICABLE

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



DIVISION 48 - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION

NOT APPLICABLE


NOT APPLICABLE

APPENDICIES

APPENDIX A CSI SUBSTITUTION FORM

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

EJCDC® C-111, Suggested Advertisement for Bids for Construction Contracts.

Copyright © 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies,

and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1

WAKULLA COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS

CRAWFORDVILLE, FLORIDA

OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT INTERIM PROJECT RE-BID

ITB 2020-16

PROJECT NUMBER 111803.10

ADVERTISEMENT FOR RE-BID

Sealed Bids for the construction of the Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim Project Re-

Bid, ITB 2020-16, Project Number 111803.10 will be received by Wakulla County BOCC, at the office of

the Wakulla County BOCC, until 3:00 p.m. Eastern Time on June 29, 2020 at which time the Bids

received will be publicly opened and read aloud. The Project consists of constructing an in-plant pump

station, septage receiving auger screen unit, valve actuators, filter bypass piping, miscellaneous piping,

instrumentation, electrical improvements and all appurtenances necessary for a complete and

operational system.

The Issuing Office for the Bidding Documents is: Baskerville-Donovan, Inc., 449 West Main Street,

Pensacola, Florida 32502, Richard Delp, Project Manager, 850-438-9661. Prospective Bidders may

examine the Bidding Documents at the Issuing Office on Mondays through Fridays between the hours of

8:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m., central time, and may obtain copies of the Bidding Documents from the Issuing

Office as described below.

Bidding Documents also may be examined at Wakulla County BOCC, 3093 Crawfordville Highway,

Crawfordville, Florida 32327 and Associated General Contractors of America (AGC) 1538 Metropolitan

Blvd., Suite A2, Tallahassee, Florida, on Mondays through Fridays between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and

4:00 p.m., eastern time. With 48 hour advance notice, a specific time during 9:00 a.m. and 3:00 p.m. can

be arranged to view the plans at the office of Baskerville-Donovan, Inc. 2420 Lakeshore Drive, Suite 200,

Tallahassee, Florida. Please contact Alan Hart at (850) 712-3956 to make arrangements.

Electronic copies of the Bidding Documents in pdf format on compact disc may be obtained from the

Issuing Office, during the hours indicated above, upon payment of a deposit of $50.00 (non-refundable)

for each set. Checks for Bidding Documents shall be payable to Baskerville-Donovan, Inc. Upon request

and receipt of the document deposit indicated above, the Issuing Office will transmit the Bidding

Documents via drop box or FTP site. The date that the Bidding Documents are transmitted by the

Issuing Office will be considered the Bidder’s date of receipt of the Bidding Documents. Partial sets of

Bidding Documents will not be available from the Issuing Office. Neither Owner nor Engineer will be

responsible for full or partial sets of Bidding Documents, including Addenda if any, obtained from

sources other than the Issuing Office.

EJCDC® C-111, Suggested Advertisement for Bids for Construction Contracts.



All inquiries and clarification requests shall be submitted in writing to Baskerville-Donovan, Inc.

attention Richard Delp, Project Manager, 850-438-9661, by 2:00pm, central time, June 15, 2020

Inquiries received after this date will not be accepted. Verbal clarifications will not be provided.

A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for a public

entity crime may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may

not submit a bid on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or

public work, may not submit bids on leases of real property to a public entity, may not be awarded or

perform work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public

entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided

in Section 287.017, Florida Statutes, for CATEGORY TWO ($35,000) for a period of 36 months from the

date of being placed on the convicted vendor list.

Bids may not be withdrawn for a period of at least 90 days from date of opening. Complete insurance

coverage will be required from the successful bidder prior to signing the contract.

The Wakulla County Board of County Commissioners reserves the right to waive informalities in any bid;

reject any or all proposals, in whole or in part; re-bid a project, in whole or in part; and to accept a

proposal that in its judgment is the lowest and best bid of a responsible bidder. In accepting a bid,

Wakulla County may award a contract based only on the base bid, the base bid plus all alternates, or the

base bid plus any alternates which Wakulla County selects -- with all decisions being made based upon

what Wakulla County believes to be the best interests of its ratepayers, in the reasonable exercise of its

discretion. Wakulla County further reserves the right to increase or decrease quantities as may be

required to meet the needs of Wakulla County, at the unit price which was bid.

Wakulla County does not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin, sex, religion, age,

marital status and disability/handicapped status in employment or provision of service.

Bid proposal must be clearly marked on the envelope:

WAKULLA COUNTY ITB: #2020-16

BID: OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

INTERIM PROJECT RE-BID

BDI PROJECT NO: 111803.10

A mandatory pre-bid conference followed by a mandatory site visit will be held at 10:00 a.m., Eastern

Time on June 8, 2020. In order to accommodate current meeting restrictions and social distancing

requirements, the meeting will be held outdoors at 2146 Lawhon Mill Road Crawfordville, FL 32327,

rain or shine. Please be prepared as this meeting will not be cancelled due to inclement weather.

Bid security shall be furnished in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders.

Owner: Wakulla County

By: David Edwards

Title: County Administrator

Date: May 28, 2020

+ + END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS + +

EJCDC® C-200, Suggested Instructions to Bidders for Construction Contracts.


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page i

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

ARTICLE 1 – Defined Terms ........................................................................................................................... 1

ARTICLE 2 – Copies of Bidding Documents ................................................................................................... 1

ARTICLE 3 – Qualifications of Bidders ........................................................................................................... 1

ARTICLE 4 – Site and Other Areas; Existing Site Conditions; Examination of Site; Owner’s Safety Program;

Other Work at the Site .................................................................................................................................. 1

ARTICLE 5 – Bidder’s Representations .......................................................................................................... 3

ARTICLE 6 – Pre-Bid Conference ................................................................................................................... 4

ARTICLE 7 – Interpretations and Addenda .................................................................................................... 4

ARTICLE 8 – Bid Security ............................................................................................................................... 5

ARTICLE 9 – Contract Times .......................................................................................................................... 5

ARTICLE 10 – Liquidated Damages ................................................................................................................ 5

ARTICLE 11 – Substitute and “Or-Equal” Items............................................................................................. 5

ARTICLE 12 – Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ................................................................................... 6

ARTICLE 13 – Preparation of Bid ................................................................................................................... 6

ARTICLE 14 – Basis of Bid .............................................................................................................................. 7

ARTICLE 15 – Submittal of Bid ....................................................................................................................... 7

ARTICLE 16 – Modification and Withdrawal of Bid ....................................................................................... 7

ARTICLE 17 – Opening of Bids ....................................................................................................................... 8

ARTICLE 18 – Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance ................................................................................... 8

ARTICLE 19 – Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract .............................................................................. 8

ARTICLE 20 – Bonds and Insurance ............................................................................................................... 9

ARTICLE 21 – Signing of Agreement .............................................................................................................. 9

ARTICLE 22 – WAGE RATES REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................ 9

ARTICLE 23 – FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................... 9




ARTICLE 1 – DEFINED TERMS

1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General

Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to

Bidders have the meanings indicated below:

A. Issuing Office – The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued.

ARTICLE 2 – COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

2.01 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Issuing Office in the number

and format stated in the advertisement or invitation to bid.

2.02 Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing Bids; neither Owner nor

Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of

incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

2.03 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, do

so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids for the Work and do not authorize or confer a license

for any other use.

ARTICLE 3 – QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS

3.01 To demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications to perform the Work, Bidder shall submit with its Bid (a)

written evidence establishing its qualifications such as financial data, previous experience, and

present commitments, and (b) the following additional information:

A. Evidence of Bidder’s authority to do business in the state where the Project is located.

B. Bidder’s state or other contractor license number, if applicable.

C. Subcontractor and Supplier qualification information; coordinate with provisions of Article

12 of these Instructions, “Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others.”

D. Complete and submit the Qualifications Statement, EJCDC C-451, included in the contract

documents.

3.02 No requirement in this Article 3 to submit information will prejudice the right of Owner to seek

additional pertinent information regarding Bidder’s qualifications.

3.03 Bidder is advised to carefully review those portions of the Bid Form requiring Bidder’s

representations and certifications.

ARTICLE 4 – SITE AND OTHER AREAS; EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS; EXAMINATION OF SITE; OWNER’S

SAFETY PROGRAM; OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

4.01 Site and Other Areas

A. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. By definition, the Site includes rights-of-

way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner for the use of the Contractor. Any

additional lands required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment, or

storage of materials and equipment, and any access needed for such additional lands, are

to be obtained and paid for by Contractor.

4.02 Existing Site Conditions

A. Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions




1. The Supplementary Conditions identify:

a. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions

at or adjacent to the Site.

b. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface

or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities).

c. reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental

Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site.

d. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.

2. Owner will make copies of reports and drawings referenced above available to any

Bidder on request. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract

Documents, but the Technical Data contained therein upon whose accuracy Bidder is

entitled to rely, as provided in the General Conditions, has been identified and

established in the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any

interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any Technical Data or any other data,

interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown or

indicated in such drawings.

3. If the Supplementary Conditions do not identify Technical Data, the default definition

of Technical Data set forth in Article 1 of the General Conditions will apply.

4. Geotechnical Baseline Report: The Bidding Documents contain a Geotechnical Baseline

Report (GBR). The GBR describes certain select subsurface conditions that are

anticipated to be encountered by Contractor during construction in specified locations

(“Baseline Conditions”). The GBR is a Contract Document.

The Baseline Conditions in the GBR are intended to reduce uncertainty and the degree

of contingency in submitted Bids. However, Bidders cannot rely solely on the Baseline

Conditions. Bids should be based on a comprehensive approach that includes an

independent review and analysis of the GBR, all other Contract Documents, Technical

Data, other available information, and observable surface conditions. Not all potential

subsurface conditions are baselined.

Nothing in the GBR is intended to relieve Bidders of the responsibility to make their

own determinations regarding construction costs, bidding strategies, and Bid prices,

nor of the responsibility to select and be responsible for the means, methods,

techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and for safety precautions

and programs incident thereto.

B. Underground Facilities: Information and data shown or indicated in the Bidding Documents

with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site are set forth in

the Contract Documents and are based upon information and data furnished to Owner and

Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities, including Owner, or others.

C. Adequacy of Data: Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished

to prospective Bidders with respect to subsurface conditions, other physical conditions, and

Underground Facilities, and possible changes in the Bidding Documents due to differing or

unanticipated subsurface or physical conditions appear in Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05

of the General Conditions. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data

furnished to prospective Bidders with respect to a Hazardous Environmental Condition at

the Site, if any, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to any Hazardous

Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or




indicated in the Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be

within the scope of the Work, appear in Paragraph 5.06 of the General Conditions.

4.03 Site Visit and Testing by Bidders

A. Bidder shall conduct the required Site visit immediately following the mandatory pre-bid

conference, and shall not disturb any ongoing operations at the Site.

B. On request, and to the extent Owner has control over the Site, and schedule permitting,

the Owner will provide Bidder access to the Site to conduct such additional examinations,

investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary for preparing and

submitting a successful Bid. Owner will not have any obligation to grant such access if doing

so is not practical because of existing operations, security or safety concerns, or restraints

on Owner’s authority regarding the Site.

C. Bidder shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations regarding excavation and

location of utilities, obtain all permits, and comply with all terms and conditions established

by Owner or by property owners or other entities controlling the Site with respect to

schedule, access, existing operations, security, liability insurance, and applicable safety

programs.

D. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon

completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies.

4.04 Owner’s Safety Program

A. Site visits and work at the Site may be governed by an Owner safety program. As the

General Conditions indicate, if an Owner safety program exists, it will be noted in the

Supplementary Conditions.

4.05 Other Work at the Site

A. Reference is made to Article 8 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of the

general nature of other work of which Owner is aware (if any) that is to be performed at

the Site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) and relates to

the Work contemplated by these Bidding Documents. If Owner is party to a written

contract for such other work, then on request, Owner will provide to each Bidder access to

examine such contracts (other than portions thereof related to price and other confidential

matters), if any.

ARTICLE 5 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS

5.01 It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid to:

A. examine and carefully study the Bidding Documents, and any data and reference items

identified in the Bidding Documents;

B. visit the Site, conduct a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and adjacent areas,

and become familiar with and satisfy itself as to the general, local, and Site conditions that

may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work;

C. become familiar with and satisfy itself as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost,

progress, and performance of the Work;

D. carefully study all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or

adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or

subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary




Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings, and (2)

reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent

to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions, especially with

respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings;

E. consider the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly known to

contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and observations

obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and the Site-related reports and

drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of such

information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance of

the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction

to be employed by Bidder; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs;

F. agree, based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph,

that at the time of submitting its Bid no further examinations, investigations, explorations,

tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of its Bid for performance of the

Work at the price bid and within the times required, and in accordance with the other

terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents;

G. become aware of the general nature of the work to be performed by Owner and others at

the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents;

H. promptly give Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies

that Bidder discovers in the Bidding Documents and confirm that the written resolution

thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder;

I. determine that the Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey

understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance and furnishing of the Work;

and

J. agree that the submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by

Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, that without

exception the Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and furnishing the

Work required by the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 6 – PRE-BID CONFERENCE

6.01 A mandatory pre-Bid conference and site visit will be held at the time and location stated in the

invitation or advertisement to bid. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to

discuss the Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference.

Engineer will transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as Engineer considers

necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied

upon and will not be binding or legally effective.

ARTICLE 7 – INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA

7.01 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be submitted to

Engineer in writing. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in

response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered to all parties recorded as having

received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than seven days prior to the date for

opening of Bids may not be answered. Only questions answered by Addenda will be binding.

Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.

7.02 Addenda may be issued to clarify, correct, supplement, or change the Bidding Documents.




ARTICLE 8 – BID SECURITY

8.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of 5 percent

of Bidder’s maximum Bid price (determined by adding the base bid and all alternates) and in the

form of a certified check, bank money order, or a Bid bond (on the form included in the Bidding

Documents) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraphs 6.01 and 6.02 of the

General Conditions.

8.02 The Bid security of the apparent Successful Bidder will be retained until Owner awards the

contract to such Bidder, and such Bidder has executed the Contract Documents, furnished the

required contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the

Bid security will be released. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract

Documents and furnish the required contract security within 15 days after the Notice of Award,

Owner may consider Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of

that Bidder will be forfeited. Such forfeiture shall be Owner’s exclusive remedy if Bidder

defaults.

8.03 The Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving

the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of seven days after the Effective Date of

the Contract or 61 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders

will be released.

8.04 Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving

the award will be released within seven days after the Bid opening.

ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT TIMES

9.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which the Work is to be substantially

completed and ready for final payment are set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 10 – LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

10.01 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, for failure to timely attain a Milestone, Substantial

Completion, or completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set forth in the

Agreement.

ARTICLE 11 – SUBSTITUTE AND “OR-EQUAL” ITEMS

11.01 The Contract for the Work, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment

specified or described in the Bidding Documents, and those “or-equal” or substitute materials

and equipment subsequently approved by Engineer prior to the submittal of Bids and

identified by Addendum. No item of material or equipment will be considered by Engineer as

an “or-equal” or substitute unless written request for approval has been submitted by Bidder

and has been received by Engineer at least 15 days prior to the date for receipt of Bids in the

case of a proposed substitute and 5 days prior in the case of a proposed “or-equal.” Each such

request shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 7.04 and 7.05 of the General

Conditions. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed item is upon Bidder. Engineer’s

decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed item will be final. If Engineer approves any

such proposed item, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum issued to all prospective

Bidders. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner.

11.02 All prices that Bidder sets forth in its Bid shall be based on the presumption that the

Contractor will furnish the materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding




Documents, as supplemented by Addenda. Any assumptions regarding the possibility of post-

Bid approvals of “or-equal” or substitution requests are made at Bidder’s sole risk.

11.03 If an award is made, Contractor shall be allowed to submit proposed substitutes and “or-

equals” in accordance with the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 12 – SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS

12.01 If required by the bid documents, the apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so

requested, shall within five days after Bid opening, submit to Owner a list of the Subcontractors

or Suppliers proposed for the following portions of the Work: All major process equipment.

If requested by Owner, such list shall be accompanied by an experience statement with

pertinent information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each

such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. If Owner or Engineer, after due

investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or

entity, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is given, request apparent Successful Bidder to

submit an acceptable substitute, in which case apparent Successful Bidder shall submit a

substitute, Bidder’s Bid price will be increased (or decreased) by the difference in cost

occasioned by such substitution, and Owner may consider such price adjustment in evaluating

Bids and making the Contract award.

12.02 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the

Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, or

other individuals or entities. Declining to make requested substitutions will constitute grounds

for forfeiture of the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity

so listed and against which Owner or Engineer makes no written objection prior to the giving of

the Notice of Award will be deemed acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to subsequent

revocation of such acceptance as provided in Paragraph 7.06 of the General Conditions.

12.03 Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, individual, or entity

against whom Contractor has reasonable objection.

12.04 The Contractor shall not award work to Subcontractor(s) in excess of the limits stated in SC

7.06.

ARTICLE 13 – PREPARATION OF BID

13.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents.

A. All blanks on the Bid Form shall be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink.

Erasures or alterations shall be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid

price shall be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternate, adjustment unit price item,

and unit price item listed therein.

B. If the Bid Form expressly indicates that submitting pricing on a specific alternate item is

optional, and Bidder elects to not furnish pricing for such optional alternate item, then

Bidder may enter the words “No Bid” or “Not Applicable.”

13.02 A Bid by a corporation shall be executed in the corporate name by a corporate officer (whose

title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The

corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown.




13.03 A Bid by a limited liability company shall be executed in the name of the firm by a member or

other authorized person and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of

formation of the firm and the official address of the firm shall be shown.

13.04 A Bid by an individual shall show the Bidder’s name and official address.

13.05 A Bid by a joint venture shall be executed by an authorized representative of each joint venturer

in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture shall be

shown.

13.06 All names shall be printed in ink below the signatures.

13.07 The Bid shall contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which shall

be filled in on the Bid Form.

13.08 Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid shall

be shown.

13.09 The Bid shall contain evidence of Bidder’s authority and qualification to do business in the state

where the Project is located, or Bidder shall covenant in writing to obtain such authority and

qualification prior to award of the Contract and attach such covenant to the Bid. Bidder’s state

contractor license number, if any, shall also be shown on the Bid Form.

ARTICLE 14 – BASIS OF BID

14.01 Lump Sum/Unit Price

A. Bidders shall submit a Bid on a lump sum/unit price basis as set forth in the Bid Form.

ARTICLE 15 – SUBMITTAL OF BID

15.01 With each copy of the Bidding Documents, a Bidder is furnished one separate unbound copy of

the Bid Form, and, if required, the Bid Bond Form. The unbound copy of the Bid Form is to be

completed and submitted with the Bid security and the other documents required to be

submitted under the terms of Article 7 of the Bid Form.

15.02 A Bid shall be received no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in

the advertisement or invitation to bid and shall be enclosed in a plainly marked package with

the Project title (and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is

submitted), the name and address of Bidder, and shall be accompanied by the Bid security and

other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope

containing the Bid shall be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with

the notation “BID ENCLOSED, ITB 2015-05.” A mailed Bid shall be addressed to Wakulla County

Board of County Commissioners, 3093 Crawfordville Hwy., Crawfordville, FL 32327.

15.03 Bids received after the date and time prescribed for the opening of bids, or not submitted at the

correct location or in the designated manner, will not be accepted and will be returned to the

Bidder unopened.

ARTICLE 16 – MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID

16.01 A Bid may be withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same manner that a

Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted prior to the

date and time for the opening of Bids. Upon receipt of such notice, the unopened Bid will be

returned to the Bidder.




16.02 If a Bidder wishes to modify its Bid prior to Bid opening, Bidder must withdraw its initial Bid in

the manner specified in Paragraph 16.01 and submit a new Bid prior to the date and time for the

opening of Bids.

16.03 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner

and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a

material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, that Bidder may withdraw its Bid,

and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, that Bidder will be

disqualified from further bidding on the Work.

ARTICLE 17 – OPENING OF BIDS

17.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and,

unless obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base

Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids.

ARTICLE 18 – BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE

18.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but

Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of

this period.

ARTICLE 19 – EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT

19.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming,

nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Owner will reject the Bid of any Bidder that

Owner finds, after reasonable inquiry and evaluation, to not be responsible. If Bidder purports

to add terms or conditions to its Bid, takes exception to any provision of the Bidding Documents,

or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract Documents for purposes of the Bid, then the

Owner will reject the Bid as nonresponsive; provided that Owner also reserves the right to waive

all minor informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work.

19.02 If Owner awards the contract for the Work, such award shall be to the responsible Bidder

submitting the lowest responsive Bid.

19.03 Evaluation of Bids

A. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed

requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in the

Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.

B. For the determination of the apparent low Bidder when unit price bids are submitted, Bids

will be compared on the basis of the total of the products of the estimated quantity of each

item and unit price Bid for that item, together with any lump sum items.

19.04 In evaluating whether a Bidder is responsible, Owner will consider the qualifications of the

Bidder and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and Suppliers

proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and Suppliers

must be submitted as provided in the Bidding Documents.

19.05 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the

responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders and any proposed Subcontractors or

Suppliers.




ARTICLE 20 – BONDS AND INSURANCE

20.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets

forth Owner’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds and insurance. When the

Successful Bidder delivers the Agreement (executed by Successful Bidder) to Owner, it shall be

accompanied by required bonds and insurance documentation.

ARTICLE 21 – SIGNING OF AGREEMENT

21.01 When Owner issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it shall be accompanied by the

unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract Documents as

identified in the Agreement. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful Bidder shall execute and

deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement (and any bonds and insurance

documentation required to be delivered by the Contract Documents) to Owner. Within ten days

thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement to Successful

Bidder, together with printed and electronic copies of the Contract Documents as stated in

Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 22 – WAGE RATES REQUIREMENTS

22.01 If the contract price is in excess of $100,000, provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety

Standards Act of 29 CFR 5.5(b) apply.

ARTICLE 23 – FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS

23.01 Federal requirements at Article 19 of the Supplementary Conditions apply to this Contract.

EJCDC® C-451, Qualifications Statement.


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 6

QUALIFICATIONS STATEMENT

THE INFORMATION SUPPLIED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS CONFIDENTIAL TO THE EXTENT

PERMITTED BY LAWS AND REGULATIONS

1. SUBMITTED BY:

Official Name of Firm:

Address:

2. SUBMITTED TO:

3. SUBMITTED FOR:

Owner:

Project Name:

TYPE OF WORK:

4. CONTRACTOR'S CONTACT INFORMATION

Contact Person:

Title:

Phone:

Email:




Page 2 of 6

5. AFFILIATED COMPANIES:

Name:

Address:

6. TYPE OF ORGANIZATION:

SOLE PROPRIETORSHIP

Name of Owner:

Doing Business As:

Date of Organization:

PARTNERSHIP


Type of Partnership:

Name of General Partner(s):

CORPORATION

State of Organization:


Executive Officers:

- President:

- Vice President(s):

- Treasurer:

- Secretary:




Page 3 of 6

LIMITED LIABILITY COMPANY

State of Organization:


Members:

JOINT VENTURE

Sate of Organization:


Form of Organization:

Joint Venture Managing Partner

- Name:

- Address:


- Name:

- Address:


- Name:

- Address:




Page 4 of 6

7. LICENSING

Jurisdiction:

Type of License:

License Number:

Jurisdiction:

Type of License:

License Number:

8. CERTIFICATIONS CERTIFIED BY:

Disadvantage Business Enterprise:

Minority Business Enterprise:

Woman Owned Enterprise:

Small Business Enterprise:

Other ( ):

9. BONDING INFORMATION

Bonding Company:

Address:

Bonding Agent:

Address:

Contact Name:

Phone:

Aggregate Bonding Capacity:

Available Bonding Capacity as of date of this submittal:




Page 5 of 6

10. CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE:

Current Experience:

List on Schedule A all uncompleted projects currently under contract (If Joint Venture list

each participant's projects separately).

Previous Experience:

List on Schedule B all projects completed within the last 5 Years (If Joint Venture list each

participant's projects separately).

Has firm listed in Section 1 ever failed to complete a construction contract awarded to it?

YES NO

If YES, attach as an Attachment details including Project Owner's contact information.

Has any Corporate Officer, Partner, Joint Venture participant or Proprietor ever failed to

complete a construction contract awarded to them in their name or when acting as a principal

of another entity?

YES NO


Are there any judgments, claims, disputes or litigation pending or outstanding involving the firm

listed in Section 1 or any of its officers (or any of its partners if a partnership or any of the

individual entities if a joint venture)?

YES NO


11. SAFETY PROGRAM:

Name of Contractor's Safety Officer:

Include the following as attachments:

Provide as an Attachment Contractor's (and Contractor's proposed Subcontractors and

Suppliers furnishing or performing Work having a value in excess of 10 percent of the total

amount of the Bid) list of all safety citations or violations under any state all received within

the last 5 years (indicate disposition as applicable) - IF NONE SO STATE.




Page 6 of 6

I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THE INFORMATION SUBMITTED HEREWITH, INCLUDING ANY ATTACHMENTS, IS

TRUE TO THE BEST OF MY KNOWLEDGE AND BELIEF.

NAME OF ORGANIZATION:

BY:

TITLE:

DATED:

NOTARY ATTEST:

SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME

THIS DAY OF , 20___

NOTARY PUBLIC - STATE OF

MY COMMISSION EXPIRES:

REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS

1. Schedule A (Current Experience).

2. Schedule B (Previous Experience).

3. List of proposed Subcontractors with a sum of work over $50,000.

4. List of proposed Vendors providing equipment over $50,000.

5. Evidence of authority for individuals listed in Section 7 to bind organization to an agreement.

7. Required safety program submittals listed in Section 13.

8. Additional items as pertinent.




Page 1 of 3

SCHEDULE A CURRENT EXPERIENCE

Project Name Owner's Contact Person Design Engineer Contract Date Type of Work Status Cost of Work

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:




Page 2 of 3

SCHEDULE B

PREVIOUS EXPERIENCE (Include ALL Projects Completed within last 5 years)


Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:




Page 3 of 3

SCHEDULE B PREVIOUS EXPERIENCE (Include ALL Projects Completed within last 5 years)


Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Name:

Company:

Telephone:

EJCDC® C-410, Bid Form for Construction Contracts.



BID FORM

WAKULLA COUNTY OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT INTERIM PROJECT RE-BID

PROJECT NO. 111803.10

FEBRUARY 2020

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1 – Bid Recipient ................................................................................................................................ 1

Article 2 – Bidder’s Acknowledgements ....................................................................................................... 1

Article 3 – Bidder’s Representations ............................................................................................................. 1

Article 4 – Bidder’s Certification ................................................................................................................... 2

Article 5 – Basis of Bid ................................................................................................................................... 3

Article 6 – Time of Completion ................................................................................................................... 13

Article 7 – Attachments to this Bid ............................................................................................................. 13

Article 8 – Defined Terms............................................................................................................................ 14

Article 9 – Bid Submittal.............................................................................................................................. 14




ARTICLE 1 – BID RECIPIENT

1.01 This Bid is submitted to:

WAKULLA COUNTY

3093 CRAWFORDVILLE HWY.

CRAWFORDVILLE, FL 32327

1.02 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement

with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or

indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and

in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 2 – BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including without

limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security. This Bid will remain subject to

acceptance for 90 days after the Bid opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may

agree to in writing upon request of Owner.

ARTICLE 3 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS

3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that:

A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, and any data and

reference items identified in the Bidding Documents, and hereby acknowledges receipt of

the following Addenda:

Addendum No. Addendum, Date

B. Bidder has visited the Site, conducted a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site and

adjacent areas, and become familiar with and satisfied itself as to the general, local, and

Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

C. Bidder is familiar with and has satisfied itself as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect

cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface

conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to

existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the

Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and

drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if

any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions,

especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings.

E. Bidder has considered the information known to Bidder itself; information commonly

known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and

observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding Documents; and any Site-related




reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, with respect to the effect of

such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and performance

of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of

construction to be employed by Bidder; and (3) Bidder’s safety precautions and programs.

F. Bidder agrees, based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding

paragraph, that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data

are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the price bid

and within the times required, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of

the Bidding Documents.

G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the

Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.

H. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or

discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and confirms that the

written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder.

I. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all

terms and conditions for the performance and furnishing of the Work.

J. The submission of this Bid constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that

Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article, and that without exception the

Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work

required by the Bidding Documents.

ARTICLE 4 – BIDDER’S CERTIFICATION

4.01 Bidder certifies that:

A. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed

individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive agreement or

rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation;

B. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false

or sham Bid;

C. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding; and

D. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing

for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 4.01.D:

1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of

value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process;

2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to

influence the bidding process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish bid prices at

artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and

open competition;

3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders,

with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish bid prices

at artificial, non-competitive levels; and

4. “Coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly,

persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or

affect the e execution of the Contract.




ARTICLE 5 – BASIS OF BID

5.01 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following

price(s):

5.02 LUMP SUM

A. Where payment for items is shown to be paid for on a lump sum basis, no separate

payment will be made for any item of work required to complete the lump sum item. The

lump sum price bid for various items shall be compensation in full for furnishing all

materials, labor, equipment, and incidentals with these plans and specification. All disposal

costs shall be included in the bid items. Unless otherwise stated, measurement shall be

based upon the Engineer’s estimate of percent complete per partial payment period.

General/Civil

1. Bid Item 1 – General Provisions: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT for all work included

under this bid item will be made for mobilization and demobilization of all labor,

equipment, materials and appurtenances necessary for construction of the project.

Mobilization shall include all those operations necessary for the movement of

personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the initial project site, safety

equipment and first aid supplies, and sanitary and other facilities. Also included as part

of this bid item is the cost for project performance and payment bonds, insurance,

indemnifications, photographs, shop drawings, working drawings, schedules,

documents, coordination, and phasing and other miscellaneous items associated with

the work. Measurement for this bid item will be lump sum. The lump sum price for

general provisions will be limited to five percent (5%) of the contract amount. Seventy

percent (70%) of the lump sum price will be payable with the first month’s partial

payment. The remaining thirty (30%) will be payable with the final partial payment.

Valves

2. Bid Item 14 – Horizontal Swing Check Valve and Meter Vault: The LUMP SUM BID

AMOUNT for furnishing and installing the concrete valve vault will be compensation in

full for furnishing all material, labor, and equipment and incidentals necessary for

installing the vault in accordance with these specifications. The required material for

the valve vault is detailed in the drawings. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be paid

based on the percentages of work completed as approved by the Engineer.

Existing In-Plant Pump Station

3. Bid Item 17 – Existing In-Plant Pump Station Demolition and Modification: The LUMP

SUM BID AMOUNT will be a payment for all demolition and modification work

associated with the existing In-Plant Pump Station. Existing In-Plant Pump Station

Demolition work includes, but is not limited to, demolition, porting, plugging, and

debris disposal in compliance with the all existing regulations, of the existing In-Plant

Pump Station structure and other related items. The existing installed pumps shall be

turned over to Wakulla County, if desired. Existing In-Plant Pump Station Modification

work includes, but is not limited to, cleaning of existing wet well, coring holes for new

gravity sewer pipes, sealing existing force main holes and grouting of the wet well base

slab. Payment shall constitute complete compensation for all labor, materials,

equipment and disposal costs necessary to complete this work item. The Contractor

may apply for payment based on the percent completeness of the work.




Proposed In-Plant Pump Station

4. Bid Item 19 – Fiberglass Wet Well and Accessories: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will

be a payment for furnishing and installing the In-Plant Pump Station fiberglass wet

well in accordance with the contract documents. Payment shall include, but not be

limited to, excavation, shoring, compaction, bedding, grading, reinforcement, and

installation of fiberglass wet well, top slab, hatches, liner, restoration, and all other

items and incidentals required to construct a fully functional fiberglass wet well. The

LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the percentages of work completed

as approved by the ENGINEER.

5. Bid Item 20 – In-Plant Pump Station Fittings, Valves, Meter, and Miscellaneous

Items: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be a payment for furnishing and installing

the In-Plant Pump Station’s fittings, valves, meters and miscellaneous items in

accordance with the contract documents. This includes, but is not limited to, all

fittings, valves, meters, pressure gauges, restraints, supports, flushing, and testing

from the submersible pumps to the stainless steel/DIP transition. The LUMP SUM BID

AMOUNT shall be paid based on the percentages of work completed as approved by

the ENGINEER.

6. Bid Item 21 – In-Plant Pump Station Concrete Pad: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will

be a payment for installing the concrete pad at the In-Plant Pump Station. Payment

shall include but not be limited to grading, compaction, bedding, forming,

reinforcement, and concrete pouring as required in accordance with the contract

documents. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be based on the percentages of work

completed as approved by the ENGINEER.

Headworks Screen Walkway and Railway Modification

7. Bid Item 22 – Screen Walkway and Railway Modification: The LUMP SUM BID

AMOUNT will be a payment for labor, materials, and equipment necessary to install

the proposed walkways and railways for the existing headworks. The walkway and

railways shall be provided by Kusters Water. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be

paid based on the percentages of work completed as approved by the ENGINEER.

Emergency Eye Wash Station

8. Bid Item 23 – Emergency Eye Wash Station Equipment, Piping, Fitting, and Valves:

The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be payment for furnishing and installing the

emergency eye wash station equipment, piping, fittings, valves, and miscellaneous

items in accordance with the contract documents. This includes, but is not limited to,

all piping, fittings, valves, restraints, supports, flushing, and testing from the existing 2”

potable water transition point to the emergency eye wash station drain/chlorine

contact chamber drain transition point. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be paid

based on the percentages of work completed as approved by the ENGINEER.

Filter Piping Modification

9. Bid Item 31 – 20-inch Core Drill with Double Stainless Steel Link Seal: The LUMP SUM

BID AMOUNT will be payment for all modification work associated with the existing

Chlorine Contact Chamber influent wet well. Modification work includes, but is not

limited to, means and methods to successfully core drill and install a double stainless

steel link seal. Payment shall constitute complete compensation for all labor, materials

and equipment necessary to complete this work item. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT




shall be paid based on the percentages of work completed as approved by the

ENGINEER.

10. Bid Item 32 – Existing Filter Overflow Piping Demolition and Air Compressor

Relocation: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be payment for all demolition and

modification work associated with the existing Fluidyne Filter System. Existing Filter

System Demolition work includes, but is not limited to, demolition of the existing filter

overflow piping system, relocation of the existing air compressor system and installing

air piping necessary for an operational system in accordance with these contract

drawings. Payment shall constitute complete compensation for all labor, materials and

equipment necessary to complete this work item. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall

be paid based on the percentages of work completed as approved by the ENGINEER.

Septage Receiving Station Modification

11. Bid Item 36 – Rock Trap, Septage Pit, Piping and Fittings Demolition: The LUMP SUM

BID AMOUNT will be payment for all demolition work associated with the existing

Rock Trap equipment, Septage Pit, piping and fittings. Existing Rock Trap Equipment

work includes, but is not limited to, equipment demolition, piping demolition, grout

filling, capping of pipes, and debris disposal in compliance with the all existing

regulations, of the existing Rock Trap equipment and other related items. The existing

Rock Trap Equipment shall be turned over to Wakulla County, if desired. The existing

Septage Pit work includes, but is not limited to, septage pit demolition, debris removal,

excavation and compaction. Payment shall constitute complete compensation for all

labor, materials, equipment and disposal costs necessary to complete this work item.

The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the percentages of work


12. Bid Item 37 – Septage Receiving Screw Screen and Fittings: The LUMP SUM BID

AMOUNT will be payment for furnishing and installing the Septage Receiving Screw

Screen equipment, fittings, and miscellaneous items in accordance with the contract

documents. This includes, but is not limited to, all fittings, restraints, supports,

flushing, and testing from the existing EleMech System to the Septage Receiving Screw

Screen effluent pipe/existing In-Plant pump station connection point. The LUMP SUM

BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the percentages of work completed as approved

by the ENGINEER.

13. Bid Item 38 – Septage Receiving Reuse Water Piping Valves, Fittings and

Appurtenances: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be payment for furnishing and

installing the Septage Receiving reuse water piping, fittings, valves, and miscellaneous

items in accordance with the contract documents. This includes, but is not limited to,

all piping, fittings, valves, restraints, service saddle, supports, flushing, and testing

from the 6” reuse water transition point to the Septage Receiving Screw Screen

equipment. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the percentages of

work completed as approved by the ENGINEER.

14. Bid Item 39 – Septage Receiving Concrete Pad: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be

payment for installing the concrete pad at the Septage Receiving Screw Screen.

Payment shall include but not be limited to grading, compaction, bedding, forming,

reinforcement, and concrete pouring as required in accordance with the contract

documents. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be based on the percentages of work





Project Site Electrical

15. Bid Item 40 – Electrical Instrumentation and Controls: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT

will be full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required for

installation of the electrical components as shown on the contract drawings. This

includes, but is not limited to, conduits, cables, conductors, panels and other

appurtenances to facilitate the operations of the identified equipment based on the

mode of operation. Payment will be made on a LUMP SUM basis, based on the

percentage of completion as approved by the Engineer.

Miscellaneous Items

16. Bid Item 42 – Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT

will be to cover the CONTRACTOR’s cost to comply with the requirements to prepare

and submit a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan prior to commencement of

construction. The CONTRACTOR may apply for payment of the first partial payment

request contingent upon approval by the ENGINEER.

17. Bid Item 43 – Dewatering: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be compensation for all

labor, equipment, and materials including, but not limited to, surface pumps, sump

pumps, well points and header pipe, and trenching/digging machinery. The discharge

associated with dewatering requires a permit from FDEP and it is the CONCTRACTOR’s

responsibility to obtain and maintain, including all required valving, sampling and

permits during construction. The LUMP SUM AMOUNT BID will be paid based on the

percentages of work completed as approved by the ENGINEER.

18. Bid Item 44 – Performance Demonstration (Minimum of 0.5% of Total Bid): The

LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be to provide all work necessary to demonstrate proper

operations of the system, including start-up of the equipment. The lump sum price for

performance demonstration will be a minimum of one half percent (0.5%) of the total

contract base bid amount. The CONTRACTOR may apply for payment upon satisfactory

submittal of the start-up reports.

19. Bid Item 45 – Closeout Documentation (Minimum of 0.5% of the Total Bid): The

LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be to provide all documentation necessary to close out

the project. The lump sum price for closeout documentation will be a minimum of one

half percent (0.5%) of the total contract base bid amount. The CONTRACTOR may

apply for payment upon satisfactory submittal of a clean set of as-built surveyed plans

showing locations of all equipment, pipe lines, valves and fittings installed, submit

consent of surety, assurance satisfactory to OWNER that unsettled claims will be

settled, proof to OWNER that taxes, fees, and similar obligations of CONTRACTOR have

been paid, waiver of lien from every entity (including the CONTRACTOR) that provided

services on the project, submittal of final pay request, and a warranty letter stating

CONTRACTOR’s obligation for defects and repairs for the duration of the warranty

period. The CONTRACTOR may apply for payment on the final pay request.

5.03 Unit Price

A. Where payment for items is shown on a unit price basis, payment will be made for the

actual quantity installed and will include all labor, material, and equipment necessary for

such.




Force main, Potable Water, Reuse, and Process Piping

1. Bid Item 2 – 2-inch PVC: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full compensation for

all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct, test, maintain, and all

other cost required to install the 2-inch PVC piping and hose bib for the existing in-

plant reuse system as described herein and within the contract documents, complete

as shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the Engineer. The pipe quantities to

be paid for under this section shall be based on the diameter and the

horizontal/vertical distance in linear feet of pipe measured along the top centerline of

the pipe in place complete and acceptable to the Engineer with deduction for the laid

length of valves and fittings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the

measured length of pipe installed during the requested period as approved by the

Engineer.

2. Bid Item 3 – 2-inch PVC 90 Degree Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full

compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct, test,

maintain, and all other cost required to install the 2-inch PVC 90 Degree Bend as

described herein and within the contract documents, complete as shown on the Plans,

specified, and directed by the Engineer. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid

based on the number of units installed during the requested period as approved by

the Engineer.

3. Bid Item 4 – 2-inch x 6-inch x 6-inch Tee: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full


maintain, and all other cost required to install the 2-inch x 6-inch x 6-inch Tee as


specified, and directed by the Engineer. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid


the Engineer.

4. Bid Item 5 – 2-inch Gate Valve: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full


maintain, and all other cost required to install the 2-inch Gate Valve as described

herein and within the contract documents, complete as shown on the Plans, specified,

and directed by the Engineer. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the

number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the Engineer.

5. Bid Item 6 – 6-inch Ductile Iron Piping: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full


maintain, and all other cost required to install the 6” DIP for the Septage Receiving

Screen and In-Plant Reuse piping loop as described herein and within the contract

documents, complete as shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the Engineer.

The pipe quantities to be paid for under this section shall be based on the diameter

and the horizontal/vertical distance in linear feet of pipe measured along the top

centerline of the pipe in place complete and acceptable to the Engineer with

deduction for the laid length of valves and fittings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall

be paid based on the measured length of pipe installed during the requested period as

approved by the Engineer.

6. Bid Item 7 – 6-inch 90 Degree Mechanical Joint Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT

will be full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to

construct, test, maintain, and all other cost required to install the 6-inch 90 Degree

Mechanical Joint Bend as described herein and within the contract documents,




complete as shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the Engineer. The UNIT

PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the number of units installed during the

requested period as approved by the Engineer.

7. Bid Item 8 – 8-inch Ductile Iron Pipe: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full


maintain, and all other cost required to install the 8” DIP for the proposed In-Plant

Pump Station and for the Filter Overflow piping as described herein and within the

contract documents, complete as shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the

Engineer. The pipe quantities to be paid for under this section shall be based on the

diameter and the horizontal/vertical distance in linear feet of pipe measured along the

top centerline of the pipe in place complete and acceptable to the Engineer with






maintain, and all other cost required to install the 12” DIP for the gravity sewer line

connecting the existing In-Plant Pump Station with the proposed In-Plant Pump Station

and for the reject diversion piping as described herein and within the contract

documents, complete as shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the Engineer.

The pipe quantities to be paid for under this section shall be based on the diameter

and the horizontal/vertical distance in linear feet of pipe measured along the top

centerline of the pipe in place complete and acceptable to the Engineer with






maintain, and all other cost required to install the 16” DIP Filter Bypass piping as


specified, and directed by the Engineer. The pipe quantities to be paid for under this

section shall be based on the diameter and the horizontal/vertical distance in linear

feet of pipe measured along the top centerline of the pipe in place complete and

acceptable to the Engineer with deduction for the laid length of valves and fittings. The

UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the measured length of pipe installed

during the requested period as approved by the Engineer.

10. Bid Item 11 – 12-inch 90 Degree Mechanical Joint Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID

AMOUNT will be full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary

to construct, test, maintain, and all other cost required to install the 12-inch 90 Degree

Mechanical Joint Bends as described herein and within the contract documents,

complete as shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the Engineer. The UNIT

PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the number of units installed during the

requested period as approved by the Engineer.

11. Bid Item 12 – 12-inch 90 Degree MJ x PE Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be

full compensation for all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to construct, test,

maintain, and all other cost required to install the 12-inch 90 Degree Mechanical Joint

by Plain End Bend as described herein and within the contract documents, complete as

shown on the Plans, specified, and directed by the Engineer. The UNIT PRICE BID




AMOUNT shall be paid based on the number of units installed during the requested

period as approved by the Engineer.

Valves

12. Bid Item 13 – 12-inch Horizontal Swing Check Valve: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT

will be full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and

equipment and incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with

these specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based

on the number of units installed during the requested period as approved by the

Engineer.

13. Bid Item 15 – 12-inch Tapping Sleeve and Valve: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be

full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and equipment and

incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with these

specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the


14. Bid Item 16 – 12-inch x 16-inch x 16-inch Tapping Sleeve and Valve: The UNIT PRICE

BID AMOUNT will be full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor,

and equipment and incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance

with these specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall be paid


the Engineer.


15. Bid Item 18 – 25 Horsepower Submersible Pumps: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will

be full compensation for furnishing and installing the lift station’s submersible pumps

and accessories. This includes, but is not limited to, pumps, base elbows, coatings,

guide rails, base plate, anchors, floats, and mounting brackets. The UNIT PRICE BID




16. Bid Item 24 – 12”x16” Mechanical Joint Reducer: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will

be full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and equipment

and incidentals necessary for an operational system in accordance with these



17. Bid Item 25 – 16-inch 90 Degree Mechanical Joint Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID

AMOUNT will be full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and




Engineer.

18. Bid Item 26 – 16-inch 90 Degree Flange Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be








19. Bid Item 27 – 8-inch 90 Degree Flange Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full

compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and equipment and




20. Bid Item 28 – 8-inch 22.5 Degree Flange Bend: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be





21. Bid Item 29 – 12”x12”x8” Flanged Tee: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full





22. Bid Item 30 – Turbidity Probes and Analyzers: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be





R-AWT1 Effluent Disposal Piping Modification

23. Bid Item 33 – 12-inch Magnetic Flow Meter: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT for

furnishing and installing the meter will be compensation in full for furnishing all

material, labor, and equipment and incidentals necessary for installing the meter in

accordance with these specifications and drawings. The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT shall

be paid based on the number of units installed during the requested period as


24. Bid Item 34 – 12-inch Uni-flange Fittings: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full





25. Bid Item 35 – 12-inch Restrained Flanged Coupling Adapter: The UNIT PRICE BID

AMOUNT will be full compensation for furnishing and installing all material, labor, and




Engineer.

Miscellaneous Items

26. Bid Item 41 – Floor Stand Assembly: The UNIT PRICE BID AMOUNT will be full


incidentals necessary in order to meet the contract document. The UNIT PRICE BID






5.04 Additive Alternates

A. The Owner may select the Base Bid, and add or deduct (as applicable) none, or any

combination of Alternate Bids in no particular order to the Base Bid.

1. Bid Item 1 – Erosion Control: The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT will be full compensation

for all labor, equipment, and materials required for erosion control. All work shall be

in accordance with the contract documents. The LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be

paid based on the percentages of work completed as approved by the Engineer.

2. Bid Item 2 – Site Paving, Grading and Stormwater Basin: The LUMP SUM BID

AMOUNT will be compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for

site work, site paving, select fill, earthwork, excavation, backfilling, compaction,

stormwater inlet structure, reinforced concrete piping, rip rap, testing, restoration,

and fencing as necessary and as shown and described in the contract documents. The

LUMP SUM BID AMOUNT shall be paid based on the percentages of work completed

as approved by the Engineer.

Basis of Bid:

ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT

PRICE AMOUNT

General/Civil

1

General Provisions including mobilization, de-mobilization, indemnification, and insurance (maximum of 5% of the Total bid)

1 LS

Force main, Potable Water, Reuse, and Process Piping

2 2-inch PVC 40 LF

3 2-inch 90 Degree Bend (PVC) 3 EA

4 2"x6"x6" Tee 1 EA

5 2-inch Gate Valve 1 EA

6 6-inch DIP 187 LF

7 6-inch 90 Degree MJ Bend 3 EA

8 8-inch DIP 186 LF

9 12-inch DIP 125 LF

10 16-inch DIP 75 LF


12 12-inch 90 Degree MJ x PE Bend 1 EA

Valves

13 12-inch Check Valve 1 EA

14 Check Valve and Meter Vault 1 LS

15 12-inch Tapping Sleeve and Valve 1 EA

16 12”x16”x16” Tapping Sleeve and Valve 1 EA

Existing In-Plant Pump Station

17 Existing In-Plant P.S. Demolition and Modification

1 LS





18 25 HP Submersible Pumps 3 EA

19 Fiberglass Wetwell and Accessories 1 LS

20 In-Plant P.S. Fittings, Valves, Meter and Miscellaneous Items

1 LS

21 In-Plant P.S. Concrete Pad 1 LS

Headworks Screen Walkway and Railway Modification

22 Screen Walkway and Railway Modification 1 LS

Emergency Eye Wash Station

23 Emergency Eye Wash Station Equipment, Piping, Fittings and Valves

1 LS


24 12"x16" MJ Reducer 1 EA


26 16-inch 90 Degree FL Bend 1 EA

27 8-inch 90 Degree FL Bend 6 EA

28 8-inch 22.5 Degree FL Bend 2 EA

29 12"x12"x8" FL Tee 2 EA

30 Turbidity Probes/Analyzers 2 EA

31 20-inch Core Drill with Double S.S. Link Seal

1 LS

32 Existing Filter Overflow Piping Demolition 1 LS

R-AWT1 Effluent Disposal Piping Modification

33 12-inch Magnetic Flow Meter 1 EA

34 12-inch Uni-flange Fitting 2 EA

35 12-inch Restrained Flanged Coupling Adapter

5 EA

Septage Receiving Station Modification

36 Rock Trap, Septage Pit, Piping and Fittings Demolition

1 LS

37 Septage Receiving Screw Screen and Fittings

1 LS

38 Septage Receiving Reuse Water Piping Valves, Fittings and Appurtenances

1 LS

39 Septage Receiving Concrete Pad 1 LS

Project Site Electrical

40 Electrical Panel, Conduits and Miscellaneous Electrical Installation

1 LS

Miscellaneous Items

41 Actuated Gate Valve Floor Stand Assembly

3 EA

42 Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan 1 LS

43 Dewatering 1 LS




44 Performance Demonstration (Minimum of 0.5% of Total Bid)

1 LS

45 Closeout Documentation (Minimum of 0.5% of Total Bid)

1 LS

TOTAL BASE BID FOR PROJECT 111803.10

All specified cash allowances are included in the price(s) set forth above, and have been

computed in accordance with Paragraph 13.02 of the General Conditions.

Total of All Base Bid Items $

Additive Alternates:

ITEM DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT UNIT PRICE AMOUNT

1 Erosion Control 1 LS

2 Site Paving, Grading and Stormwater Basin

1 LS

TOTAL ADDITIVE ALTERNATES FOR PROJECT 111803.10

All specified cash allowances are included in the price(s) set forth above, and have been

computed in accordance with Paragraph 13.02 of the General Conditions.

Total of All Additive Alternates Items $

ARTICLE 6 – TIME OF COMPLETION

6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete and will be completed and ready for

final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions on or before the

dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement.

6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages.

ARTICLE 7 – ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID

7.01 The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this Bid:

A. Required Bid security;

B. Schedule of Values;




C. List of Proposed Subcontractors;

D. List of Proposed Suppliers;

E. List of Project References;

F. Evidence of authority to do business in the state of the Project; or a written covenant to

obtain such license within the time for acceptance of Bids;

G. Required Qualification Statement (EJCDC C-451-2013) with supporting data;

H. If Bid amount exceeds $10,000, signed Compliance Statement (RD 400-6). Refer to

specific equal opportunity requirements set forth in the Supplemental General

Conditions;

I. If Bid amount exceeds $25,000, signed Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension,

Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion – Lower Tier Covered Transactions (AD-1048);

J. If Bid amount exceeds $100,000, signed RD Instruction 1940-Q, Exhibit A-01, Certification

for Contracts, Grants and Loans.

ARTICLE 8 – DEFINED TERMS

8.01 The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions

to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.

ARTICLE 9 – BID SUBMITTAL

BIDDER: [Indicate correct name of bidding entity]

By:

[Signature]

[Printed name]

(If Bidder is a corporation, a limited liability company, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach

evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest:

[Signature]

[Printed name]

Title:

Submittal Date:

Address for giving notices:




Telephone Number:

Fax Number:

Contact Name and e-mail address:

Bidder’s License No.:

(where applicable)

PENAL SUM FORM

EJCDC® C-430, Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form). Published 2013.

Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 1 of 2

BID BOND

Any singular reference to Bidder, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.

BIDDER (Name and Address):

SURETY (Name, and Address of Principal Place of Business):

OWNER (Name and Address):

Wakulla County Board of County Commissioners

3093 Crawfordville Rd.

Crawfordville, FL 32327

BID

Bid Due Date: May 17, 2016

Description (Project Name— Include Location): Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim Project

Lawhon Mill Rd., Crawfordville, FL

BOND

Bond Number:

Date:

Penal sum $

(Words) (Figures)

Surety and Bidder, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause

this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

BIDDER SURETY

(Seal) (Seal)

Bidder’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:

Signature Signature (Attach Power of Attorney)

Print Name Print Name

Title Title

Attest: Attest:

Signature Signature

Title Title

Note: Addresses are to be used for giving any required notice.

Provide execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers, if necessary.

PENAL SUM FORM

EJCDC® C-430, Bid Bond (Penal Sum Form). Published 2013.

Prepared by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 2 of 2

1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and

assigns to pay to Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of the

penal sum is the extent of Bidder’s and Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this Bond

shall be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon default of Bidder.

2. Default of Bidder shall occur upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding

Documents (or any extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding

Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents.

3. This obligation shall be null and void if:

3.1 Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any

extension thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding

Documents and any performance and payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or

3.2 All Bids are rejected by Owner, or

3.3 Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any

extension thereof agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required

by Paragraph 5 hereof).

4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after

receipt by Bidder and Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable

promptness, identifying this Bond and the Project and including a statement of the amount due.

5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of

Award agreed to in writing by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including

extensions shall not in the aggregate exceed 120 days from the Bid due date without Surety’s written consent.

6. No suit or action shall be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default

required in Paragraph 4 above is received by Bidder and Surety and in no case later than one year after the Bid due

date.

7. Any suit or action under this Bond shall be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the

state in which the Project is located.

8. Notices required hereunder shall be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown

on the face of this Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States

Registered or Certified Mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and shall be deemed to be effective upon

receipt by the party concerned.

9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority

of the officer, agent, or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such

Bond and bind the Surety thereby.

10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any

applicable statute that has been omitted from this Bond shall be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at

length. If any provision of this Bond conflicts with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute shall

govern and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflict therewith shall continue in full force and effect.

11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.

EJCDC® C-510, Notice of Award.

Prepared and published 2013 by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee.

Page 1 of 2

NOTICE OF AWARD

Date of Issuance:

Owner: Wakulla County Owner's Contract No.:

Engineer: Baskerville-Donovan, Inc. Engineer's Project No.: 111803.10

Project: Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment

Plant Interim Project

Contract Name:

Bidder:

Bidder’s Address:

TO BIDDER:

You are notified that Owner has accepted your Bid dated May 24, 2016 for the above Contract, and that you

are the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for: OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT

INTERIM PROJECT.

Constructing a screening and septage receiving unit, a grit removal system, a 1.2 MGD biological treatment unit,

tertiary filtration units, disinfection chambers, digestion, dewatering equipment, storage ponds, reclaimed water

pump station, operations building, associated electrical improvements and all appurtenances necessary for a

complete and operational system.

The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is: $ ______________________

5 unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement accompany this Notice of Award, and one copy of the

Contract Documents accompanies this Notice of Award, or has been transmitted or made available to

Bidder electronically. [revise if multiple copies accompany the Notice of Award]

a set of the Drawings will be delivered separately from the other Contract Documents.

You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of receipt of this Notice

of Award:

1. Deliver to Owner 5 counterparts of the Agreement, fully executed by Bidder.

2. Deliver with the executed Agreement(s) the Contract security [e.g., performance and payment bonds]

and insurance documentation as specified in the Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions,

Articles 2 and 6.

3. Other conditions precedent (if any):

Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in default,

annul this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited.

Within ten days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully executed

counterpart of the Agreement, together with any additional copies of the Contract Documents as indicated in

Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.

Owner: Wakulla County

Authorized Signature

By:

Title:

Copy: Engineer

EJCDC® C-510, Notice of Award.


Page 2 of 2


EJCDC® C-520, Agreement Between Owner and Contractor for Construction Contract (Stipulated Price).


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 6

AGREEMENT

BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT (STIPULATED PRICE)

THIS AGREEMENT is by and between Wakulla County Board of County Commissioners (“Owner”) and

(“Contractor”).

Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1 – WORK

1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The

Work is generally described as follows: constructing an in-plant pump station. septage receiving

auger screen unit, valve actuators, filter bypass piping, miscellaneous piping, instrumentation,

electrical improvements and all appurtenances necessary for a complete and operational

system.

ARTICLE 2 – THE PROJECT

2.01 The Project, of which the Work under the Contract Documents is generally described as follows:

Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim Project

ARTICLE 3 – ENGINEER

3.01 The Project has been designed by Baskerville-Donovan, Inc.

3.02 The Owner has retained Baskerville-Donovan, Inc. (“Engineer”) to act as Owner’s

representative, assume all duties and responsibilities, and have the rights and authority assigned

to Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with the completion of the Work in

accordance with the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT TIMES

4.01 Time of the Essence

A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness

for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.

4.02 Contract Times: Days

A. The Work will be substantially completed within 180 days after the date when the Contract

Times commence to run as provided in Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions, and

completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General

Conditions within 210 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run.

4.03 Liquidated Damages

A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01

above and that Owner will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed

and Milestones not achieved within the times specified in Paragraph 4.02 above, plus any

extensions thereof allowed in accordance with the Contract. The parties also recognize the

delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the




actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of

requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay

(but not as a penalty):

1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $1,500.00 for each day that

expires after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified in

Paragraph 4.02.A above for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially

complete.

2. Completion of Remaining Work: After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall

neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Time (as

duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) for completion and readiness for final

payment, Contractor shall pay Owner $1,000.00 for each day that expires after such

time until the Work is completed and ready for final payment.

3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and final

completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently.

4.04 [Deleted]

ARTICLE 5 – CONTRACT PRICE

5.01 Subject to adjustment under the Contract, Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the

Work in accordance with the Contract Documents the amount of: $_______________________.

A. Any specific cash allowances are included in the above price in accordance with Paragraph

13.02 of the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 6 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES

6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments

A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the

General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in

the General Conditions.

6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage

A. Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of

Contractor’s Applications for Payment on or about the 25th day of each month during

performance of the Work as provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below, provided that such

Applications for Payment have been submitted in a timely manner and otherwise meet the

requirements of the Contract. All such payments will be measured by the Schedule of

Values established as provided in the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price

Work based on the number of units completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of

Values, as provided elsewhere in the Contract.

1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal

to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments

previously made and less such amounts as Owner may withhold, including but not

limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with the Contract

a. 95 percent of Work completed (with the balance being retainage); If the Work

has been 50 percent completed as determined by Engineer, and if the character

and progress of the Work have been satisfactory to Owner and Engineer, then




as long as the character and progress of the Work remain satisfactory to Owner

and Engineer, there will be no additional retainage; and

b. 95 percent of cost of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (with

the balance being retainage).

B. Upon Substantial Completion of the entire construction to be provided under the Contract

Documents, Owner shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total payments to Contractor

to 100 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts set off by Owner pursuant to

Paragraph 15.01.E of the General Conditions, and less 200 percent of Engineer’s estimate of

the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on the punch list of items to be

completed or corrected prior to final payment.

6.03 Final Payment

A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of

the General Conditions, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as

recommended by Engineer as provided in said Paragraph 15.06.

ARTICLE 7 – INTEREST

7.01 All amounts not paid when due shall bear interest at the rate of __0___ percent per annum.

ARTICLE 8 – CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS

8.01 In order to induce Owner to enter into this Contract, Contractor makes the following

representations:

A. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents, and any data and

reference items identified in the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor has visited the Site, conducted a thorough, alert visual examination of the Site

and adjacent areas, and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and

Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

C. Contractor is familiar with and is satisfied as to all Laws and Regulations that may affect

cost, progress, and performance of the Work.

D. Contractor has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface

conditions at or adjacent to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to

existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in the

Supplementary Conditions, especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and

drawings, and (2) reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if

any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified in the Supplementary Conditions,

especially with respect to Technical Data in such reports and drawings.

E. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor itself; information

commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; information and

observations obtained from visits to the Site; and the Contract Documents; and the Site-

related reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, with respect to the

effect of such information, observations, and documents on (1) the cost, progress, and

performance of the Work; (2) the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures

of construction to be employed by Contractor; and (3) Contractor’s safety precautions and

programs.




F. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph,

Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies,

or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the

Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract.

G. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at

the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.

H. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or

discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and the written

resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.

I. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of

all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.

J. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by

Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon

performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

9.01 Contents

A. The Contract Documents consist of the following:

1. This Agreement (pages 1 to 8 inclusive).

2. Performance bond (pages 1 to 4, inclusive).

3. Payment bond (pages 1 to 4, inclusive).

4. Other bonds.

a. ___ (pages ___ to ___, inclusive).

5. General Conditions (pages 1 to 70, inclusive).

6. Supplementary Conditions (pages 1 to 14, inclusive).

7. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the Project Manual.

8. Drawings (not attached but incorporated by reference) consisting of 164 sheets with

each sheet bearing the following general title: Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment

Plant Interim Project.

9. Addenda (numbers 1 to 2, inclusive).

10. Exhibits to this Agreement (enumerated as follows):

a. Contractor’s Bid Schedule of Value (pages ___ to ___, inclusive).

11. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the

Contract and are not attached hereto:

a. Notice to Proceed.

b. Work Change Directives.

c. Change Orders.

d. Field Orders.




B. The documents listed in Paragraph 9.01.A are attached to this Agreement (except as

expressly noted otherwise above).

C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 9.

D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in

the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 10 – MISCELLANEOUS

10.01 Terms

A. Terms used in this Agreement will have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and

the Supplementary Conditions.

10.02 Assignment of Contract

A. Unless expressly agreed to elsewhere in the Contract, no assignment by a party hereto of

any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on another party hereto

without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but without

limitation, money that may become due and money that is due may not be assigned

without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited

by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an

assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or

responsibility under the Contract Documents.

10.03 Successors and Assigns

A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives to

the other party hereto, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to all

covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.

10.04 Severability

A. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under

any Law or Regulation shall be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions shall continue

to be valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, who agree that the Contract

Documents shall be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof with a valid

and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the intention of the

stricken provision.

10.05 Contractor’s Certifications

A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive

practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph

10.05:

1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing of

value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the

Contract execution;

2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to

influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of

Owner, (b) to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c)

to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;




3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders,

with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid prices

at artificial, non-competitive levels; and

4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly,

persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or

affect the execution of the Contract.

10.06 Other Provisions

A. Owner stipulates that if the General Conditions that are made a part of this Contract are

based on EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions for the Construction Contract,

published by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee®, and if Owner is the

party that has furnished said General Conditions, then Owner has plainly shown all

modifications to the standard wording of such published document to the Contractor,

through a process such as highlighting or “track changes” (redline/strikeout), or in the


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement.

This Agreement will be effective on _______________________________ (which is the Effective Date of

the Contract).

OWNER: CONTRACTOR:

Wakulla County

By: By:

Title: Title:

(If Contractor is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint

venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest: Attest:

Title: Title:

Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:

License No.:

(where applicable)

(If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence of authority

to sign. If Owner is a public body, attach evidence of

authority to sign and resolution or other documents

authorizing execution of this Agreement.)

NOTE TO USER: Use in those states or other

jurisdictions where applicable or required.

EJCDC® C-700, Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract.



STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology ......................................................................................... 1

1.01 Defined Terms ........................................................................................................................ 1

1.02 Terminology ........................................................................................................................... 5

Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ....................................................................................................... 6

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance ........................................................................ 6

2.02 Copies of Documents ............................................................................................................. 6

2.03 Before Starting Construction ................................................................................................. 6

2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ........................... 7

2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................. 7

2.06 Electronic Transmittals ........................................................................................................... 7

Article 3 – Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse .................................................................... 8

3.01 Intent ...................................................................................................................................... 8

3.02 Reference Standards .............................................................................................................. 8

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ................................................................................. 8

3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents ............................................................................ 9

3.05 Reuse of Documents ............................................................................................................ 10

Article 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work ................................................................ 10

4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ...................................................... 10

4.02 Starting the Work ................................................................................................................. 10

4.03 Reference Points .................................................................................................................. 10

4.04 Progress Schedule ................................................................................................................ 10

4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress ........................................................................................... 11

Article 5 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental

Conditions ..................................................................................................................................... 12

5.01 Availability of Lands ............................................................................................................. 12

5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ................................................................................................. 12

5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ..................................................................................... 13

5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ........................................................................ 14

5.05 Underground Facilities ......................................................................................................... 15



and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page ii

5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ...................................................................... 17

Article 6 – Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................... 19

6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ........................................................................... 19

6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ............................................................................................ 19

6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ......................................................................................................... 20

6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance .................................................................................................. 23

6.05 Property Insurance ............................................................................................................... 23

6.06 Waiver of Rights ................................................................................................................... 25

6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds ................................................... 25

Article 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ....................................................................................... 26

7.01 Supervision and Superintendence ....................................................................................... 26

7.02 Labor; Working Hours .......................................................................................................... 26

7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ..................................................................................... 26

7.04 “Or Equals” ........................................................................................................................... 27

7.05 Substitutes ........................................................................................................................... 28

7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others ............................................................. 29

7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties .................................................................................................... 31

7.08 Permits ................................................................................................................................. 31

7.09 Taxes .................................................................................................................................... 32

7.10 Laws and Regulations ........................................................................................................... 32

7.11 Record Documents ............................................................................................................... 32

7.12 Safety and Protection ........................................................................................................... 32

7.13 Safety Representative .......................................................................................................... 33

7.14 Hazard Communication Programs ....................................................................................... 33

7.15 Emergencies ......................................................................................................................... 34

7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals .................................................................. 34

7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee................................................................... 36

7.18 Indemnification .................................................................................................................... 37

7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ......................................................................... 37

Article 8 – Other Work at the Site ................................................................................................ 38

8.01 Other Work .......................................................................................................................... 38

8.02 Coordination ........................................................................................................................ 39

8.03 Legal Relationships ............................................................................................................... 39



and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iii

Article 9 – Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................................. 40

9.01 Communications to Contractor ............................................................................................ 40

9.02 Replacement of Engineer ..................................................................................................... 40

9.03 Furnish Data ......................................................................................................................... 40

9.04 Pay When Due ...................................................................................................................... 40

9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings .......................................................... 40

9.06 Insurance .............................................................................................................................. 40

9.07 Change Orders ...................................................................................................................... 40

9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 41

9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities .............................................................................. 41

9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition ............................................................... 41

9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements .................................................................................... 41

9.12 Safety Programs ................................................................................................................... 41

Article 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ...................................................................... 41

10.01 Owner’s Representative ....................................................................................................... 41

10.02 Visits to Site .......................................................................................................................... 41

10.03 Project Representative ......................................................................................................... 42

10.04 Rejecting Defective Work ..................................................................................................... 42

10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments .................................................................... 42

10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work .................................................................................... 42

10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................ 42

10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities .................................................... 42

10.09 Compliance with Safety Program ......................................................................................... 43

Article 11 – Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ...................................... 43

11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents .......................................................... 43

11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................. 44

11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ..................................................................................... 44

11.04 Change of Contract Price ..................................................................................................... 44

11.05 Change of Contract Times .................................................................................................... 45

11.06 Change Proposals ................................................................................................................. 45

11.07 Execution of Change Orders ................................................................................................. 46

11.08 Notification to Surety ........................................................................................................... 47

Article 12 – Claims ......................................................................................................................... 47



and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page iv

12.01 Claims ................................................................................................................................... 47

Article 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work ........................................................ 48

13.01 Cost of the Work .................................................................................................................. 48

13.02 Allowances ........................................................................................................................... 50

13.03 Unit Price Work .................................................................................................................... 51

Article 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ....... 52

14.01 Access to Work ..................................................................................................................... 52

14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals ........................................................................................ 52

14.03 Defective Work..................................................................................................................... 53

14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work ............................................................................................. 53

14.05 Uncovering Work ................................................................................................................. 53

14.06 Owner May Stop the Work .................................................................................................. 54

14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work .................................................................................... 54

Article 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period .......................... 55

15.01 Progress Payments ............................................................................................................... 55

15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ............................................................................................. 58

15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................ 58

15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ..................................................................................................... 59

15.05 Final Inspection .................................................................................................................... 59

15.06 Final Payment ....................................................................................................................... 59

15.07 Waiver of Claims .................................................................................................................. 61

15.08 Correction Period ................................................................................................................. 61

Article 16 – Suspension of Work and Termination ....................................................................... 62

16.01 Owner May Suspend Work .................................................................................................. 62

16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ......................................................................................... 62

16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience ............................................................................. 63

16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................ 63

Article 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes ...................................................................................... 64

17.01 Methods and Procedures ..................................................................................................... 64

Article 18 – Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................ 64

18.01 Giving Notice ........................................................................................................................ 64

18.02 Computation of Times .......................................................................................................... 64

18.03 Cumulative Remedies .......................................................................................................... 64



and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. Page v

18.04 Limitation of Damages ......................................................................................................... 65

18.05 No Waiver ............................................................................................................................ 65

18.06 Survival of Obligations ......................................................................................................... 65

18.07 Controlling Law .................................................................................................................... 65

18.08 Headings ............................................................................................................................... 65




ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY

1.01 Defined Terms

A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with

initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the meaning

indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with

initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and

paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.

1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which

clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract

Documents.

2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets

forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer,

and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents.

3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to Engineer which is to be used by

Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and

which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the

Contract Documents.

4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices

for the Work to be performed.

5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner.

6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract Documents,

and all Addenda.

7. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders,

Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any attachments.

8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and authorizes

an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or

the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or after the Effective

Date of the Contract.

9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance with

the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in Contract Price

or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer concerning the

requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the

Contract Documents; challenging a set-off against payments due; or seeking other

relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.

10. Claim—(a) A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in

compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein: seeking an adjustment

of Contract Price or Contract Times, or both; contesting an initial decision by Engineer

concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work

under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s decision regarding a Change

Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer has declined to

address; or seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract; or (b) a

demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in compliance

with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting Engineer’s decision

regarding a Change Proposal; or seeking resolution of a contractual issue that Engineer




has declined to address. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a

Claim.

11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated

biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other

material of any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed

pursuant to (a) the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and

Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. (“CERCLA”); (b) the Hazardous Materials

Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5501 et seq.; (c) the Resource Conservation and

Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. (“RCRA”); (d) the Toxic Substances Control Act,

15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; (e) the Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; (f) the

Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or (g) any other federal, state, or local statute,

law, rule, regulation, ordinance, resolution, code, order, or decree regulating, relating

to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or

dangerous waste, substance, or material.

12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between the Owner and

Contractor concerning the Work.

13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which

together comprise the Contract.

14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion

of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. .

15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a)

achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the

Work.

16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for

performance of the Work.

17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition.

18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and

character of the Work to be performed by Contractor.

19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the

Contract becomes effective.

20. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.

21. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in the

Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times.

22. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of

Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or

property exposed thereto. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for

the execution of the Work, or that are to be incorporated in the Work, and that are

controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and

the requirements of the Contract, does not establish a Hazardous Environmental

Condition.

23. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes,

rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies,

agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction.




24. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds, real

property, or personal property.

25. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract

requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date or by a time prior

to Substantial Completion of all the Work.

26. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of

the Bid.

27. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which

the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to

perform the Work.

28. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding the

Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work,

pursuant to the terms of the Contract.

29. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing

the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to

accomplish the Work within the Contract Times.

30. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers,

contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing,

commissioning, and start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the

Contract Documents is a part.

31. Project Manual—The written documents prepared for, or made available for,

procuring and constructing the Work, including but not limited to the Bidding

Documents or other construction procurement documents, geotechnical and existing

conditions information, the Agreement, bond forms, General Conditions,

Supplementary Conditions, and Specifications. The contents of the Project Manual

may be bound in one or more volumes.

32. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer assigned

to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative

or “RPR” includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project Representative.

33. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are

representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by which

such portion of the Work will be judged.

34. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of

required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the submittals

and the performance of related construction activities.

35. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating

portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for

reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.

36. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or

information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and

submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings,

whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents.




37. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner

upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way and easements, and

such other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for the use of Contractor.

38. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for

materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work,

and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the

Work.

39. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with

any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work.

40. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof) has

progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a specified

part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so

that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the purposes for which it

is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and “substantially completed” as

applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof.

41. Successful Bidder—The Bidder whose Bid the Owner accepts, and to which the Owner

makes an award of contract, subject to stated conditions.

42. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements

these General Conditions.

43. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor

having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials

or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor.

44. Technical Data—Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the

Supplementary Conditions, with respect to either (a) subsurface conditions at the Site,

or physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site

(except Underground Facilities) or (b) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site.

If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with respect to

conditions at the Site, then the data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements

of subsurface water levels, laboratory test results, and other factual, objective

information regarding conditions at the Site that are set forth in any geotechnical or

environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are

hereby defined as Technical Data with respect to conditions at the Site under

Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06.

45. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires,

manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any

encasements containing such facilities, including but not limited to those that convey

electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other

communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm

water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems.

46. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.

47. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof

required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the

result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to

produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and

equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as testing,

start-up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents.




48. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the

Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer,

ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work.

1.02 Terminology

A. The words and terms discussed in the following paragraphs are not defined but, when used

in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.

B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives:

1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,”

“as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of professional

judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,”

“acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to

describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It is intended that

such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to

evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract

Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as

shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement

indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and

shall not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct

the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility

contrary to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract

Documents.

C. Day:

1. The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next

midnight.

D. Defective:

1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is

unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:

a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or

b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard,

test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or

c. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless

responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at

Substantial Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or 15.04).

E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide:

1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment,

shall mean to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to the Site (or

some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable or operable

condition.

2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment,

shall mean to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or

equipment complete and ready for intended use.




3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services, materials,

or equipment, shall mean to furnish and install said services, materials, or equipment

complete and ready for intended use.

4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to

specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four

words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and

install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.

F. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-

known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract

Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning.

ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS

2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance

A. Bonds: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of the Agreement to Owner,

Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such bonds as Contractor may be required to furnish.

B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the executed counterparts of

the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each

named insured and additional insured (as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or

elsewhere in the Contract), the certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be

provided by Contractor in accordance with Article 6.

C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the executed counterparts of the

Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly

deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional insured (as

identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise), the certificates and other

evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under Article 6.

2.02 Copies of Documents

A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully

executed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document

format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of

reproduction.

B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the

Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other

design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the Contract

available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities under this

provision to Engineer.

2.03 Before Starting Construction

A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as

otherwise specifically required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to

Engineer for timely review:

1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for

starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones

specified in the Contract;

2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and




3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and

prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides

the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress

payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate

amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.

2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives

A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor,

Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding

among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedules referred to in Paragraph

2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other submittals, processing

Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and maintaining required

records.

B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific

individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and

responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit

and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on

behalf of each respective party.

2.05 Initial Acceptance of Schedules

A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference,

attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review for

acceptability to Engineer as provided below the schedules submitted in accordance with

Paragraph 2.03.A. Contractor shall have an additional 10 days to make corrections and

adjustments and to complete and resubmit the schedules. No progress payment shall be

made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer.

1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly

progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance

will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for sequencing,

scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve Contractor from

Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.

2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a

workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.

3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and

substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the component

parts of the Work.

2.06 Electronic Transmittals

A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor

may transmit, and shall accept, Project-related correspondence, text, data, documents,

drawings, information, and graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other

submittals, in electronic media or digital format, either directly, or through access to a

secure Project website.

B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for electronic or digital transmittals, then

Owner, Engineer, and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols.

C. When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes

no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items

resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or




computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items, or

from those established in applicable transmittal protocols.

ARTICLE 3 – DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE

3.01 Intent

A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if

required by all.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or

part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the

electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies

derived from such electronic or digital versions) and the printed record version, the printed

record version shall govern.

D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether

written or oral.

E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as provided

herein.

3.02 Reference Standards

A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations

1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference

standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or

Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the

standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in

effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there

were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract

Documents.

2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code,

or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or

responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors,

consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the part of the Contract

Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or instruction shall be

effective to assign to Owner, Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to

supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake

responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract Documents

prepared by or for Engineer.

3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies

A. Reporting Discrepancies:

1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking each

part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and check

and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect to

applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer

any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or has actual

knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until the conflict,




error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or interpretation by

Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents issued

pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.

2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of

the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within

the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable

Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification, manual,

reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor

shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the

Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15) until

the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a clarification or

interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract

Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.

3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict,

error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had

actual knowledge thereof.

B. Resolving Discrepancies:

1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the

provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer shall

take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between

such provisions of the Contract Documents and:

a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or code,

or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by

reference as a Contract Document); or

b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the

Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract Documents

would result in violation of such Law or Regulation).

3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents

A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall

submit to the Engineer all matters in question concerning the requirements of the Contract

Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or interpretation—RFIs), or

relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents, as soon as possible

after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the

Contract Documents, and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder.

B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation, or

decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the Contract

Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be final and

binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and on Owner,

unless it appeals by filing a Claim.

C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract

Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under the

Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or

otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly give

written notice to Owner and Contractor that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or

interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a matter

in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12.




3.05 Reuse of Documents

A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not:

1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications,

or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of

Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media editions, or reuse any such

Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the

Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer and

specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or

2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents, reuse

any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express written

consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents.

B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the

Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract

Documents for record purposes.

ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK

4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed

A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of

the Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to

Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective

Date of the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the

sixtieth day after the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the

Contract, whichever date is earlier.

4.02 Starting the Work

A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times

commence to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date.

4.03 Reference Points

A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction

which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the

Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve

the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes or

relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to

Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or

requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be

responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or property

monuments by professionally qualified personnel.

4.04 Progress Schedule

A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph

2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.

1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in

Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result in

changing the Contract Times.




2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times

shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11.

B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all disputes

or disagreements with Owner. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution

of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as permitted by

Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing.

4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress

A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or

interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled

to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times and Contract Price. Contractor’s

entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment

being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times.

B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for

delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay,

disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or

Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor.

C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by

unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and

those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable

adjustment in Contract Times. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract

Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete

the Work within the Contract Times. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and

exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph.

Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an adjustment in Contract

Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the following:

1. severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and

earthquakes;

2. abnormal weather conditions;

3. acts or failures to act of utility owners (other than those performing other work at or

adjacent to the Site by arrangement with the Owner, as contemplated in Article 8);

and

4. acts of war or terrorism.

D. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting

from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an Underground Facility

that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not shown or indicated

with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous Environmental Conditions,

are governed by Article 5.

E. Paragraph 8.03 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or

progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent

to the Site.

F. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for

any delay, disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or

interference caused by or within the control of Contractor.




G. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or

Contract Times under this paragraph within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying,

disrupting, or interfering event.

ARTICLE 5 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

5.01 Availability of Lands

A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or

restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which

Contractor must comply in performing the Work.

B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current statement

of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent improvements

are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice of or filing a

mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with applicable Laws and

Regulations.

C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for

temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.

5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas

A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas:

1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the

storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site,

adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or

otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not

unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with construction

equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility

for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent areas used for

Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or areas; and (d) for

injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of any such land or areas;

provided that such damage or injuries result from the performance of the Work or

from other actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is

responsible.

2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or area

because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of

the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a) take

immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.12, or otherwise;

(b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with

such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute

resolution proceeding, or at law; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and

Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers,

directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of

each and any of them from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses,

and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,

attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute

resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable,

brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party

indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part




by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other actions

or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.

B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the

Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste

materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials,

rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and

the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work

Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances, construction

equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition all

property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.

D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be

loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any

part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will endanger

them.

5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. those reports known to Owner of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or

adjacent to the Site;

2. those drawings known to Owner of physical conditions relating to existing surface or

subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities); and

3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.

B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the

accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with

respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract

Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely

upon the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any

geotechnical or environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to

Contractor. Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or

make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including,

but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and

procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and

programs incident thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or

shown or indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any

such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.




5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions

A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is

uncovered or revealed at the Site either:

1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is

entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; or

2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications; or

3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or

4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered

and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the

Contract Documents;

then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further

disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection

therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and

Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not further disturb such

condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except with respect to an

emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting Contractor to do so.

B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding paragraph,

Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in question; determine

the necessity of Owner’s obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the

condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any one or more of the differing site

condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A above; obtain any pertinent cost or schedule

information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the

Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in

question and the need for any change in the Drawings or Specifications; and advise Owner

in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations.

C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s

written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written statement

to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical condition in

question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such condition, indicating

whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting or

rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, in whole or in

part.

D. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract

Times, or both, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical

condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or

decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work;

subject, however, to the following:

a. such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in

Paragraph 5.04.A;

b. with respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in

Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and,




c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned

on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work

within the Contract Times.

2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract

Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if:

a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made a

commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by the

submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or

otherwise; or

b. the existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or

revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study

of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements

or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor prior to Contractor’s

making such commitment; or

c. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A.

3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount

or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any

such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount

or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later

than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor

regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question.

5.05 Underground Facilities

A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract

Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is

based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such

Underground Facilities, including Owner, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly

provided in the Supplementary Conditions:

1. Owner and Engineer do not warrant or guarantee the accuracy or completeness of any

such information or data provided by others; and

2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor

shall have full responsibility for:

a. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground

Facilities at the Site;

b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents

as being at the Site;

c. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such

Underground Facilities, during construction; and

d. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and

repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.

B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is uncovered

or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not

shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall, promptly after




becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or

performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by

Paragraph 7.15), identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give written notice to

that owner and to Owner and Engineer.

C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude

whether such Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents,

or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; obtain any pertinent cost or

schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to Owner regarding the

Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the Underground Facility in question;

determine the extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications

to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground

Facility; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and

recommendations. During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and

protection of such Underground Facility.

D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of

Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written

statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground Facility in

question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such Underground Facility,

indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made, and adopting

or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations in whole or in

part.

E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments:

1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or

Contract Times, or both, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the

Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or

indicated with reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference,

causes an increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for,

performance of the Work; subject, however, to the following:

a. Contractor did not know of and could not reasonably have been expected to be

aware of or to have anticipated the existence or actual location of the

Underground Facility in question;

b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in

Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03;

c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned

on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to complete the Work

within the Contract Times; and

d. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B.

2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the amount

or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then any

such adjustment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount

or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, no later

than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor

regarding the Underground Facility in question.




5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site

A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:

1. those reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental

Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and

2. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.

B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the

accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with

respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract

Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely on

the accuracy of the Technical Data (as defined in Article 1) contained in any geotechnical or

environmental report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor. Except for

such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against

Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees,

agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to:

1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including,

but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and

procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and

programs incident thereto; or

2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or

shown or indicated in such drawings; or

3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or any

such other data, interpretations, opinions or information.

C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous

Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such

removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the

scope of the Work.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all

Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or

anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the

costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by the

presence of any such Constituents of Concern.

E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition whose

removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as being

within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is

responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall

immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in connection

with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required

by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm

such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer concerning the

necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take

corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer, Owner shall take such

actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain required permits and provide

Contractor the written notice required by Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for

whom Contractor is responsible created the Hazardous Environmental Condition in

question, then Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition,

and impose a set-off against payments to account for the associated costs.




F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental

Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits

related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such

condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work,

or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely.

G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if

any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, as a result of such

Work stoppage or such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by

Contractor, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the resumption of

Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose a set-off.

H. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work

based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under

such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area

affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change

procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by

Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8.

I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold

harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them

from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees

and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or

arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous

Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental Condition (1) was

not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other Contract Documents,

identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to Paragraph 5.06.B, or

identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the scope of the Work, and (2)

was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in

this Paragraph 5.06.H shall obligate Owner to indemnify any individual or entity from and

against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and

hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,

employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and

against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and

charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or

arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to

control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or

by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition

created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this

Paragraph 5.06.J shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and

against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.

K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of

Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed

at the Site.




ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE

6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds

A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at

least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of all

of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds shall remain in effect until one

year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction

period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by

Laws or Regulations, the Supplementary Conditions, or other specific provisions of the

Contract. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds as are required by the

Supplementary Conditions or other specific provisions of the Contract.

B. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract except as provided otherwise by

Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in “Companies

Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as

Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (as amended and

supplemented) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S.

Department of the Treasury. A bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be

accompanied by a certified copy of that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The

evidence of authority shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact

signed the accompanying bond.

C. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed or

authorized in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue bonds in the required

amounts.

D. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent,

or its right to do business is terminated in any state or jurisdiction where any part of the

Project is located, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor

shall promptly notify Owner and Engineer and shall, within 20 days after the event giving

rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with

the bond and surety requirements above.

E. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor from

the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.

F. Upon request, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to any Subcontractor,

Supplier, or other person or entity claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the


6.02 Insurance—General Provisions

A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in

the Supplementary Conditions.

B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or

Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or

authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue insurance

policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in the

Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required under

this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A-VII or better.

C. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each named insured and additional

insured (as identified in this Article, in the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the

Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Contractor has obtained and is




maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Upon

request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other evidence of such

required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies and endorsements, and

documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. Contractor may block

out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any policy or

endorsement furnished under this provision.

D. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each named insured and additional

insured (as identified in this Article, the Supplementary Conditions, or elsewhere in the

Contract), certificates of insurance establishing that Owner has obtained and is maintaining

the policies, coverages, and endorsements required of Owner by the Contract (if any).

Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also provide other evidence

of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to copies of policies and

endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles.

Owner may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in

any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.

E. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other

party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or

Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, shall not be

construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance.

F. If either party does not purchase or maintain all of the insurance required of such party by

the Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase

prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the

required coverage.

G. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Owner may exclude the

Contractor from the Site, impose an appropriate set-off against payment, and exercise

Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.

H. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required

insurance, the other party may elect to obtain equivalent insurance to protect such other

party’s interests at the expense of the party who was required to provide such coverage,

and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly.

I. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract

necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests.

J. The insurance and insurance limits required herein shall not be deemed as a limitation on

Contractor’s liability under the indemnities granted to Owner and other individuals and

entities in the Contract.

6.03 Contractor’s Insurance

A. Workers’ Compensation: Contractor shall purchase and maintain workers’ compensation

and employer’s liability insurance for:

1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee

benefit acts.

2. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act and Jones Act

coverage (if applicable).

3. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death

of Contractor’s employees (by stop-gap endorsement in monopolist worker’s

compensation states).




4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable).

B. Commercial General Liability—Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain

commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of

Contractor, on an occurrence basis, against:

1. claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any

person other than Contractor’s employees.

2. claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage.

3. claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction

of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom.

C. Commercial General Liability—Form and Content: Contractor’s commercial liability policy

shall be written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form)

and include the following coverages and endorsements:

1. Products and completed operations coverage:

a. Such insurance shall be maintained for three years after final payment.

b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified in

the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of

continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter.

2. Blanket contractual liability coverage, to the extent permitted by law, including but not

limited to coverage of Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph

7.18.

3. Broad form property damage coverage.

4. Severability of interest.

5. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage.

6. Personal injury coverage.

7. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and products

and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10 10 01 and CG

20 37 10 01 (together); or CG 20 10 07 04 and CG 20 37 07 04 (together); or their

equivalent.

8. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04,

“Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named

Insured” or its equivalent.

D. Automobile liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance

against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property

damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The

automobile liability policy shall be written on an occurrence basis.

E. Umbrella or excess liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess

liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general

liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Subject to

industry-standard exclusions, the coverage afforded shall follow form as to each and every

one of the underlying policies.

F. Contractor’s pollution liability insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain a policy

covering third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs, as a result




of pollution conditions arising from Contractor’s operations and completed operations. This

insurance shall be maintained for no less than three years after final completion.

G. Additional insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability,

umbrella or excess, and pollution liability policies shall include and list as additional

insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or entities identified in the

Supplementary Conditions; include coverage for the respective officers, directors,

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of

all such additional insureds; and the insurance afforded to these additional insureds shall

provide primary coverage for all claims covered thereby (including as applicable those

arising from both ongoing and completed operations) on a non-contributory basis.

Contractor shall obtain all necessary endorsements to support these requirements.

H. Contractor’s professional liability insurance: If Contractor will provide or furnish

professional services under this Contract, through a delegation of professional design

services or otherwise, then Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining

applicable professional liability insurance. This insurance shall provide protection against

claims arising out of performance of professional design or related services, and caused by

a negligent error, omission, or act for which the insured party is legally liable. It shall be

maintained throughout the duration of the Contract and for a minimum of two years after

Substantial Completion. If such professional design services are performed by a

Subcontractor, and not by Contractor itself, then the requirements of this paragraph may

be satisfied through the purchasing and maintenance of such insurance by such

Subcontractor.

I. General provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 shall:

1. include at least the specific coverages provided in this Article.

2. be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article and in the

Supplementary Conditions, or required by Laws or Regulations, whichever is greater.

3. contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled,

materially changed, or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written notice has

been given to Contractor. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice,

Contractor shall provide a copy of the notice to Owner, Engineer, and each other

insured under the policy.

4. remain in effect at least until final payment (and longer if expressly required in this

Article) and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or

replacing defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or

returning to the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.

5. be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims that

may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s

other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by

Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly

employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts

any of them may be liable.

J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met by such policies,

and not by reference to excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies.




6.04 Owner’s Liability Insurance

A. In addition to the insurance required to be provided by Contractor under Paragraph 6.03,

Owner, at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain at Owner’s expense Owner’s own

liability insurance as will protect Owner against claims which may arise from operations

under the Contract Documents.

B. Owner’s liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies

required to be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability

policies for any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties.

6.05 Property Insurance

A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall

purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed value basis,

in the amount of the full insurable replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible

amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and

Regulations). This insurance shall:

1. include the Owner and Contractor as named insureds, and all Subcontractors, and any

individuals or entities required by the Supplementary Conditions to be insured under

such builder’s risk policy, as insureds or named insureds. For purposes of the

remainder of this Paragraph 6.05, Paragraphs 6.06 and 6.07, and any corresponding

Supplementary Conditions, the parties required to be insured shall collectively be

referred to as “insureds.”

2. be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that shall at least include insurance

for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials

and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes

of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact;

aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown,

boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic

activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal;

demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other

than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be

specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions. If insurance against mechanical

breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake;

volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available

under builder’s risk policies, by endorsement or otherwise, such insurance may be

provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor.

3. cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials,

supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar

nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication,

construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including Owner-furnished or

assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the Contract;

and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the permanent

constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to the Site, or to

the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide temporary support for

the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring,

falsework, and temporary structures.

4. cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property

(including but not limited to fees and charges of engineers and architects).




5. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at the

Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored at the

premises of a manufacturer or Supplier).

6. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit.

7. allow for partial occupation or use of the Work by Owner, such that those portions of

the Work that are not yet occupied or used by Owner shall remain covered by the

builder’s risk insurance.

8. allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights, as set forth below.

9. provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of

loss covered.

10. not include a co-insurance clause.

11. include an exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to

any defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions.

12. include performance/hot testing and start-up.

13. be maintained in effect, subject to the provisions herein regarding Substantial

Completion and partial occupancy or use of the Work by Owner, until the Work is

complete.

B. Notice of Cancellation or Change: All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other

evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with this

Paragraph 6.05 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not

be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 10 days prior written

notice has been given to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any

such written notice, the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each

other insured.

C. Deductibles: The purchaser of any required builder’s risk or property insurance shall pay for

costs not covered because of the application of a policy deductible.

D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the

Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work as provided in Paragraph 15.04, then

Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy, or through Contractor) will

provide notice of such occupancy or use to the builder’s risk insurer. The builder’s risk

insurance shall not be canceled or permitted to lapse on account of any such partial use or

occupancy; rather, those portions of the Work that are occupied or used by Owner may

come off the builder’s risk policy, while those portions of the Work not yet occupied or

used by Owner shall remain covered by the builder’s risk insurance.

E. Additional Insurance: If Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in

or supplement the builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this

Paragraph 6.05, it may do so at Contractor’s expense.

F. Insurance of Other Property: If the express insurance provisions of the Contract do not

require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, such as tools, construction

equipment, or other personal property owned by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or an

employee of Contractor or a Subcontractor, then the entity or individual owning such

property item will be responsible for deciding whether to insure it, and if so in what

amount.




6.06 Waiver of Rights

A. All policies purchased in accordance with Paragraph 6.05, expressly including the builder’s

risk policy, shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or

damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder, or

against Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners,

employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors. Owner and Contractor waive all rights

against each other and the respective officers, directors, members, partners, employees,

agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and

damages caused by, arising out of, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss

covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in

addition, waive all such rights against Engineer, its consultants, all Subcontractors, all

individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, and the

officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors

of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of

the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to

the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or fiduciary, or otherwise

payable under any policy so issued.

B. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers,

directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each

and any of them, for:

1. loss due to business interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending

beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by,

arising out of, or resulting from fire or other perils whether or not insured by Owner;

and

2. loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of, or

resulting from fire or other insured peril or cause of loss covered by any property

insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during

partial occupancy or use pursuant to Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion

pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.

C. Any insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage or consequential loss

referred to in Paragraph 6.06.B shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of

payment of any such loss, damage, or consequential loss, the insurers will have no rights of

recovery against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or the officers, directors,

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors of each and any of

them.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the agreement under which a

Subcontractor performs a portion of the Work contains provisions whereby the

Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals or entities

identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its consultants,

and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and

subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out

of, relating to, or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder’s risk

insurance and any other property insurance applicable to the Work.

6.07 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds

A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of insurance required by

Paragraph 6.05 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that purchased the




policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds, and give notice to

such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in progress. Any other

insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in writing within 15 days

after notice of such claim.

B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to

multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and as

fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage clause.

A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other policies of

insurance required by Paragraph 6.05 shall distribute such proceeds in accordance with

such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the

dispute resolution provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations.

C. If no other special agreement is reached, the damaged Work shall be repaired or replaced,

the money so received applied on account thereof, and the Work and the cost thereof

covered by Change Order, if needed.

ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

7.01 Supervision and Superintendence

A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently,

devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary

to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely

responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of

construction.

B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent resident

superintendent who shall not be replaced without written notice to Owner and Engineer

except under extraordinary circumstances.

7.02 Labor; Working Hours

A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the

Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at

all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site.

B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or

property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract

Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during regular working hours, Monday

through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal

holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays,

Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be

unreasonably withheld.

7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment

A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and

assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation,

construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat,

telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and

incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work,

whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents.

B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be of good quality and new,

except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and




guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of Owner. If

required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of

required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.

C. All materials and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected,

protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable

Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.

7.04 “Or Equals”

A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract

Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier,

the Contract Price has been based upon Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The

specification or description of such an item is intended to establish the type, function,

appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is

followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted,

Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of material or

equipment, or items from other proposed suppliers under the circumstances described

below.

1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of material or equipment

proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so

that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer shall deem it an “or equal”

item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of material or equipment

will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:

a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:

1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability,

appearance, strength, and design characteristics;

2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the

results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a

functioning whole;

3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service;

and

4) it is not objectionable to Owner.

b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work:

1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times;

and

2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named

in the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or

equal” item at Contractor’s expense.

C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to

evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional

data about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability.

No “or-equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is

complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or-equal”, which will be

evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication. Engineer will

advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.




D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request

shall result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request

shall be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision

of the Contract Documents.

E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of material or

equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor may

request that Engineer considered the proposed item as a substitute pursuant to Paragraph

7.05.

7.05 Substitutes

A. Unless the specification or description of an item of material or equipment required to be

furnished under the Contract Documents contains or is followed by words reading that no

substitution is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer authorize the use of other

items of material or equipment under the circumstances described below. To the extent

possible such requests shall be made before commencement of related construction at the

Site.

1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to

determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally equivalent to

that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not accept requests

for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment from anyone other

than Contractor.

2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.05.B, as

supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate under

the circumstances.

3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed

substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The

application:

a. shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:

1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the

general design,

2) be similar in substance to that specified, and

3) be suited to the same use as that specified.

b. will state:

1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will

necessitate a change in Contract Times,

2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a

change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other

direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the

design to the proposed substitute item, and

3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection

with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty.

c. will identify:

1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and




2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services.

d. shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or

indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to changes in

Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other contractors

affected by any resulting change.

B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to

evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner.

Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute

item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be ordered,

furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and Engineer determines

that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s determination will be

evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting for the substitution

itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or Contract Times.

Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.

C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a

special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.

D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a

substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a

substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for

the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute.

Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for making

changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with

Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.

E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed

substitute at Contractor’s expense.

F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request,

Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution.

The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request shall be final and binding, and may not be

reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract Documents. Contractor

may challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.05.D, by

timely submittal of a Change Proposal.

7.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others

A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the

Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner.

B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for

the performance of designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so.

C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the

Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other

individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has

reasonable objection.

D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit to

Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has already

deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable, during the bidding process or

otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed acceptable to Owner

unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within five days.




E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or

entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work. Owner also may require

Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may not require

a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor has submitted

the identity of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for

acceptance by Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make

written objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any

such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity so identified solely on the basis

of substantive, reasonable objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an

acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or

entity.

F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or

entity retained by Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be

entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, with respect to the

replacement; and Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30

days of Owner’s requirement of replacement.

G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity,

whether initially or as a replacement, shall constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the

completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

H. On a monthly basis Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all Subcontractors

and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other Subcontractors and

Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal.

I. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the

Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of

the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions.

J. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of

Subcontractors, Suppliers, and all other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any

of the Work.

K. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities

performing or furnishing any of the Work from communicating with Engineer or Owner,

except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as otherwise expressly allowed

herein.

L. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall

not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or

delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade.

M. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be pursuant to an

appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to

the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner

and Engineer.

N. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable, information

about amounts paid to Contractor on account of Work performed for Contractor by the

particular Subcontractor or Supplier.




O. Nothing in the Contract Documents:

1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or

entity any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any such

Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; nor

2. shall create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the

payment of any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or

entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.

7.07 Patent Fees and Royalties

A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in

the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design,

process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by

others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the

Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual

knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for

the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be

disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents.

B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold

harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,

consultants, and subcontractors from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages

(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and

other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising

out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in

the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any

invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but not

identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required by

patent rights or copyrights.

C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and


employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and



arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement

of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or

resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or

device not specified in the Contract Documents.

7.08 Permits

A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay for

all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in

obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and

inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time

of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when Contractor became bound under a

negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for

providing permanent service to the Work




7.09 Taxes

A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by

Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project which

are applicable during the performance of the Work.

7.10 Laws and Regulations

A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations

applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by

applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for

monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations.

B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to

know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs and

losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers,

directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each

and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not

limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals

and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to

such Work or other action. It shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that

the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations,

but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.03.

C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of any changes after the

submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under a

negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of

performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations

having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value-added, consumption, and

other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on

the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times

resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of such notice Contractor may submit a

Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim.

7.11 Record Documents

A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all Drawings,

Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field Orders, written

interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings. Contractor shall keep such

record documents in good order and annotate them to show changes made during

construction. These record documents, together with all approved Samples, will be

available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work, Contractor shall deliver

these record documents to Engineer.

7.12 Safety and Protection

A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety

precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not

relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the

performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations.

Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the

necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:

1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;




2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in

storage on or off the Site; and

3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,

pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground

Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of

construction.

B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of

persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or

loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection.

Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities,

and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent

to the Site, when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them

in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in

progress.

C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if

any. The Supplementary Conditions identify any Owner’s safety programs that are

applicable to the Work.

D. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s

safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must

comply while at the Site.

E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.12.A.2 or 7.12.A.3

caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor,

Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to

perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be

remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of

Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone

employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not

attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of

Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or indirectly

employed by any of them).

F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall continue until such

time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and

Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 15.06.B that the Work is acceptable (except as

otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial Completion).

G. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection shall resume whenever

Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or

correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.

7.13 Safety Representative

A. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site

whose duties and responsibilities shall be the prevention of accidents and the maintaining

and supervising of safety precautions and programs.

7.14 Hazard Communication Programs

A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data

sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or




exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or

Regulations.

7.15 Emergencies

A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the

Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage,

injury, or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes

that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have

been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If Engineer determines that a

change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in

response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued.

7.16 Shop Drawings, Samples, and Other Submittals

A. Shop Drawing and Sample Submittal Requirements:

1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have:

a. reviewed and coordinated the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings

and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract

Documents;

b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified

performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog

numbers, and similar information with respect thereto;

c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials and equipment offered

with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage,

assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and

d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities

for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and

safety precautions and programs incident thereto.

2. Each submittal shall bear a stamp or specific written certification that Contractor has

satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to

Contractor’s review of that submittal, and that Contractor approves the submittal.

3. With each submittal, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of any

variations that the Shop Drawing or Sample may have from the requirements of the

Contract Documents. This notice shall be set forth in a written communication

separate from the Shop Drawings or Sample submittal; and, in addition, in the case of

Shop Drawings by a specific notation made on each Shop Drawing submitted to

Engineer for review and approval of each such variation.

B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall submit Shop

Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the

accepted Schedule of Submittals. Each submittal will be identified as Engineer may require.

1. Shop Drawings:

a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications.

b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities,

dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data

to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to




provide and to enable Engineer to review the information for the limited

purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.

2. Samples:

a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications.

b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent

data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as

Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the submittal for the limited

purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.D.

3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the

Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and

approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of

Contractor.

C. Other Submittals: Contractor shall submit other submittals to Engineer in accordance with

the accepted Schedule of Submittals, and pursuant to the applicable terms of the

Specifications.

D. Engineer’s Review:

1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with

the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer’s review and approval will

be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or

incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract

Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a

functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.

2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques,

sequences, or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs

incident thereto.

3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of

the assembly in which the item functions.

4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve

Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract

Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Paragraph

7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific

written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or

Sample. Engineer will document any such approved variation from the requirements

of the Contract Documents in a Field Order.

5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample shall not relieve

Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of Paragraph

7.16.A and B.

6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from

the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall not, under any circumstances,

change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a

Change Order.

7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance or approval of a Shop Drawing, Sample,

or other submittal shall result in such item becoming a Contract Document.




8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and

commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the

provisions of Paragraph 7.16.D.4.

E. Resubmittal Procedures:

1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required

number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new Samples

for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to

revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals.

2. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with sufficient information and accuracy

to obtain required approval of an item with no more than three submittals. Engineer

will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a fourth or subsequent submittal of a Shop

Drawings, sample, or other item requiring approval, and Contractor shall be

responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose a set-

off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for such charges.

3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved submittal item, Contractor

shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time, and Owner

may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor to secure reimbursement for

such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor.

7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with the

Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer and its officers, directors,

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to

rely on Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.

B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:

1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than

Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom

Contractor is responsible; or

2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.

C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work

that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s

obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents:

1. observations by Engineer;

2. recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final payment;

3. the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment

related thereto by Owner;

4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;

5. any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal;

6. the issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer;

7. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or

8. any correction of defective Work by Owner.




D. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered into

by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in

the assigned contract shall govern with respect to Contractor’s performance obligations to

Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract.

7.18 Indemnification

A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other

obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify and


employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them from and



arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the performance

of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss, or damage is attributable to bodily

injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other

than the Work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom but only to the extent

caused by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or

any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of

the Work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.

B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their officers, directors, members,

partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors by any employee (or the

survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor,

any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to

perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the

indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not be limited in any way by any

limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for

Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity under workers’

compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

C. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under Paragraph 7.18.A shall not extend to

the liability of Engineer and Engineer’s officers, directors, members, partners, employees,

agents, consultants and subcontractors arising out of:

1. the preparation or approval of, or the failure to prepare or approve maps, Drawings,

opinions, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs, or Specifications; or

2. giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, if that is the primary cause of

the injury or damage.

7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services

A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services

are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless

such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means,

methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. Contractor shall not be required to

provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations.

B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,

materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,

Owner and Engineer will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must

satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly

licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations,

specifications, certifications, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop




Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such

professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when

submitted to Engineer.

C. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and

completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design

professionals, provided Owner and Engineer have specified to Contractor all performance

and design criteria that such services must satisfy.

D. Pursuant to this paragraph, Engineer’s review and approval of design calculations and

design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with

performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract

Documents. Engineer’s review and approval of Shop Drawings and other submittals (except

design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph

7.16.D.1.

E. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria

specified by Owner or Engineer.

ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE

8.01 Other Work

A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may

perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by

Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner

may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and

facilities at or adjacent to the Site.

B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or

through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice

thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information regarding

the start of any utility work at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information

to Contractor.

C. Contractor shall afford each other contractor that performs such other work, each utility

owner performing other work, and Owner, if Owner is performing other work with Owner’s

employees, proper and safe access to the Site, and provide a reasonable opportunity for

the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other

work. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required

to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly

integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by

cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor

may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose

work will be affected.

D. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work

performed by others under this Article 8, Contractor shall inspect such other work and

promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other

work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of

Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such

other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent

defects and deficiencies in such other work.




8.02 Coordination

A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent

to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or to

arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following will be

set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the start of

any such other work:

1. the identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility for

coordination of the activities among the various contractors;

2. an itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and

responsibility; and

3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities.

B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole

authority and responsibility for such coordination.

8.03 Legal Relationships

A. If, in the course of performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the Owner’s

employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner causes damage to

the Work or to the property of Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts,

interferes with, or increases the scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through

actions or inaction, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the

Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal

seeking an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this

paragraph within 30 days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The

entitlement to, and extent of, any such equitable adjustment shall take into account

information (if any) regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the

Contract Documents prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms

of the Contract. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price shall be

conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such other

contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference

that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the

Contract Times is conditioned on such adjustment being essential to Contractor’s ability to

complete the Work within the Contract Times.

B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying,

disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility owner

performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. If Contractor fails to take such measures

and as a result damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any such other

contractor or utility owner, then Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to

Contractor, and assign to such other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual

rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this

paragraph.

C. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees,

Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and for the reasonable

direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by Owner as a result of

Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures with respect to Owner’s

other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference, Owner may

impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor.




D. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other contractor,

or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through Contractor’s

failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts, or if any claim

arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance of the Work at

or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility owner against

Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly attempt to settle the

claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other contractor or utility owner, or

otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law,

and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of

them from and against any such claims, and against all costs, losses, and damages

(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and

other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out

of or relating to such damage, delay, disruption, or interference.

ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES

9.01 Communications to Contractor

A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all

communications to Contractor through Engineer.

9.02 Replacement of Engineer

A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided Contractor

makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The replacement engineer’s

status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Engineer.

9.03 Furnish Data

A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents.

9.04 Pay When Due

A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the

Agreement.

9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings

A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in Paragraph

5.01.

B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference points

are set forth in Paragraph 4.03.

C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports

of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical conditions

relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.

9.06 Insurance

A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and

property insurance are set forth in Article 6.

9.07 Change Orders

A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11.




9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals

A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth

in Paragraph 14.02.B.

9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities

A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible

for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction,

or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to

comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Owner will

not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents.

9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition

A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is

set forth in Paragraph 5.06.

9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements

A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that

financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the Contract

Documents (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work).

9.12 Safety Programs

A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific

applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been

informed.

B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor.

ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION

10.01 Owner’s Representative

A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and

responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative

during construction are set forth in the Contract.

10.02 Visits to Site

A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of

construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe as an experienced and

qualified design professional the progress that has been made and the quality of the

various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such

visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in general, if the

Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be

required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or

quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing for Owner a

greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the

Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations, Engineer will keep

Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to guard Owner against

defective Work.

B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s authority

and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.08. Particularly, but without limitation, during




or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, Engineer will not

supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means,

methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions

and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and

Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.

10.03 Project Representative

A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project

Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the

progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such

Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions, and

limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in Paragraph 10.08. If Owner

designates another representative or agent to represent Owner at the Site who is not

Engineer’s consultant, agent, or employee, the responsibilities and authority and

limitations thereon of such other individual or entity will be as provided in the


10.04 Rejecting Defective Work

A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14.

10.05 Shop Drawings, Change Orders and Payments

A. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to Shop Drawings and Samples, are set

forth in Paragraph 7.16.

B. Engineer’s authority, and limitations thereof, as to design calculations and design drawings

submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services, if any, are set forth in

Paragraph 7.19.

C. Engineer’s authority as to Change Orders is set forth in Article 11.

D. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15.

10.06 Determinations for Unit Price Work

A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work

performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03.

10.07 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work

A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents, and

judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth herein for

initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In rendering such

decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor, and will

not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any proceedings,

interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good faith.

10.08 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities

A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other

provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to

exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or

performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, shall create, impose, or give rise

to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any

Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee

or agent of any of them.




B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for

Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the

safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to

comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer will

not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents.

C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any

Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the

Work.

D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation

and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates

of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required to be delivered by

Paragraph 15.06.A will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the

requirements of, and in the case of certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the

results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents.

E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.08 shall also

apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any.

10.09 Compliance with Safety Program

A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific

applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs (if any) of which

Engineer has been informed.

ARTICLE 11 – AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS; CHANGES IN THE WORK

11.01 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents

A. The Contract Documents may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work

Change Directive, or a Field Order.

1. Change Orders:

a. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents includes a change in

the Contract Price or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must

be set forth in a Change Order. A Change Order also may be used to establish

amendments and supplements of the Contract Documents that do not affect the

Contract Price or Contract Times.

b. Owner and Contractor may amend those terms and conditions of the Contract

Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work,

(2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3)

other engineering or technical matters, without the recommendation of the

Engineer. Such an amendment shall be set forth in a Change Order.

2. Work Change Directives: A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price

or the Contract Times but is evidence that the parties expect that the modification

ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a

subsequently issued Change Order, following negotiations by the parties as to the

Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if

negotiations are unsuccessful, by a determination under the terms of the Contract

Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraph 11.04 regarding

change of Contract Price. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an




adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times, or both, no later than 30 days

after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. Owner must

submit any Claim seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times,

or both, no later than 60 days after issuance of the Work Change Directive.

3. Field Orders: Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not

involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible

with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated

by the Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and

will be binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work

involved promptly. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in

the Contract Price or Contract Times, or both, then before proceeding with the Work

at issue, Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal as provided herein.

11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work

A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any

time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Such

changes shall be supported by Engineer’s recommendation, to the extent the change

involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other

engineering or technical matters. Such changes may be accomplished by a Change Order, if

Owner and Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract

Times or Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such

document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a

deletion in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted

Work. Added or revised Work shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the

Contract Documents. Nothing in this paragraph shall obligate Contractor to undertake work

that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with

Contractor’s safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations.

11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work

A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the

Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract

Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency

as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph

14.05.

11.04 Change of Contract Price

A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an

adjustment in the Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any

Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price shall comply with the provisions of Article 12.

B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows:

1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract

Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items

involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03); or

2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract

Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for

overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.04.C.2); or

3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract

Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on




the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus a

Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph

11.04.C).

C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit shall be

determined as follows:

1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or

2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the

various portions of the Cost of the Work:

a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s fee

shall be 15 percent;

b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee shall be five

percent;

c. where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus

a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.01.C.2.a and

11.01.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee shall be based on: (1) a fee of 15 percent

of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.A.1 and 13.01.A.2 by the

Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with

respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of

the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of five percent of the

amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier

Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted work the

maximum total fee to be paid by Owner shall be no greater than 27 percent of

the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the work;

d. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 13.01.B.4,

13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C;

e. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change which

results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in

cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent of

such net decrease; and

f. when both additions and credits are involved in any one change, the adjustment

in Contractor’s fee shall be computed on the basis of the net change in

accordance with Paragraphs 11.04.C.2.a through 11.04.C.2.e, inclusive.

11.05 Change of Contract Times

A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an

adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any

Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times shall comply with the provisions of Article

12.

B. An adjustment of the Contract Times shall be subject to the limitations set forth in

Paragraph 4.05, concerning delays in Contractor’s progress.

11.06 Change Proposals

A. Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request an adjustment in the

Contract Times or Contract Price; appeal an initial decision by Engineer concerning the

requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under

the Contract Documents; contest a set-off against payment due; or seek other relief under




the Contract. The Change Proposal shall specify any proposed change in Contract Times or

Contract Price, or both, or other proposed relief, and explain the reason for the proposed

change, with citations to any governing or applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.

1. Procedures: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer promptly (but

in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after

such initial decision. The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the

proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and

Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal. The supporting data

shall be accompanied by a written statement that the supporting data are accurate

and complete, and that any requested time or price adjustment is the entire

adjustment to which Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event.

Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change Proposal, and consider any

comments or response from Owner regarding the Change Proposal.

2. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each Change Proposal and, within 30 days after

receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either deny the Change Proposal in whole,

approve it in whole, or deny it in part and approve it in part. Such actions shall be in

writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If Engineer does not take

action on the Change Proposal within 30 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at

any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of

Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed denied, thereby commencing the

time for appeal of the denial under Article 12.

3. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision will be final and binding upon Owner and

Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under

Article 12.

B. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the design

(as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the Work, or

other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties that the

Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of further resolution of

such a Change Proposal, such notice shall be deemed a denial, and Contractor may choose

to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12.

11.07 Execution of Change Orders

A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:

1. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties,

including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in

accordance with a Work Change Directive;

2. changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has duly

contested such set-off;

3. changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02, (b)

required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 14.04 or

Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07, or (c) agreed to by the

parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation if the change in the Work

involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or other

engineering or technical matters; and

4. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes, which embody the

substance of any final and binding results under Paragraph 11.06, or Article 12.




B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed

under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, it shall be deemed to be of full force and effect, as

if fully executed.

11.08 Notification to Surety

A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting

the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but

not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will be

Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to reflect

the effect of any such change.

ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS

12.01 Claims

A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor shall be submitted

to the Claims process set forth in this Article:

1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change Proposals;

2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other

relief under the Contract Documents; and

3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the

design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of

the Work, or other engineering or technical matters.

B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party

to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event

giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30 days of the

decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a copy to the

Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim shall rest with

the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an increase in the

Contract Times or Contract Price, or both, Contractor shall certify that the Claim is made in

good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the best of

Contractor’s knowledge and belief the amount of time or money requested accurately

reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled.

C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full

consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the

exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for

resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim shall be stated in

writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer.

D. Mediation:

1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to

mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate shall stay the Claim

submittal and response process.

2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such agreement,

either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation process, and the

Claim submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the termination. If

the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the dispute, the Claim




submittal and decision process shall resume as of the date of the conclusion of the

mediation, as determined by the mediator.

3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs.

E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it in

part, such action shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the other

party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes.

F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the Claim

may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving party does

not take action on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at any

time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the inaction,

the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial. A

denial of the Claim shall be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial the other

party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of disputes.

G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim,

whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or if a

Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions become

final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim shall be

incorporated in a Change Order to the extent they affect the Contract, including the Work,

the Contract Times, or the Contract Price.

ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK

13.01 Cost of the Work

A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum

of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined

below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes:

1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract

Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or

2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other

adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such adjustment is determined

on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled only to those additional or

incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event

giving rise to the adjustment.

B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included in

the Cost of the Work shall be in amounts no higher than those prevailing in the locality of

the Project, shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C, and shall

include only the following items:

1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of

the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and Contractor.

Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other

personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed

full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the

Work. Payroll costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries and wages plus the

cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions,

unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and

retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable




thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on

Saturday, Sunday, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent

authorized by Owner.

2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including

costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in

connection therewith. All cash discounts shall accrue to Contractor unless Owner

deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case the cash

discounts shall accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and returns

from sale of surplus materials and equipment shall accrue to Owner, and Contractor

shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.

3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by

Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from

subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to

Owner, who will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any, will

be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the

basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall

be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as

provided in this Paragraph 13.01.

4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing

laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically

related to the Work.

5. Supplemental costs including the following:

a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of

Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work.

b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies,

equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and

hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of

the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed

which remain the property of Contractor.

c. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof,

whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements

approved by Owner with the advice of Engineer, and the costs of transportation,

loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs

shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any

such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no

longer necessary for the Work.

d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which

Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.

e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor,

or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of

them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.

f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not

compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection

with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the

deductible amounts of property insurance established in accordance with

Paragraph 6.05), provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes




other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or

indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable.

Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval

of Owner. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of

the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee.

g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.

h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier

services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.

i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required by

the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.

C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items:

1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals

(of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers,

engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and

contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by

Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general

administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule

of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by

Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll costs and other compensation excluded here are to

be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.

2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at

the Site.

3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital

employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.

4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or

indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,

including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or

equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.

5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not

specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B.

D. Contractor’s Fee: When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus,

Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any

Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in

Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be

determined as set forth in Paragraph 11.04.C.

E. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined

pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in

accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable

to Engineer an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data.

13.02 Allowances

A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named

in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such

sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer.




B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that:

1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade

discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at

the Site, and all applicable taxes; and

2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead,

profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included

in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for additional

payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid.

C. Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the

sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs.

D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by

Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by

allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted.

13.03 Unit Price Work

A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price

Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an

amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price

Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.

B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for

the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to

Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities.

C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be

adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.

D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work

performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s preliminary

determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision thereon (by

recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s written decision

thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to reflect changed factual

conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor, subject to the provisions of

the following paragraph.

E. Within 30 days of Engineer’s written decision under the preceding paragraph, Contractor

may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may file a Claim, seeking an adjustment in the

Contract Price if:

1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially

and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement;

2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and

3. Contractor believes that it is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of

having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a

decrease in Contract Price, and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any

such increase or decrease.




ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE

WORK

14.01 Access to Work

A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner,

independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction will have access to the

Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing.

Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them

of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as

applicable.

14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals

A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts

thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and

testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests.

B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory,

or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests expressly required

by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner, except that costs

incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work shall be governed by the

provisions of Paragraph 14.05.

C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part

thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other

representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging

and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith,

and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval.

D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections and

tests required:

1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate

responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner;

2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be

incorporated in the Work;

3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents;

4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to

be incorporated into the Work; and

5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to

Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.

Such inspections and tests shall be performed by independent inspectors, testing

laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner,

Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full

responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals.

F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered

by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by

Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering shall be at Contractor’s

expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to




cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to

such notice.

14.03 Defective Work

A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not

defective.

B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective,

and to reject defective Work.

C. Notice of Defects: Prompt notice of all defective Work of which Owner or Engineer has

actual knowledge will be given to Contractor.

D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of

defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not fabricated,

installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work, remove it from the

Project and replace it with Work that is not defective.

E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no

action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if any,

on said Work.

F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations

with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages

arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the

inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective

Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is

defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from defective

Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the

measure of such claims, costs, losses, and damages resulting from defective Work, then

Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.

14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work

A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner

prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final

payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the

design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety).

Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s

evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved

by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent

not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to final payment, the

necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work shall be

incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the

Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then Owner may

impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the acceptance of

defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an appropriate amount to

Owner.

14.05 Uncovering Work

A. Engineer has the authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work, whether or

not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.




B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall, if

requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then replace

the covering, all at Contractor’s expense.

C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer

or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall uncover,

expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as Engineer may

require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary labor, material, and

equipment.

1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible for

all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such uncovering,

exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or

reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work

of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this responsibility the Owner

shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.

2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an

increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly

attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing,

replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount

or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of

the determination that the Work is not defective.

14.06 Owner May Stop the Work

A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable

materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed

Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop

the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated;

however, this right of Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of

Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier,

any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them.

14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work

A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct

defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer, or if

Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if

Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner

may, after seven days written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any such deficiency.

B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed

expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may exclude

Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and

suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials

and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are

stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives, agents and

employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s consultants access to

the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph.

C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the

rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as set-

offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will




include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others destroyed

or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective Work.

D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay in

the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights and

remedies under this Paragraph 14.07.

ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD

15.01 Progress Payments

A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2 will

serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application

for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will

be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined under

the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will be based on

Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period.

B. Applications for Payments:

1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress

payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to Engineer

for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the

Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such

supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. If payment is

requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but

delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the

Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other

documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free

and clear of all Liens, and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by

appropriate property insurance, a warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect

Owner’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to Owner.

2. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an

affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received on account

of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate

obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment.

3. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the

Agreement.

C. Review of Applications:

1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment, including

each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present

the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating in writing

Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor

may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application.

2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for Payment

will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s

observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design

professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the

accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge,

information and belief:




a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;

b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents

(subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon

Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the

Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for

Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in the

recommendation); and

c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear

to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the

Work.

3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have

represented that:

a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been

performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in

progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities

specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or

b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle

Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold

payment to Contractor.

4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending

payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment,

will impose responsibility on Engineer:

a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work, or

b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction,

or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or

c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to

Contractor’s performance of the Work, or

d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has

used the money paid on account of the Contract Price, or

e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to

Owner free and clear of any Liens.

5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in

Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner stated

in Paragraph 15.01.C.2.

6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s

opinion to protect Owner from loss because:

a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;

b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph

14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;

d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental

Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or




e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that would

constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause

under the Contract Documents.

D. Payment Becomes Due:

1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with Engineer’s

recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-offs) will

become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.

E. Reductions in Payment by Owner:

1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer, Owner

is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following:

a. claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor’s conduct in the

performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or

damages on account of Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing of

the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from

workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and

Regulations, and patent infringement;

b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid

damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the

Site;

c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance;

d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental

Condition for which Contractor is responsible;

e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal

reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return

visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities;

f. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;

g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with Paragraph

14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;

h. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;

i. an event that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify a

termination for cause has occurred;

j. liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to achieve

Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work;

k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has

delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and

discharge of such Liens;

l. there are other items entitling Owner to a set off against the amount

recommended.

2. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge

or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor

immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such action

and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any amount




remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall promptly pay

Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner

and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The reduction

imposed shall be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change Proposal

contesting the reduction.

3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified,

the amount wrongfully withheld shall be treated as an amount due as determined by

Paragraph 15.01.C.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.

15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title

A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment

furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other title

defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than seven

days after the time of payment by Owner.

15.03 Substantial Completion

A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall

notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and

request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at the

same time submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be

completed or corrected before final payment.

B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an

inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not

consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing giving

the reasons therefor.

C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a

preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which shall fix the date of Substantial

Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed or

corrected before final payment. Owner shall have seven days after receipt of the

preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any

provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to the

provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not

substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary

certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially

complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the

certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the

Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and deliver

to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a revised punch

list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from the preliminary

certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any objections from Owner.

D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and

Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following

Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the end of

the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a

permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and Contractor agree

otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security, operation, protection of

the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities upon Owner’s use or

occupancy of the Work.




E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list of

items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases Contractor

may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list items, following the

progress payment procedures set forth above.

F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of Substantial

Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its property and

complete or correct items on the punch list.

15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy

A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any substantially

completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract

Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately

functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended

purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder

of the Work, subject to the following conditions:

1. At any time Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or

occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete. If

and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete,

Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A

through E for that part of the Work.

2. At any time Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor

considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to

issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.

3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer

shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of

completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially

complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons

therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the

provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of Substantial

Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect

thereof and access thereto.

4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to

compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.05 regarding builder’s risk or other

property insurance.

15.05 Final Inspection

A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is

complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and

will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the

Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately

take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies.

15.06 Final Payment

A. Application for Payment:

1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all

corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance with

the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules,

guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance, certificates of




inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in Paragraph 7.11), and other

documents, Contractor may make application for final payment.

2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously

delivered) by:

a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents;

b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;

c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all

Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any Liens

or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment.

d. a list of all disputes that Contractor believes are unsettled; and

e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all

Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the Work.

3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as

approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit

of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material,

and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material and

equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner

might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens or other

burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any

Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor

may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner

against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor

and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers.

B. Engineer’s Review of Application and Acceptance:

1. If, on the basis of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final

inspection, and Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and

accompanying documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is

satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under

the Contract have been fulfilled, Engineer will, within ten days after receipt of the final

Application for Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final

payment and present the Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such

recommendation shall account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary in

Engineer’s opinion to protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with

respect to progress payments. At the same time Engineer will also give written notice

to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable, subject to the provisions of

Paragraph 15.07. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to

Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment,

in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the

Application for Payment.

C. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is

ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final

payment.

D. Payment Becomes Due: Thirty days after the presentation to Owner of the final Application

for Payment and accompanying documentation, the amount recommended by Engineer

(less any further sum Owner is entitled to set off against Engineer’s recommendation,




including but not limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under the

provisions above with respect to progress payments) will become due and shall be paid by

Owner to Contractor.

15.07 Waiver of Claims

A. The making of final payment will not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights

against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from unsettled Liens,

from defective Work appearing after final inspection pursuant to Paragraph 15.05, from

Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special

guarantees specified therein, from outstanding Claims by Owner, or from Contractor’s

continuing obligations under the Contract Documents.

B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of all

claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been duly

submitted or appealed under the provisions of Article 17.

15.08 Correction Period

A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time as

may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the

Contract Documents, or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents), any Work is

found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the Site, adjacent areas that

Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or otherwise, and other

adjacent areas used by Contractor as permitted by Laws and Regulations, is found to be

defective, then Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with

Owner’s written instructions:

1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such other adjacent areas;

2. correct such defective Work;

3. if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the Project and

replace it with Work that is not defective, and

4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to

the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting therefrom.

B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or

in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have

the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and

replaced. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not

limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals

and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to

such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all

costs of repair or replacement of work of others).

C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous

service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item

may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.

D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected

or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period hereunder with

respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such

correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed.




E. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and

warranties. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a

waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.

ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION

16.01 Owner May Suspend Work

A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a

period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and Engineer.

Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the

Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract

Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such

suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments shall be submitted no later

than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work.

16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause

A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by

Contractor and justify termination for cause:

1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or

suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule);

2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the

Contract Documents;

3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; or

4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer.

B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving

Contractor (and any surety) ten days written notice that Owner is considering a declaration

that Contractor is in default and termination of the contract, Owner may proceed to:

1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) notice that

the Contract is terminated; and

2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond.

C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has

terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take

possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the

Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and complete

the Work as Owner may deem expedient.

D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if

Contractor within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its

failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure.

E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to

receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the

Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs,

losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,

architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be paid

to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs, losses,




and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner.

Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as

to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated in a Change

Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner shall not be

required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.

F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not

affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may

thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any surety

under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due

Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.

G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions

of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond shall govern over any inconsistent

provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D.

16.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience

A. Upon seven days written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and

without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such

case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):

1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents

prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for

overhead and profit on such Work;

2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services

and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents

in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead

and profit on such expenses; and

3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs

incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal.

B. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated overhead, profits, or revenue,

or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination.

16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate

A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90

consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2)

Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or

(3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then

Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided

Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate

the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in Paragraph

16.03.

B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if

Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is

submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to

be due, Contractor may, seven days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the

Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest thereon.

The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from submitting a

Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or otherwise for




expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the Work as permitted

by this paragraph.

ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES

17.01 Methods and Procedures

A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final

resolution under the provisions of this Article:

1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in

full; and

2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work or obligations under

the Contract Documents, and arising after final payment has been made.

B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this Article, Owner

or Contractor may:

1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the

Supplementary Conditions; or

2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution

process; or

3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or

mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the

dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction.

ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS

18.01 Giving Notice

A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it

will be deemed to have been validly given if:

1. delivered in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the individual or

to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for which it is intended; or

2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last

business address known to the sender of the notice.

18.02 Computation of Times

A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to

exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period

falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable

jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation.

18.03 Cumulative Remedies

A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and

remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be

construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of

them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty

or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this paragraph will

be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with

each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.




18.04 Limitation of Damages

A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution,

and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers, directors,

members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall be liable to

Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor on or in

connection with any other project or anticipated project.

18.05 No Waiver

A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision shall not constitute a waiver of that provision,

nor shall it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract.

18.06 Survival of Obligations

A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or

given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the

Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or

termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor.

18.07 Controlling Law

A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.

18.08 Headings

A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute

parts of these General Conditions.

EJCDC® C-800, Guide to the Preparation of Supplementary Conditions.



Page 1 of 13

Supplementary Conditions

These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the Standard General Conditions of

the Construction Contract, EJCDC® C-700 (2013 Edition). All provisions that are not so

amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect.

The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General

Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings

stated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.

The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address

system used in the General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added thereto.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SC-1.01.A.8 Change Order Form 3

SC-1.01.1.48 Work Change Directive 3

SC-1.01.1.49 Abnormal Weather Conditions 3

SC-1.01.1.50 Agency 3

SC-2.02.A. Contract Copies 3

SC-2.06.B Deleted 3

SC-4.01.A Contract Time 3

SC-4.05.C.2 Abnormal Weather Conditions 3

SC-5.03 Subsurface Conditions 3

SC 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions 3

SC 6.03 Contractor’s Liability Insurance 4

SC-6.05.A. Contractor’s Floater Insurance 5

SC-7.02.B. Working Hours and Holidays 5

SC-7.04.A “Or-equal” 5

SC-7.06.A Subcontractor Limits 6

SC-7.06.B Deleted 6

SC-7.06.E Replacement of Subcontractor 6

SC-10.03 Resident Project Representative 6

SC-11.07.C Contract Change Orders 9

SC-13.02.C Deleted 9

SC-15.01.B Applications for Payment 9




Page 2 of 13

SC-15.01.B.3 Retainage 9

SC-15.01.B.4 Application for Payment Form 9

SC-15.01.D.1 Payment Becomes Due 9

SC-15.02.A Contractor’s Warranty of Title 9

SC-18.09 Tribal Sovereignty 9

SC-19 Article 19 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS 10

SC-19.01 Agency Not a Party 10

SC-19.02 Contract Approval 10

SC-19.03 Conflict of Interest 10

SC-19.04 Gratuities 10

SC-19.05 Small, Minority and Women’s Businesses 10

SC-19.06 Anti-Kickback 11

SC-19.07 Clean Air and Pollution Control Acts 11

SC-19.08 Equal Opportunity Requirements 11

SC-19.09 Restrictions on Lobbying 12

SC-19.10 Environmental Requirements 12

SC-19.11 Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards 13

SC-19.12 Debarment and Suspension 13

SC-19.13 Procurement of Recovered Materials 13




Page 3 of 13

SC-1.01.A.8 Add the following language at the end of the last sentence of Paragraph 1.01.A.8:

The Change Order form to be used on this Project is EJCDC C-941. Agency approval is

required before Change Orders are effective.

SC-1.01.A.48 Add the following language at the end of the last sentence of Paragraph 1.01.A.48:

A Work Change Directive cannot change Contract Price or Contract Times without a

subsequent Change Order.

SC-1.01.A.49 Add the following new Paragraph after Paragraph 1.01.A.48:

Abnormal Weather Conditions - Conditions of extreme or unusual weather for a given

region, elevation, or season as determined by the Engineer. Extreme or unusual

weather that is typical for a given region, elevation, or season should not be

considered Abnormal Weather Conditions.

SC-1.01.A.50 Add the following new Paragraph after Paragraph 1.01.A.49:

Agency - The Project is financed in whole or in part by USDA Rural Utilities Service

pursuant to the Consolidated Farm and Rural Development Act (7 USC Section 1921 et

seq.). The Rural Utilities Service programs are administered through the USDA Rural

Development offices; therefore, the Agency for these documents is USDA Rural

Development.

SC-2.02.A. Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 2.02.A. to read as follows:

Owner shall furnish to Contractor five copies of the Contract Documents (including

one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic

portable document format (PDF).

SC-2.06.B Delete Paragraph 2.06.B and replace it with the term [Deleted].

SC-4.01.A Amend the last sentence of Paragraph 4.01.A by striking out the following words:

In no event will be Contract Time commence to run later than the sixtieth day after

the day of Bid opening or the thirtieth day after the Effective Date of the Contract,

whichever date is earlier.

SC-4.05.C.2 Amend Paragraph 4.05.C.2 by striking out the following test: “abnormal weather

conditions;” and inserting the following text:

Abnormal Weather Conditions;

SC-5.03 Delete Paragraphs 5.03 C and 5.03 D in their entirety and insert the following:

C. No reports or drawings related to subsurface explorations and tests of

subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site are known to Owner:

D. Not Used

SC 5.06 Delete Paragraphs 5.06.A and 5.06.B in their entirety and insert the following:

A. No reports or drawings related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the

Site are known to Owner.

B. Not Used.




Page 4 of 13

SC 6.03 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 6.03.J:

K. The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph 6.03 of the General

Conditions shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or

greater where required by Laws and Regulations:

1. Workers’ Compensation, and related coverages under Paragraphs 6.03.A.1

and A.2 of the General Conditions:

State: Statutory

Federal, if applicable (e.g., Longshoreman’s): Statutory

Employer’s Liability:

Bodily injury, each accident $ 1,000,000

Bodily injury by disease, each employee $ 1,000,000

Bodily injury/disease aggregate $ 1,000,000

2. Contractor’s Commercial General Liability under Paragraphs 6.03.B and

6.03.C of the General Conditions:

General Aggregate $ 2,000,000

Products - Completed Operations Aggregate $ 1,000,000

Personal and Advertising Injury $ 1,000,000

Each Occurrence (Bodily Injury and Property

Damage) $ 1,000,000

3. Automobile Liability under Paragraph 6.03.D. of the General Conditions:

Bodily Injury:

Each person $ 1,000,000

Each accident $ 1,000,000

Property Damage:

Each accident $ 1,000,000

[or]

Combined Single Limit of $ 1,000,000

4. Excess or Umbrella Liability:

Per Occurrence $ 2,000,000





Page 5 of 13

5. Contractor’s Pollution Liability:

Each Occurrence $ 1,000,000


If box is checked, Contractor is not required to provide Contractor’s

Pollution Liability insurance under this Contract

7. Contractor’s Professional Liability:

Each Claim $ 1,000,000

Annual Aggregate $ 1,000,000

SC-6.05.A. Delete Paragraph 6.05.A of the General Conditions and substitute the following in its

place:

Contractor shall provide and maintain installation floater insurance for property under

the care, custody, or control of Contractor. The installation floater insurance shall be a

broad form or “all risk” policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies,

machinery, fixtures, and equipment that will be incorporated into the Work.

Coverage under the Contractor’s installation floater will include:

1. any loss to property while in transit,

2. any loss at the Site, and

3. any loss while in storage, both on-site and off-site.

Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk, or limited to property for

which the Contractor is legally liable. The Contractor will be solely responsible for any

deductible carried under this coverage and claims on materials, supplies, machinery,

fixture, and equipment that will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in

storage. This policy will include a waiver of subrogation applicable to Owner,

Contractor, Engineer, all Subcontractors, and the officers, directors, partners,

employees, agents and other consultants and subcontractors of any of them.

SC-7.02.B. Add the following new subparagraphs immediately after Paragraph 7.02.B:

1. Regular working hours will be 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM Monday through Friday;

2. Owner's legal holidays are New Years, MLK Jr. Birthday, Good Friday, Memorial

Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving (2 days),

Christmas (2 days).

SC-7.04.A Amend the third sentence of Paragraph 7.04.A by striking out the following words:

Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that

no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item is permitted.

SC-7.04.A.1 Amend the last sentence of Paragraph a.3 by striking out “and;” and adding a period

at the end of Paragraph a.3.




Page 6 of 13

SC-7.04.A.1 Delete paragraph 7.04.A.1.a.4 in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

[Deleted]

SC-7.06.A Amend Paragraph 7.06.A by adding the following text to the end of the paragraph:

The Contractor shall not award work valued at more than fifty percent of the Contract

Price to Subcontractor(s), without prior written approval of the Owner.

SC-7.06.B Delete paragraph 7.06.B in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

[Deleted]

SC-7.06.E Amend the second sentence of Paragraph 7.06.E by striking out “Owner may also

require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that”.

SC-10.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 10.03.A:

B. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be Engineer's representative at

the Site, will act as directed by and under the supervision of Engineer, and will

confer with Engineer regarding RPR's actions.

1. General: RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general shall be

with Engineer and Contractor. RPR's dealings with Subcontractors shall only

be through or with the full knowledge and approval of Contractor. RPR shall

generally communicate with Owner only with the knowledge of and under

the direction of Engineer.

2. Schedules: Review the progress schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing and

Sample submittals, and Schedule of Values prepared by Contractor and

consult with Engineer concerning acceptability.

3. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as

preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other

Project-related meetings, and prepare and circulate copies of minutes

thereof.

4. Liaison:

a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor. Working principally

through Contractor’s authorized representative or designee, assist in

providing information regarding the provisions and intent of the

Contract Documents.

b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when

Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s on-Site operations.

c. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when

required for proper execution of the Work.

5. Interpretation of Contract Documents: Report to Engineer when

clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents are needed

and transmit to Contractor clarifications and interpretations as issued by

Engineer.

6. Shop Drawings and Samples:

a. Record date of receipt of Samples and Contractor-approved Shop

Drawings.




Page 7 of 13

b. Receive Samples which are furnished at the Site by Contractor, and

notify Engineer of availability of Samples for examination.

c. Advise Engineer and Contractor of the commencement of any portion

of the Work requiring a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal for which

RPR believes that the submittal has not been approved by Engineer.

7. Modifications: Consider and evaluate Contractor’s suggestions for

modifications in Drawings or Specifications and report such suggestions,

together with RPR’s recommendations, if any, to Engineer. Transmit to

Contractor in writing decisions as issued by Engineer.

8. Review of Work and Rejection of Defective Work:

a. Conduct on-Site observations of Contractor’s work in progress to assist

Engineer in determining if the Work is in general proceeding in

accordance with the Contract Documents.

b. Report to Engineer whenever RPR believes that any part of

Contractor’s work in progress is defective, will not produce a

completed Project that conforms generally to the Contract Documents,

or will imperil the integrity of the design concept of the completed

Project as a functioning whole as indicated in the Contract Documents,

or has been damaged, or does not meet the requirements of any

inspection, test or approval required to be made; and advise Engineer

of that part of work in progress that RPR believes should be corrected

or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special

testing, inspection or approval.

9. Inspections, Tests, and System Start-ups:

a. Verify that tests, equipment, and systems start-ups and operating and

maintenance training are conducted in the presence of appropriate

Owner’s personnel, and that Contractor maintains adequate records

thereof.

b. Observe, record, and report to Engineer appropriate details relative to

the test procedures and systems start-ups.

10. Records:

a. Prepare a daily report or keep a diary or log book, recording

Contractor’s hours on the Site, Subcontractors present at the Site,

weather conditions, data relative to questions of Change Orders, Field

Orders, Work Change Directives, or changed conditions, Site visitors,

deliveries of equipment or materials, daily activities, decisions,

observations in general, and specific observations in more detail as in

the case of observing test procedures; and send copies to Engineer.

b. Record names, addresses, fax numbers, e-mail addresses, web site

locations, and telephone numbers of all Contractors, Subcontractors,

and major Suppliers of materials and equipment.

c. Maintain records for use in preparing Project documentation.




Page 8 of 13

11. Reports:

a. Furnish to Engineer periodic reports as required of progress of the

Work and of Contractor’s compliance with the Progress Schedule and

schedule of Shop Drawing and Sample submittals.

b. Draft and recommend to Engineer proposed Change Orders, Work

Change Directives, and Field Orders. Obtain backup material from

Contractor.

c. Immediately notify Engineer of the occurrence of any Site accidents,

emergencies, acts of God endangering the Work, force majeure or

delay events, damage to property by fire or other causes, or the

discovery of any Constituent of Concern or Hazardous Environmental

Condition.

12. Payment Requests: Review applications for payment with Contractor for

compliance with the established procedure for their submission and

forward with recommendations to Engineer, noting particularly the

relationship of the payment requested to the Schedule of Values, Work

completed, and materials and equipment delivered at the Site but not

incorporated in the Work.

13. Certificates, Operation and Maintenance Manuals: During the course of the

Work, verify that materials and equipment certificates, operation and

maintenance manuals and other data required by the Contract Documents

to be assembled and furnished by Contractor are applicable to the items

actually installed and in accordance with the Contract Documents, and have

these documents delivered to Engineer for review and forwarding to Owner

prior to payment for that part of the Work.

14. Completion:

a. Participate in Engineer’s visits to the Site to determine Substantial

Completion, assist in the determination of Substantial Completion and

the preparation of a punch list of items to be completed or corrected.

b. Participate in Engineer’s final visit to the Site to determine completion

of the Work, in the company of Owner and Contractor, and prepare a

final punch list of items to be completed and deficiencies to be

remedied.

c. Observe whether all items on the final list have been completed or

corrected and make recommendations to Engineer concerning

acceptance and issuance of the notice of acceptability of the work.

C. The RPR shall not:

1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of

materials or equipment (including “or-equal” items).

2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract

Documents.

3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, or

Suppliers.




Page 9 of 13

4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of

the means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of Contractor’s

work.

5. Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security or

safety practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities

or operations of Owner or Contractor.

6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted

off-site by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer.

7. Accept Shop Drawing or Sample submittals from anyone other than

Contractor.

8. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part.

SC-11.07.C Add the following new Paragraph after Paragraph 11.07.B :

All Contract Change Orders must be concurred in by the Agency before they are

effective.

SC-13.02.C Delete Paragraph 13.02.C in its entirety and insert the following in its place:

[Deleted]

SC-15.01.B Amend the second sentence of Paragraph 15.01.B.1 by striking out the following text:

“a bill of sale, invoice, or other.”

SC-15.01.B.3 Add the following language at the end of paragraph 15.01.B.3:

No payments will be made that would deplete the retainage, place in escrow any

funds that are required for retainage, or invest the retainage for the benefit of the

Contractor.

SC-15.01.B.4 Add the following new Paragraph after Paragraph 15.01.B.3.

The Application for Payment form to be used on this project is EJCDC C-620. The

Agency must approve all Applications for Payment before payment is made.

SC-15.01.D.1 Delete Paragraph 15.01.D.1 in it entirety and insert the following in its place:

The Application for Payment with Engineer’s recommendations will be presented to

the Owner and Agency for consideration. If both the Owner and Agency find the

Application for Payment acceptable, the recommended amount less any reduction

under the provisions of Paragraph 15.01. E will become due twenty (20) days after the

Application for Payment is presented to the Owner, and the Owner will make

payment to the Contractor.

SC-15.02.A Amend Paragraph 15.02.A by striking out the following text: “no later than seven days

after the time of payment by Owner” and insert “no later than the time of payment by

Owner.”

SC-18.09 Add the following new paragraph after Paragraph 18.08:

Tribal Sovereignty. No provision of this Agreement will be constructed by any of the

signatories as abridging or debilitating any sovereign powers of the Creek-Seminole

Tribe; affecting the trust-beneficiary relationship between the Secretary of the

Interior, Tribe, and Indian landowners(s); or interfering with the government-to-

government relationship between the United States and the Tribe.




Page 10 of 13

SC-19 Add Article 19 titled “FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS”

SC-19.01 Add the following language as Paragraph 19.01 with the “Agency Not a Party”;

A. This Contract is expected to be funded in part with funds provided by Agency.

Neither Agency, nor any of its departments, entities, or employees is a party

to this Contract.

SC-19.02 Add the following sections after Article 19.01 with the title “Contract Approval”:

A. Owner and Contractor will furnish Owner’s attorney such evidence as required

so that Owner’s attorney can complete and execute the following “Certificate

of Owner’s Attorney (Attachment GC-A) before Owner submits the executed

Contract Documents to Agency for approval.

B. Concurrence by Agency in the award of the Contract is required before the

Contract is effective.

SC-19.03 Add the following language after Article 19.02.B with the title “Conflict of Interest”:

Contractor may not knowingly contract with a supplier or manufacturer if the

individual or entity who prepared the plans and specifications has a corporate or

financial affiliation with the supplier or manufacturer. Owner’s officers, employees, or

agents shall not engage in the award or administration of this Contract if a conflict of

interest, real or apparent, would be involved. Such a conflict would arise when: (i) the

employee, officer or agent; (ii) any member of their immediate family; (iii) their

partner or (iv) an organization that employs, or is about to employ, any of the above,

has a financial interest in Contractor. Owner’s officers, employees, or agents shall

neither solicit nor accept gratuities, favors or anything of monetary value from

Contractor or subcontractors.

SC-19.04 Add the following language after Article 19.03.A with the title “Gratuities”:

A. If Owner finds after a notice and hearing that Contractor, or any of

Contractor’s agents or representatives, offered or gave gratuities (in the

form of entertainment, gifts, or otherwise) to any official, employee, or agent

of Owner or Agency in an attempt to secure this Contract or favorable

treatment in awarding, amending, or making any determinations related to

the performance of this Contract, Owner may, by written notice to

Contractor, terminate this Contract. Owner may also pursue other rights

and remedies that the law or this Contract provides. However, the existence

of the facts on which Owner bases such findings shall be an issue and may be

reviewed in proceedings under the dispute resolution provisions of this

Contract.

B. In the event this Contract is terminated as provided in paragraph 19.04.A,

Owner may pursue the same remedies against Contractor as it could pursue

in the event of a breach of this Contract by Contractor. As a penalty, in

addition to any other damages to which it may be entitled by law, Owner

may pursue exemplary damages in an amount (as determined by Owner)

which shall not be less than three nor more than ten times the costs

Contractor incurs in providing any such gratuities to any such officer or

employee.

SC-19.05 Add the following language after Article 19.04.B with the title “Small, Minority and

Women’s Businesses”:




Page 11 of 13

A. Contracting with small and minority businesses, women’s business

enterprises, and labor surplus area firms. If Contractor intends to let any

subcontracts for a portion of the work, Contractor must take all necessary

affirmative steps to assure that minority businesses, women’s business

enterprises and labor surplus firms are used when possible. Affirmative

steps must include:

(1) Placing qualified small and minority businesses and women’s business

enterprises on solicitation lists:

(2) Assuring that small and minority businesses, and women’s business

enterprises are solicited whenever they are potential sources;

(3) Dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller

tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by small and

minority businesses, and women’s business enterprises;

(4) Establishing delivery schedules, where the requirement permits, which

encourage participation by small and minority businesses, and women’s

business enterprises;

(5) Using the services and assistance, as appropriate, of such organizations

as the Small Business Administration and the Minority Business

Development Agency of the Department of Commerce; and.

SC-19.06 Add the following after Article 19.05.A.(5) with the title “Anti-Kickback”:

A. Contractor shall comply with the Copeland Anti-Kickback Act (18 USC 874

and 40 USC 276c) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29

CFR Part 3, “Contractors and Subcontractors on Public Buildings or Public

Works Financed in Whole or in Part by Loans or Grants of the United

States”). The Act provides that Contractor or subcontractor shall be

prohibited from inducing, by any means, any person employed in the

construction, completion, or repair of public facilities, to give up any part of

the compensation to which they are otherwise entitled. Owner shall report

all suspected or reported violations to Agency.

SC-19.07 Add the following after Article 19.06.A with the title “Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C.

7401-7671q.) and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act (33 U.S.C. 1251-1387), as

amended”:

A. Contractor to agree to comply with all applicable standards, orders or

regulations issued pursuant to the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7401-7671q) and

the federal Water Pollution Control Act as amended (33 U.S.C. 1251-1387.

Violations must be reported to the Federal awarding agency and the

Regional Office of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).

SC-19.08 Add the following after Article 19.07.A with the title “Equal Employment

Opportunity”:

A. The Contract is considered a federally assisted construction contract. Except

as otherwise provided under 41 CFR Part 60, all contracts that meet the

definition of “federally assisted construction contract” in 41 CFR 60-1.3

must include the equal opportunity clause provided under 41 CFR 160-

1.4(b), in accordance with Executive Order 11246, “Equal Employment

Opportunity” (30 FR 12319, 12935, 3 CFR Part, 1964-1965 Comp., p. 339),

as amended by Executive Order 11375, “Amending Executive Order 11246




Page 12 of 13

Relating to Equal Employment Opportunity,” and implementing regulations

at 41 CFR Part 60, “Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs,

Equal Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor.”

SC-19.9 Add the following after Article 19.08.A with the title “Byrd Anti-Lobbying

Amendment (31 U.S.C. 1352”:

A. Contractors that apply or bid for an award exceeding $100,000 must file the

required certification (RD Instruction 1940-Q, Exhibit A-1). The Contractor

certifies to the Owner and every subcontractor certifies to the Contractor

that it will not and has not used Federal appropriated funds to pay any

person or organization for influencing or attempting to influence an officer

or employee of any agency, a member of Congress, officer or employee of

Congress, or an employee of a member of Congress in connection with

obtaining the Contract if it is covered by 31 U.S.C. 1352. The Contractor

and every subcontractor must also disclose any lobbying with non-Federal

funds that takes place in connection with obtaining an Federal award. Such

disclosures are forwarded from tier to tier up to the Owner. Necessary

certification and disclosure forms shall be provided by Owner.

SC-19.10 Add the following after Article 19.09.A with the title “Environmental

Requirements”:

When constructing a Project involving trenching and/or other related earth

excavations, Contractor shall comply with the following environmental conditions:

A. Wetlands –When disposing of excess, spoil, or other construction materials

on public or private property, Contractor shall not fill in or otherwise

convert wetlands.

B. Floodplains –When disposing of excess, spoil, or other construction

materials on public or private property, Contractor shall not fill in or

otherwise convert 100-year floodplain areas (Standard Flood Hazard Area)

delineated on the latest Federal Emergency Management Agency Floodplain

Maps, or other appropriate maps, e.g., alluvial soils on NRCS Soil Survey

Maps.

C. Historic Preservation – Any excavation by Contractor that uncovers an

historical or archaeological artifact or human remains shall be immediately

reported to Owner and a representative of Agency. Construction shall be

temporarily halted pending the notification process and further directions

issued by Agency after consultation with the State Historic Preservation

Officer (SHPO).

D. Endangered Species – Contractor shall comply with the Endangered Species

Act, which provides for the protection of endangered and/or threatened

species and critical habitat. Should any evidence of the presence of

endangered and/or threatened species or their critical habitat be brought to

the attention of Contractor, Contractor will immediately report this

evidence to Owner and a representative of Agency. Construction shall be

temporarily halted pending the notification process and further directions

issued by Agency after consultation with the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service.




Page 13 of 13

SC-19.11 Add the following after Article 19.10.D with the title “Contract Work Hours and Safety

Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 3701-3708)”:

A. Where applicable, for contracts awarded by the Owner in excess of $100,000 that

involve the employment of mechanics or laborers, the Contractor bust comply

with 40 U.S.C. 3702 and 3704, as supplemented by Department of Labor

regulations (29 CFR Part 5). Under 40 U.S.C. 3702 of the Act, the Contractor must

compute the wages of every mechanic and laborer on the basis of a standard work

week of 40 hours. Work in excess of the standard work week is permissible

provided that the worker is compensated at a rate of not less than one and a half

times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours in the work

week. The requirements of 40 U.S.C. 3704 are applicable to construction work and

provide that o laborer or mechanic must be required to work in surroundings or

under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous. These

requirements do not apply to the purchases of supplies or materials or articles

ordinarily available on the open market, or contracts for transportation or

transmission of intelligence.

SC 19.12 Add the following after Article 19.11.A with the title “Debarment and Suspension

(Executive Orders 12549 and 12689)”:

A. A contract award (see 2CFR 180.220) must not be made to parties listed on the

governmentwide exclusions in the System for Award Management (SAM), in

accordance with the OMB guidelines at 2 CFR 180 that implement Executive

orders 12549 (3 CFR Part 1986 Comp., p. 189) and 12689 (3 CFR Part 1989 Comp.,

p. 235), “Debarment and Suspension.” SAM Exclusions contains the names of

parties debarred, suspended, or otherwise excluded by agencies, as well as parties

declared ineligible under statutory or regulatory authority other than Executive

Order 12549.

SC 19.13 Add the following after Article 19.12.A with the title “Procurement of Recovered

Materials”:

A. The Contractor must comply with 2 CFR part 200.322, “Procurement of recovered

materials.”

EJCDC® C-610, Performance Bond


and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved. 1 of 3

PERFORMANCE BOND

CONTRACTOR (name and address):

SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):

OWNER (name and address): Wakulla County Board of County Commissioners

3093 Crawfordville Hwy.



Effective Date of the Agreement:

Amount:

Description (name and location): Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim Project

Lawhon Mill Rd., Crawfordville, FL

BOND

Bond Number:

Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract):

Amount:

Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 16

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause

this Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

(seal) (seal)

Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:

Signature Signature (attach power of attorney)


Title Title

Attest: Attest:

Signature Signature

Title Title

Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to

Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.




1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind

themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and

assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction

Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.

2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety

and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except

when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in

Paragraph 3.

3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract,

the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after:

3.1 The Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and

the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor

Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is

requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor, and

Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the Owner

does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5)

business days after receipt of the Owner’s notice, request such a

conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the

Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any

conference requested under this Paragraph 3.1 shall be held

within ten (10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the

Owner’s notice. If the Owner, the Contractor, and the Surety

agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to

perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall

not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a

Contractor Default;

3.2 The Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates

the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety; and

3.3 The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the

Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction

Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the

Construction Contract.

4. Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice

requirement in Paragraph 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply

with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the

Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety

demonstrates actual prejudice.

5. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the

Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the

following actions:

5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the

Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract;

5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction

Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors;

5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified

contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for

performance and completion of the Construction Contract,

arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the

Owner and a contractor selected with the Owners concurrence,

to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed

by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the

Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of

damages as described in Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of

the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the

Contractor Default; or

5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for

completion, or obtain a new contractor, and with reasonable

promptness under the circumstances:

5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for

which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as

practicable after the amount is determined, make payment

to the Owner; or

5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the

Owner, citing the reasons for denial.

6. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with

reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default

on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice

from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its

obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to

enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as

provided in Paragraph 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment or the

Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice

the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the

Owner.

7. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then

the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater

than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and

the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater

than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to

the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract

Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication for:

7.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of

defective work and completion of the Construction Contract;

7.2 additional legal, design professional, and delay costs

resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the

actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 5; and

7.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are

specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by

delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.

8. If the Surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, the

Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond.

9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for

obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction

Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced

or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of

action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than

the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and

assigns.




10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including

changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related

subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.

11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be

instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in

which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted

within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within

two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years

after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this

Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are

void or prohibited by law, the minimum periods of limitations

available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be

applicable.

12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner, or the Contractor shall be

mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their

signature appears.

13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory

or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was

to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said

statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and

provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement

shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent

is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a

common law bond.

14. Definitions

14.1 Balance of the Contract Price: The total amount

payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction

Contract after all proper adjustments have been made including

allowance for the Contractor for any amounts received or to be

received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims

for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all

valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the

Contractor under the Construction Contract.

14.2 Construction Contract: The agreement between the

Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all

Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and

the Contract Documents.

14.3 Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which

has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to

comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.

14.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has not

been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required

under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or

comply with the other material terms of the Construction

Contract.

14.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that comprise

the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and

subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to

be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be

Contractor.

16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:

EJCDC® C-615, Payment Bond



PAYMENT BOND

CONTRACTOR (name and address):

SURETY (name and address of principal place of business):

OWNER (name and address): Wakulla County Board of County Commissioners

3093 Crawfordville Hwy.



Effective Date of the Agreement:

Amount:

Description (name and location): Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim Project

Lawhon Mill Road, Crawfordville Road, FL

BOND

Bond Number:

Date (not earlier than the Effective Date of the Agreement of the Construction Contract):

Amount:

Modifications to this Bond Form: None See Paragraph 18

Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth below, do each cause

this Payment Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY

(seal) (seal)

Contractor’s Name and Corporate Seal Surety’s Name and Corporate Seal

By: By:

Signature Signature (attach power of attorney)


Title Title

Attest: Attest:

Signature Signature

Title Title




Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference

to Contractor, Surety, Owner, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.




1. The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind

themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,

successors, and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor,

materials, and equipment furnished for use in the

performance of the Construction Contract, which is

incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following

terms.

2. If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due

to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies, and holds

harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens, or suits

by any person or entity seeking payment for labor,

materials, or equipment furnished for use in the

performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety

and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this

Bond.

3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction

Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this

Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the

Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in

Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against

the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or

entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment

furnished for use in the performance of the Construction

Contract, and tendered defense of such claims, demands,

liens, or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.

4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph

3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense

defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner against a

duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit.

5. The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond

shall arise after the following:

5.1 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with

the Contractor,

5.1.1 have furnished a written notice of non-

payment to the Contractor, stating with

substantial accuracy the amount claimed

and the name of the party to whom the

materials were, or equipment was,

furnished or supplied or for whom the

labor was done or performed, within

ninety (90) days after having last

performed labor or last furnished

materials or equipment included in the

Claim; and

5.1.2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the

address described in Paragraph 13).

5.2 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct

contract with the Contractor have sent a Claim to

the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph

13).

6. If a notice of non-payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is

given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to

satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of

non-payment under Paragraph 5.1.1.

7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph

5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall

promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following

actions:

7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the

Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the

Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and

the basis for challenging any amounts that are

disputed; and

7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed

amounts.

7.3 The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations

under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 shall not be deemed to

constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or

Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim,

except as to undisputed amounts for which the

Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If,

however, the Surety fails to discharge its

obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, the Surety

shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable

attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to

recover any sums found to be due and owing to

the Claimant.

8. The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount

of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s

fees provided under Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this

Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good

faith by the Surety.

9. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the

Construction Contract shall be used for the performance

of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any,

under any construction performance bond. By the

Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond,

they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the

performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated

to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under

this Bond, subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds

for the completion of the work.

10. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants, or

others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated

to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be

liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any

Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond

no obligation to make payments to or give notice on

behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to

Claimants under this Bond.

11. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including

changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related

subcontracts, purchase orders, and other obligations.




12. No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under

this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in

the state in which the project that is the subject of the

Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of

one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a

Claim to the Surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or

(2) on which the last labor or service was performed by

anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished

by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of

(1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph

are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of

limitation available to sureties as a defense in the

jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

13. Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner, or the

Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address

shown on the page on which their signature appears.

Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished,

shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received.

14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a

statutory or other legal requirement in the location where

the construction was to be performed, any provision in

this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal

requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and

provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal

requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When

so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed

as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a

potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and

Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall

permit a copy to be made.

16. Definitions

16.1 Claim: A written statement by the Claimant

including at a minimum:

1. The name of the Claimant;

2. The name of the person for whom the labor

was done, or materials or equipment

furnished;

3. A copy of the agreement or purchase order

pursuant to which labor, materials, or

equipment was furnished for use in the

performance of the Construction Contract;

4. A brief description of the labor, materials, or

equipment furnished;

5. The date on which the Claimant last

performed labor or last furnished materials or

equipment for use in the performance of the

Construction Contract;

6. The total amount earned by the Claimant for

labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of

the date of the Claim;

7. The total amount of previous payments

received by the Claimant; and

8. The total amount due and unpaid to the

Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment

furnished as of the date of the Claim.

16.2 Claimant: An individual or entity having a direct

contract with the Contractor or with a

subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor,

materials, or equipment for use in the performance

of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant

also includes any individual or entity that has

rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable

mechanic’s lien or similar statute against the real

property upon which the Project is located. The

intent of this Bond shall be to include without

limitation in the terms of “labor, materials, or

equipment” that part of the water, gas, power,

light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or

rental equipment used in the Construction

Contract, architectural and engineering services

required for performance of the work of the

Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors,

and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may

be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor,

materials, or equipment were furnished.

16.3 Construction Contract: The agreement between

the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover

page, including all Contract Documents and all

changes made to the agreement and the Contract

Documents.

16.4 Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has

not been remedied or waived, to pay the

Contractor as required under the Construction

Contract or to perform and complete or comply

with the other material terms of the Construction

Contract.

16.5 Contract Documents: All the documents that

comprise the agreement between the Owner and

Contractor.

17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a

contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this

Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term

Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:

Contractor's Application for Payment No.

Application Application Date:

Period:

To From (Contractor): Via (Engineer):

(Owner):

Project: Contract:

Owner's Contract No.: Contractor's Project No.: Engineer's Project No.:

1. ORIGINAL CONTRACT PRICE...........................................................................$

2. Net change by Change Orders......................................................................................$

3. Current Contract Price (Line 1 ± 2)................................................................................................$

4. TOTAL COMPLETED AND STORED TO DATE

(Column F total on Progress Estimates).............................................................................................................$

5. RETAINAGE:

a. X Work Completed..............................................$

b. X Stored Material..............................................$

c. Total Retainage (Line 5.a + Line 5.b).........................................................................................................................................$

6. AMOUNT ELIGIBLE TO DATE (Line 4 - Line 5.c)....................................................................................................................$

7. LESS PREVIOUS PAYMENTS (Line 6 from prior Application).........................................................................................................$

8. AMOUNT DUE THIS APPLICATION....................................................................................................................................$

9. BALANCE TO FINISH, PLUS RETAINAGE

(Column G total on Progress Estimates + Line 5.c above).....................................................................................................$

Contractor's Certification

Payment of: $

is recommended by:

Payment of: $

is approved by:

Contractor Signature

By: Date: Approved by:

NET CHANGE BY

CHANGE ORDERS

TOTALS

(Line 8 or other - attach explanation of the other amount)

(Date)

Funding or Financing Entity (if applicable)

(Owner)

(Date)

(Date)(Engineer)

Change Order Summary

Number Deductions

Approved Change Orders

(Line 8 or other - attach explanation of the other amount)

Application For Payment

Baskerville-Donovan, Inc.

Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim

Project

Wakulla County

111803.1

Additions

The undersigned Contractor certifies, to the best of its knowledge, the following:

(1) All previous progress payments received from Owner on account of Work done under the Contract

have been applied on account to discharge Contractor's legitimate obligations incurred in connection

with the Work covered by prior Applications for Payment;

(2) Title to all Work, materials and equipment incorporated in said Work, or otherwise listed in or

covered by this Application for Payment, will pass to Owner at time of payment free and clear of all

Liens, security interests, and encumbrances (except such as are covered by a bond acceptable to Owner

indemnifying Owner against any such Liens, security interest, or encumbrances); and

(3) All the Work covered by this Application for Payment is in accordance with the Contract Documents

and is not defective.

EJCDC® C-620 Contractor's Application for Payment

© 2013 National Society of Professional Engineers for EJCDC. All rights reserved.

Page 1 of 4

Progress Estimate - Lump Sum Work

For (Contract): Application Number:

Application Period: Application Date:

B C D Materials Presently Total Completed Balance to Finish

Stored (not in C or D) and Stored to Date (B - F)

(C + D + E)

Contractor's Application

Totals

%

(F / B)

GE

Scheduled Value ($)Description

A

This Period

FWork Completed

From Previous Application

(C+D)

Specification Section

No.



Page 2 of 4

Progress Estimate - Unit Price Work Contractor's Application



Totals

%

(F / B) Description

Materials Presently

Stored (not in C)

Total Completed

and Stored to Date

(D + E)

Balance to Finish

(B - F)

Estimated

Quantity

Installed

Value of Work

Installed to

Date

Contract Information

Item

QuantityUnits Unit Price

Total Value

of Item ($)

Item

Bid Item No.

A B C D E F



Page 3 of 4

Stored Material Summary Contractor's Application



B E G

Totals

D F

Materials Remaining

in Storage ($)

(D + E - F)

Amount Stored

this Month ($)

Subtotal Amount

Completed and

Stored to Date

(D + E)

Stored Previously Incorporated in Work

Date Placed

into Storage

(Month/Year)

Amount

($)

Date (Month/

Year)

Amount

($)

Supplier

Invoice No.

Submittal No.

(with

Specification

Section No.)

A C

Bid

Item

No.

Storage

LocationDescription of Materials or Equipment Stored



Page 4 of 4

EJCDC® C-941, Change Order.


Page 1 of 2

Change Order No.

Date of Issuance: Effective Date:

Owner: Wakulla County Owner's Contract No.:

Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:


Project: Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim

Project

Contract Name:

The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order:

Description:

Attachments: [List documents supporting change]

CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES

[note changes in Milestones if applicable]

Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times:

Substantial Completion:

$ Ready for Final Payment:

days or dates

[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change

Orders No. to No. :

[Increase] [Decrease] from previously approved Change

Orders No. to No. :



days

Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order:



days or dates

[Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order: [Increase] [Decrease] of this Change Order:



days or dates

Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders:



days or dates

RECOMMENDED: ACCEPTED: ACCEPTED:

By: By: By:

Engineer (if required) Owner (Authorized Signature) Contractor (Authorized Signature)

Title: Title

: Title

:

Date: Date

:

Date

:

Approved by Funding Agency (if

applicable)

By: Date:

Title:

EJCDC® C-941, Change Order.


Page 2 of 2


EJCDC® C-550, Notice to Proceed.


Page 1 of 2

NOTICE TO PROCEED

Owner: Wakulla County Board of County

Commissioners

Owner's Contract No.:



Project: Wakulla County

Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment

Plant Interim Project

Contract Name:

Effective Date of Contract:

TO CONTRACTOR:

Owner hereby notifies Contractor that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence to run on

[_____________________, 20__]. [see Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions]

On that date, Contractor shall start performing its obligations under the Contract Documents. No Work shall be

done at the Site prior to such date. In accordance with the Agreement, [the date of Substantial Completion is

________________________, and the date of readiness for final payment is_____________________] or [the

number of days to achieve Substantial Completion is _____________________, and the number of days to

achieve readiness for final payment is _____________________].

Before starting any Work at the Site, Contractor must comply with the following:

[Note any access limitations, security procedures, or other restrictions]

Owner:

Authorized Signature

By:

Title:

Date Issued:

Copy: Engineer

EJCDC® C-550, Notice to Proceed.


Page 2 of 2


EJCDC® C-625, Certificate of Substantial Completion.


Page 1 of 2

CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Owner: Wakulla County Board of County Commissioners Owner's Contract No.:



Project: Otter Creek Wastewater Treatment Plant Interim

Project

Contract Name:

This [preliminary] [final] Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to:

All Work The following specified portions of the Work:

Date of Substantial Completion

The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Owner, Contractor, and

Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or portion thereof

designated above is hereby established, subject to the provisions of the Contract pertaining to Substantial Completion.

The date of Substantial Completion in the final Certificate of Substantial Completion marks the commencement of the

contractual correction period and applicable warranties required by the Contract.

A punch list of items to be completed or corrected is attached to this Certificate. This list may not be all-inclusive, and

the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in

accordance with the Contract.

The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance, heat, utilities,

insurance, and warranties upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work shall be as provided in the Contract, except as

amended as follows: [Note: Amendments of contractual responsibilities recorded in this Certificate should be the product

of mutual agreement of Owner and Contractor; see Paragraph 15.03.D of the General Conditions.]

Amendments to Owner's

responsibilities: None

As follows

Amendments to

Contractor's responsibilities: None

As follows:

The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate: [punch list; others]

This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor is it a

release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract.

EXECUTED BY ENGINEER: RECEIVED: RECEIVED:

By: By: By:

(Authorized signature) Owner (Authorized Signature) Contractor (Authorized Signature)

Title: Title: Title:

Date: Date: Date:

EJCDC® C-625, Certificate of Substantial Completion.


Page 2 of 2


USDA Form Approved

Form RD 400-6 OMB No.0575-0018

(Rev.4-00) COMPLIANCE STATEMENT

This statement relates to a proposed contract with

WAKULLA COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS

(Name of borrower or grantee)

Who expects to finance the contract with assistance from either the Rural Housing Service (RHS),

Rural Business-Cooperative Service (RBS), or the Rural Utilities Service (RUS) or their successor

agencies, United State Department of Agriculture (whether by a loan, grant, loan insurance,

guarantee, or other form of financial assistance). I am the undersigned bidder or prospective

contractor, I represent that:

1. I have, have not, participated in a previous contract or subcontract subject to Executive

Oder 11246 (regarding equal employment opportunity) or a preceding similar Executive Order.

2. If I have participated in such a contract or subcontract, I have, have not filed all

compliance reports that have been required to file in connection with the contract or subcontract.

If the proposed contract is for $50,000 or more and I have 50 or more employees, I also represent that:

3. I have, have not previously had contracts subject to the written affirmative action

programs requirements of the Secretary of Labor.

4. If I have participated in such a contract or subcontract, I have, have not developed and

placed on file at each establishment affirmative action programs as required by the rules and

regulations of the Secretary of Labor.

I understand that if I have failed to file any compliance reports that have been required of me, I am not

eligible and will not be eligible to have my bid considered or to enter into the proposed contract unless and

until I make an arrangement regarding such reports that is satisfactory to either the RHS, RBS or RUS, or

to the office where the reports are required to be filed.

I also certify that I do not maintain or provide for my employees any segregated facilities at any of my

establishments, and that I do not permit my employees to perform their services at any location, under my

control, where segregated facilities are maintained. I certify further that I will not maintain or provide for my

employees any segregated facilities at any of my establishments, and that I will not permit my employees to

perform their services at any location, under my control, where segregated facilities are maintained. I agree

that a breach of this certification is a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in my contract. As used in

this certification, the term “segregated facilities” means any waiting rooms, work areas, restrooms and wash

rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas,

parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities

provided for employees which are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of

race, creed, color, or national origin, because of habit, local custom, or otherwise. I further agree that (except

where I have obtained identical certifications for proposed subcontractors for specific time periods) I will

obtain identical certifications from proposed subcontractors prior to the award of subcontractors exceeding

$10,000 which are not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause; that I will retain such

certifications in my files; and that I will forward the following notice to such proposed subcontractors

(except where the proposed subcontractors have submitted identical certifications for specific time periods):

(See Reverse).

According to the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995, an agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to a collection of

information unless it displays the valid OMB control number. The valid OMB control number for this information collection is 0575-0018. The time

required to complete this information collection is estimated to average 10 minutes per response, including the time for reviewing instructions, searching

existing data sources, gathering and maintaining the data needed, and completing and reviewing the collection of information.

RD 400-6 (Rev. 4-00)

Position 6

NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE SUBCONTRACTORS OF REQUIREMENTS FOR

CERTIFICATIONS OF NON-SEGREGATED FACILITIES

A certification of Nonsegregated Facilities, as required by the May 9, 1967, order (32F.R. 7439, May 19, 1967)

on Elimination of Segregated Facilities, by the Secretary of Labor, must be submitted prior to the award of a

subcontract exceeding $10,000 which is not exempt from the provisions of the Equal Opportunity clause. The

certification may be submitted either for each subcontract or for all subcontracts during a period (i.e., quarterly,

semiannually, or annually).

NOTE: The penalty for making false statements in offers is prescribed in 18 U.S.C. 1001.

Date

(Signature of Bidder or Prospective Contractor)

Address (including Zip Code)

• U.S.GPO:2000-555-008/86536

Form AD-1048 (1/92)

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION – LOWER TIER COVERED TRANSACTIONS

This certification is required by the regulations implementing Executive Order 12549, Debarment and Suspension, 7 CFR Pat 3017, Section 3017.510, Participants’ responsibilities. The regulations were published as Part IV of the January 30, 1989, Federal Register (pages 4722-4733). Copies of the regulations may be obtained by contacting the Department of Agriculture agency with which this transaction originated.

(BEFORE COMPLETING CERTIFICATION, READ INSTRUCTION ON REVERSE)

(1) The prospective lower tier participant certifies, by submission of this proposal, that neither it nor its principals is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction by any Federal department or agency.

(2) Where the prospective lower tier participant is unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, such prospective participant shall attach an explanation to this proposal.

Organization PR/Award Number or Project Name

Name(s) and Title(s) or Authorized Representative(s)

Signature(s) Date

Form AD-1048 (1/92)

Instructions for Certification

1. By signing and submitting this form, the prospective lower tier participant is providing the certification set out on the reverse side in accordance with these instructions.

2. The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was entered into. If it is later than determined that the prospective lower tier participant knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment.

3. The prospective lower tier participant shall provide immediate written notice to the person to which this proposal is submitted if at any time the prospective lower tier participant learns that its certification was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances.

4. The terms “covered transactions,” “debarred,” “suspended,” “ineligible,”, “lower tier covered transactions,” “participant,” “person,” “primary covered transaction,” “principal,” “proposal,” and “voluntarily excluded,” as used in this clause, have the meanings set out in the Definitions and Coverage sections of rules implementing Executive Order 12549. You may contact the person to which this proposal is submitted for assistance in obtaining a copy of those regulations.

5. The prospective lower tier participant agrees by submitting this form that, should the proposed covered transaction be entered into, it shall not knowingly enter into any lower tier covered transaction with a person who is debarred, suspended, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this covered transaction, unless authorized by the department or agency with which this transaction originated.

6. The prospective lower tier participant further agrees by submitting this form that it will include this clause titled “Certification Regarding Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusion – Lower Tier Covered Transaction,” without modification, in all lower tier covered transactions and in all solicitation for lower tier covered transaction.

7. A participant in a covered transaction may rely upon a certification of a prospective participant in a lower tier covered transaction that it is not debarred, suspended, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from the covered transaction, unless it knows that the certification is erroneous. A participant may decide the method and frequency by which it determines the eligibility of its principals. Each participant may, but is not required to, check the Non-procurement List.

8. Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render in good faith the certification required by this clause. The knowledge and information of a participant is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings.

9. Except for transactions authorized under paragraph 5 of these instructions, if a participant in a covered transaction knowingly enters into a lower tier covered transaction with a person who is suspended, debarred, ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this transaction, in addition to other remedies available to the Federal Government, the department or agency with which this transaction originated may pursue available remedies, including suspension and/or debarment.

RD Instruction 1940-Q Exhibit A-1

CERTIFICATION FOR CONTRACTS, GRANTS AND LOANS

The undersigned certifies, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that: 1. No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by

or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an office or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant or Federal loan, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant or loan.

2. If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been

paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant or loan, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form – LLL, “Disclosure of Lobbying Activities,” in accordance with its instructions.

3. The undersigned shall require that the language of this

certification be included in the award documents for all sub-awards at all tiers (including contracts, subcontractors, and sub-grants under grants and loans) and that all sub-recipients shall certify and disclose accordingly.

This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by Section 1352, Title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure.

(Name) (Date)

(Title)

OTTER CREEK WWTP INTERIM PROJECT

Sponsor / Developer: WAKULLA COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS 3093 Crawfordville Hwy. Crawfordville, Florida, 32326

Engineer: BASKERVILLE-DONOVAN, INC. 449 W. Main St. Pensacola, Florida, 32502

Contractor:

Donald Trump, President of the United States Sony Perdue, Secretary of Agriculture

RUS Bulletin 1780-26

Exhibit I

Page 1

CERTIFICATE OF OWNER’S ATTORNEY AND AGNCY CONCURRENCE

CERTIFICATE OF OWNER’S ATTORNEY

PROJECT NAME: OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY (WWTF)

INTERIM PROJECT

CONTRACTOR NAME: ________________________________

I, the undersigned, ___________________________________, the duly authorized and acting

legal representative of Wakulla County, do hereby certify as follows: I have examined the

attached Contract(s) and performance and payment bond(s) and the manner of execution thereof,

and I am of the opinion that each of the aforesaid agreements is adequate and has been duly

executed by the proper parties thereto acting through their duly authorized representatives; that

said representatives have full power and authority to execute said agreements on behalf of the

respective parties named thereon; and that the foregoing agreements constitute valid and legally

binding obligations upon the parties executing the same in accordance with the terms,

conditions, and provisions thereof.

_______________________________

Name Date

AGENCY CONCURRENCE

As lender or insurer of funds to defray the costs of this Contract, and without liability for

any payments thereunder, the Agency hereby concurs in the form, content, and execution of

this Agreement.

Agency Representative Date

Name


Attachment H

Page 2

00800-2



Exhibit J

Page 1

00800-1

ENGINEER’S CERTIFICATION OF FINAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

PROJECT NAME: OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT (WWTF)

INTERIM PROJECT

The final Drawings and Specifications, other assembled Construction Contract Documents,

bidding-related documents (or requests for proposals or other construction procurement

documents), and any other Final Design Phase deliverables, comply with all requirements of the

U.S. Department of Agriculture, Rural Utilities Service, to the best of my knowledge and

professional judgment.

If the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (EJCDC) documents have been used, all

modifications required by RUS Bulletin 1780-26 have been made in accordance with the terms of

the license agreement, which states in part that the Engineer “must plainly show all changes to the

Standard EJCDC Test, using “Track Changes’ (redline/strikeout), highlighting, or other means of

clearly indicating additions and deletions.” Such other means may include attachments indicating

changes (e.g. Supplementary Conditions modifying the General Conditions).

_________________________________

Environmental Engineer Date

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

Name and Title

_________________________________

Electrical Engineer Date

James Tatone, P.E.

_________________________________

Civil Engineer Date

Michael Langston, P.E.

Name and Title


Exhibit J

Page 2

00800-2


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1

SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Work by Owner.

4. Work under separate contracts.

5. Access to site.

6. Coordination with occupants.

7. Work restrictions.

8. Specification and drawing conventions.

9. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Wakulla County Otter Creek Waste Water Treatment Facility (WWTF)

Interim.

1. Project Location: 2146 Lawhon Mill Road Crawfordville, FL 32327.

B. Owner: Wakulla County.

1. Owner's Representative: Ned Nobles.

C. Engineer of Record: T. Keith Hill, PE

Project Manager: Richard W. Delp, CSI-CDT

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. This project consists of by-pass piping around the filters, upgrades to the in-plant pump

station, installation of an auger screen for the septage receiving station, installation of

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


valve actuators, and electrical and integration work as indicated on the drawings or in the

contract documents that will result in a complete and operational system.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

a. Otter Creek WWTF Interim Project.

1.5 WORK BY OWNER

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering

with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this

Contract with work performed by Owner.

1.6 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried

out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts.

Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

1.7 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as

indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas as shown on drawings indicated. Do not

disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to areas as shown on contract drawings.

2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances

serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency

vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction

operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

1.8 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period,

with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction

operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to

interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used

facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's

operations.

B. Owner Limited Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to

occupy and to place and install equipment in completed portions of the Work, prior to

Substantial Completion of the Work, provided such occupancy does not interfere with

completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and limited occupancy shall not

constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Engineer will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of

the Work to be occupied prior to Owner acceptance of the completed Work.

2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before limited

Owner occupancy.

3. Before limited Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully

operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On

occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving

occupied portions of Work.

4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service

for occupied portions of Work.

1.9 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the facility to normal business working hours of 6:00 a.m.

to 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary

utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Engineer and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions.

2. Obtain Engineer’s written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and

vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Obtain Engineer’s written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site

is not permitted.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


F. Employee Identification: Provide identification Employee Roster Badges for Contractor

personnel working on Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

G. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of

Contractor personnel working on Project site.

1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative.

1.10 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated

otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are

described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to

identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in

the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of

the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing

Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01 10 00

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00 - 1

SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to

changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or

unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not

required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to

Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or

fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title

and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be

provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other

parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate

contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of

the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section.

Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific

features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work

specified.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and

installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.

g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of Engineers and owners.

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.

i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project.

j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's

letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays

in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible

with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated

results.

3. Engineer's Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution.

Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within

15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or

documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Owner’s Change Order, Owner’s Work Change Directive,

or Engineer's Field Order for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution

with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility

tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved

substitutions.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for

change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related

submittals.

1. Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer

will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these

requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.

d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.

e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is

compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Engineer will consider requests for substitution if received

within 60 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered

or rejected at discretion of Engineer.

1. Conditions: Engineer will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Engineer

will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these

requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities

Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include

compensation to Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of

other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract

Documents.

c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results.

d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.

f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.

g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is

compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process

Applications for Payment.


1. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements

governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract

Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's


1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's

construction schedule. Cost-loaded Critical Path Method Schedule may serve to satisfy

requirements for the schedule of values.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms

and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.

b. Submittal schedule.

c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Engineer at earliest possible date, but no later than seven

days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring

separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each

phase of payment.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction

schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values

coordinated with each element.

5. Subschedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained design

professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification of payment

requests, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with the scope of each design

services contract as described in Section 01 10 00 "Summary."

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for

the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Engineer.

c. Engineer's project number.

d. Contractor's name and address.

e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of EJCDC Document C-620.

3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division.

b. Description of the Work.

c. Name of subcontractor.

d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.

e. Name of supplier.

f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.

g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor.

2) Materials.

3) Equipment.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project

Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts

in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project

closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and

subcontract amount.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated

and stored, but not yet installed.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required,

include evidence of insurance.

7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each

subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.

Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by

measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine

quantities.

9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each

purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments

or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.

10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.

Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual

work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values

or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next

Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result

in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent

with previous applications and payments as certified by Engineer and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Engineer by the 7th of the

month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last

day of the month.

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by

Engineer.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Engineer and Owner for Applications

for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Engineer will return incomplete

applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule.

Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment,

whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at

time of Application for Payment.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last

day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project

acceleration.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or

equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items

stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of

surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.

Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include

overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous


b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application

for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and

remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment

to Engineer by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of

lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate

information about application.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's

liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by

the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after

deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full

waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers.

4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from

every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is

lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or

coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. Schedule of values.

3. Sustainable design submittal for project materials cost data.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


4. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).

5. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating

Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor.

6. Products list (preliminary if not final).

7. Sustainable design action plans.

8. Schedule of unit prices.

9. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).

10. List of Contractor's staff assignments.

11. List of Contractor's principal consultants.

12. Copies of building permits.

13. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for


14. Initial progress report.

15. Report of preconstruction conference.

16. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

17. Performance and payment bonds.

18. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Engineer issues the Certificate of

Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion

for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously

for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final

Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted

and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.

4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."

5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."

6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."

7. Evidence that claims have been settled.

8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed

responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020





T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures.

2. Coordination drawings.

3. Requests for Information (RFIs).

4. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility

are assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting

Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request to Engineer from Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of


1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each

portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a

special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A r approved equivalent. Include the following information in

tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying

products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.

3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Contractor shall have employees complete Wakulla County ID Badge

process before starting construction operations. Submit a list of key personnel assignments,

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals

and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home,

office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and

telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned

to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each

temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before

or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and

accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at

meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts

and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Preparation of the schedule of values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.

5. Progress meetings.

6. Preinstallation conferences.

7. Project closeout activities.

8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of

temporary utilities to minimize waste.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually

incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that

are designated as Owner's property.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in

individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop

Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is

required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than

one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to

indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed

data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings.

Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of

various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings

by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the

information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before

submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,

structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated

replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers,

valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences.

g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance

requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Engineer indicating proposed

resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations

will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows (where

applicable):

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and

mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of

visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan

drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical

and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to

accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict

between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans

and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical

equipment.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.

5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door

floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and

similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including

insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access

doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.

b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-

alarm locations.

c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor

control center locations.

d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler

heads.

9. Review: Engineer will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being

coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's

responsibility. If Engineer determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared

in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Engineer will so inform

Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to

requirements in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures."

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the

following requirements:

1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating

system as original Drawings.

2. File Preparation Format: DWG Autocad, operating in Microsoft Windows operating

system.

3. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File

(PDF) format.

4. Engineer will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in

preparing coordination digital data files.

a. Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data files as they relate to Drawings.

b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Autocad.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement form

acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of

the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Engineer will return RFIs submitted to Engineer by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or

interpretation and the following:

1. Project name.

2. Project number.

3. Date.

4. Name of Contractor.

5. Name of Engineer.

6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

7. RFI subject.

8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

11. Contractor's narrative statement of requested information of problem statement.

12. Contractor's suggested resolution for problem statements. If Contractor's suggested

resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact

in the RFI.

13. Contractor's signature.

14. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items

needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected

materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above,

acceptable to Engineer.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Engineer’s Action: Engineer will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond.

Allow seven working days for Engineer’s response for each RFI. RFIs received by Engineer

after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.

d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents.

e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

f. Requests for interpretation of Engineer's actions on submittals.

g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Engineer's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Engineer's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal.

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, notify Engineer in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI

response.

b. Engineer’s RFI response shall not be construed as authorization of actions

requiring a contract cost or time change. Such Authorization is reserved to the

Owner.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.

Submit log monthly. Include the following:

1. Project name.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Name and address of Engineer.

4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.

5. RFI description.

6. Date the RFI was submitted.

7. Date Engineer’s response was received.

F. On receipt of Engineer’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response

to affected parties. Review response and notify Engineer within seven days if Contractor

disagrees with response.

1. Identification of the need for a related Engineer’s Field Order, Owner’s Work Change

Directive, or a Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Engineer of scheduled

meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting

minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Engineer, within seven days of the

meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Engineer will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference

before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Contractor, but no later than 15

days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Contractor, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned

parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with

Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing.

c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.

e. Lines of communications.

f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.

g. Procedures for RFIs.

h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.

i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.

k. Submittal procedures.

l. Sustainable design requirements.

m. Preparation of record documents.

n. Use of the premises and existing building.

o. Work restrictions.

p. Working hours.

q. Owner's occupancy requirements.

r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

s. Procedures for moisture and mold control.

t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.

u. Construction waste management and recycling.

v. Parking availability.

w. Office, work, and storage areas.

x. Equipment deliveries and priorities.

y. First aid.

z. Security.

aa. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Engineer will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Contractor shall conduct any required preinstallation conferences

at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other

construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Engineer

of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents.

b. Options.

c. Related RFIs.

d. Related Change Orders.

e. Purchases.

f. Deliveries.

g. Submittals.

h. Sustainable design requirements.

i. Review of mockups.

j. Possible conflicts.

k. Compatibility requirements.

l. Time schedules.

m. Weather limitations.

n. Manufacturer's written instructions.

o. Warranty requirements.

p. Compatibility of materials.

q. Acceptability of substrates.

r. Temporary facilities and controls.

s. Space and access limitations.

t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

u. Testing and inspecting requirements.

v. Installation procedures.

w. Coordination with other work.

x. Required performance results.

y. Protection of adjacent work.

z. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties

requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Engineer shall schedule and conduct a project closeout

conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Contractor, but no later than 30 days prior to the

scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project

closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Contractor, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned

parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project

and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,

including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents.

b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance.

c. Submittal of written warranties.

d. Requirements for completing sustainable design documentation.

e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.

f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.

g. Requirements for demonstration and training.

h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.

i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment.

j. Submittal procedures.

k. Coordination of separate contracts.

l. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.

m. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

n. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Contractor shall conduct progress meetings at monthly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Engineer, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in

planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these

meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to

conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as

appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Identify whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,

in relation to Contractor's construction schedule Identify how construction behind

schedule will be expedited and if commitments from parties involved to do so have

been secure. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current

and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.

3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts.

4) Status of submittals.

5) Status of sustainable design documentation.

6) Deliveries.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


7) Off-site fabrication.

8) Access.

9) Site utilization.

10) Temporary facilities and controls.

11) Progress cleaning.

12) Quality and work standards.

13) Status of correction of deficient items.

14) Field observations.

15) Status of RFIs.

16) Status of proposal requests.

17) Pending changes.

18) Status of Change Orders.

19) Pending claims and disputes.

20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

21) Record Drawings

4. Minutes: Contractor is responsible for conducting the meeting, recording and distributing

the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue

revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

F. Contractor’s Cooordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular

intervals in advance of and in preparation for the Project Progress Meetings. Project

coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as

progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: Include each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned

with current progress exclusive of the Owner and Engineer’s representatives. Also those

involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be

represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with

Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.

Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for

discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last

coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of

schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction

schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure

commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions

are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed

within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each

coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or

recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the

following:

1) Interface requirements.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2) Sequence of operations.

3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts.

4) Status of submittals.

5) Deliveries.

6) Off-site fabrication.

7) Access.

8) Site utilization.

9) Temporary facilities and controls.

10) Work hours.

11) Hazards and risks.

12) Progress cleaning.

13) Quality and work standards.

14) Change Orders.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to

others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting exclusive of the

Owner and Engineer’s representatives. Include in the Progress Meetings the reporting of

relavant componnets of the Coodination Meetings to the Owner and Engineer’s

representatives.




T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00 - 1

SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of

construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule.

2. Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Construction schedule updating reports.

4. Daily construction reports.

5. Material location reports.

6. Site condition reports.

7. Special reports.


1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.

2. Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,

and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume

time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned

early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.

3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as

scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise

approved by Engineer.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction

project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations

determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network

schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a

jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet

schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the

early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without

adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of

an activity as scheduled.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.

2. PDF electronic file.

3. Three paper copies.

B. Startup construction schedule.

1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of

schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction

period. Show logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule

for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to

comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated)

and date on label.

E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for

each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource

loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date,

late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date,

or actual start date if known.

2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in

ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.

4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed

until most recent Application for Payment.

F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.

H. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.

I. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

J. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

K. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.


A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and

reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Engineer's

request.

B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures

related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule,


1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.

2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.

3. Discuss constraints, including phasing work stages area separations interim milestones

and partial Owner occupancy.

4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.

5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.

6. Review submittal requirements and procedures.

7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.

8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies.

9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures, including

commissioning activities.

10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.

11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts,

submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and

reports.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities

involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of final

completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an

early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main

element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 30 days, unless

specifically allowed by Engineer.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long

lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities

in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,

approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

a. Major pieces of equipment.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in

Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times

in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.

5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Engineer’s administrative procedures

necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 60 days for completion of punch

list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and

as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.

3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by

Owner.

4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include

delivery date indicated in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate

the earliest possible delivery date.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery

date indicated in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the

earliest possible delivery date.

6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction.

b. Limitations of continued occupancies.

c. Uninterruptible services.

d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.

e. Use of premises restrictions.

f. Provisions for future construction.

g. Seasonal variations.

h. Environmental control.

7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the

Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards.

b. Submittals.

c. Purchases.

d. Mockups.

e. Fabrication.

f. Sample testing.

g. Deliveries.

h. Installation.

i. Tests and inspections.

j. Adjusting.

k. Curing.

l. Building flush-out.

m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of

the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be

sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Structural completion.

b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.

c. Permanent space enclosure.

d. Completion of mechanical installation.

e. Completion of electrical installation.

f. Substantial Completion.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but

not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs.

On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and

actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. See Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or

commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues.

2. Unanswered Requests for Information.

3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.

4. Notations on returned submittals.

5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days

behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by

which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working

hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by

which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has

been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within 14

days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of

each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90

days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash

requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following

information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. List of separate contractors at Project site.

3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.

4. Equipment at Project site.

5. Material deliveries.

6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow.

7. Accidents.

8. Meetings and significant decisions.

9. Unusual events (see special reports).

10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.

11. Meter readings and similar recordings.

12. Emergency procedures.

13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.

14. Change Orders received and implemented.

15. Work Change Directives received and implemented.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


16. Services connected and disconnected.

17. Equipment or system tests and startups.

18. Partial completions and occupancies.

19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of

materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials

previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on

and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project

site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:

1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.

2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.

3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.

C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and

the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for

Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with

recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute

copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project

site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain

of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or

effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are

known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect

actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly

scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each

such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not

limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Engineer Owner, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know

schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned

portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 1

SECTION 01 32 16 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Submittals.

B. Quality assurance.

C. Format for network analysis schedules.

D. Network analysis schedules.

E. Bar chart schedules.

F. Review and evaluation.

G. Updating schedules.

H. Distribution.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 10 days after date established in Notice to Proceed, submit proposed preliminary work

schedule defining planned operations for first 60 days of Work, with general outline for

remainder of Work.

B. Participate in review of preliminary and complete work schedule jointly with Engineer.

C. Within 20 days after joint review of proposed preliminary work schedule, submit draft of

proposed complete work schedule for review. Include written certification that major mechanical

and electrical Subcontractors have reviewed and accepted proposed schedule.

D. Submit updated work schedules every 30 days.

E. Submit work schedules under transmittal letter form specified in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal

Procedures.

F. Schedule Updates:

1. Overall percent complete, projected and actual.

2. Completion progress by listed activity and subactivity, to within five working days prior to

submittal.

3. Changes in Work scope and activities modified since submittal.

4. Delays in submittals or resubmittals, deliveries, or Work.

5. Adjusted or modified sequences of Work.

6. Other identifiable changes.

7. Revised projections of progress and completion.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


G. Narrative Progress Report:

1. Submit with each monthly submission of Progress Schedule.

2. Summary of Work completed during the past period between reports.

3. Work planned during the next period.

4. Explanation of differences between summary of Work completed and Work planned in

previously submitted report.

5. Current and anticipated delaying factors and estimated impact on other activities and

completion milestones.

6. Corrective action taken or proposed.


A. Scheduler: Contractor's personnel specializing in CPM scheduling with two years' minimum

experience in scheduling construction work of complexity comparable to the Project.

1.4 BAR CHART SCHEDULES

A. Format: Bar chart Schedule, to include at least:

1. Identification and listing in chronological order of those activities reasonably required to

complete the Work, including:

a. Subcontract Work.

b. Major equipment design, fabrication, factory testing, and delivery dates including

required lead times.

c. Move-in and other preliminary activities.

d. Equipment and equipment system test and startup activities.

e. Project closeout and cleanup.

f. Work sequences, constraints, and milestones.

2. Listings identified by Specification Section number.

3. Identification of the following:

a. Horizontal time frame by year, month, and week.

b. Duration, early start, and completion for each activity and subactivity.

c. Critical activities and Project float.

d. Subschedules to further define critical portions of Work.

1.5 REVIEW AND EVALUATION

A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedules with Architect/Engineer at each submittal.

B. Evaluate Project status to determine Work behind schedule and Work ahead of schedule.

C. After review, revise schedules incorporating results of review, and resubmit within 10 days.

1.6 UPDATING SCHEDULES

A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each

activity. Update schedules to depict current status of Work.

C. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other

identifiable changes.

D. Upon approval of a Change Order, include the change in the next schedule submittal.

E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.

F. Submit sorts as required to support recommended changes.

G. Prepare narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on schedule.

Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect including effects of changes on

schedules of separate Contractors.

1.7 DISTRIBUTION

A. Following joint review, distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's Project site file, to

Subcontractors, suppliers, Architect/Engineer, Owner, and other concerned parties.

B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in

schedules.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - Not Used

PART 3 EXECUTION - Not Used


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 32 33 - 1

SECTION 01 32 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs.

2. Periodic construction photographs.

3. Final completion construction photographs.

4. Web-based construction photographic documentation.


1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation.

2. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as

project record documents at Project closeout.

3. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of

demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

4. Section 02 41 19 "Selective Structure Demolition" for photographic documentation

before selective demolition operations commence.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

A. Costs: Photographic documentation services shall be considered incidental to each bid item and

are therefore included in each item.


A. Qualification Data: For photographer.

B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked

for location and direction of each photograph and video recording. Indicate elevation or story of

construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.

C. Digital Photographs: Submit dated image files with each pay application.

1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.

2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio

as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph,

accompanied by key plan file.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file

metadata tag:

a. Name of Project.

b. Date photograph was taken.

c. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and

elevation or story of construction.

d. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

D. Video Recordings: Video recordings are recommended but not required.

1. Submit video recordings in digital video disc format acceptable to Engineer. Video

recording should make every effort to capture all aspects of the construction site.


A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has regularly engaged as a photographer of

construction projects for not less than three years.

1.6 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner and Engineer for

unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum

sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.

B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to

clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each

photographic location.

C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera,

without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.

2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project

site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those

submitted to Engineer.

D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and

surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different

vantage points, as directed by Engineer.

1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.

2. Take a minimum of 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property

before starting the Work.

3. Take a minimum of 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property

to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction.

4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent

structures, pavements, and improvements.

E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of 20 photographs monthly, coinciding

with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to

show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. Pay particular

attention to record major features to be concealed or buried including piping junctions, major

fittings existing piping configurations, encountered conflicts and area of significant congestion.

F. Engineer-Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Engineer will instruct

photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage

points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and

progress since last photographs were taken.

G. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of 20 photographs as

indicated, to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

1. Frequency: Take photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with

the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment.

2. Vantage Points: Following suggestions by Engineer and Contractor, photographer to

select vantage points. During each of the following construction phases, take not less than

two of the required shots from identical vantage point each time to create a time-lapse

sequence as follows:

a. Commencement of the Work, through completion of subgrade construction.

b. Above-grade structural framing.

c. Exterior building enclosure.

d. Interior Work, through date of Substantial Completion.

H. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take a minimum of 20 color photographs after

date of Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. Engineer will

inform photographer of desired vantage points.

1. Do not include date stamp.

I. Additional Photographs: Engineer may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs

specified. .

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible.

2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request.

3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Special events planned at Project site.

b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses.

c. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.

d. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.

e. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural

requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the

schedule of values.

2. Section 01 32 00 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and

reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals.

4. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.

5. Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of

demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require

Engineer's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual

Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not

require Engineer's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with

requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification

Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and

from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet

protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within

which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems

used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent

fixed-layout document format.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing,

fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making

corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Engineer and additional time for handling and

reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and

Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include

submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required

to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead

time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's

construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing

for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.

c. Submittal category: Action; informational.

d. Name of subcontractor.

e. Description of the Work covered.

f. Scheduled date for Engineer's final release or approval.

g. Scheduled date of fabrication.

h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.

i. Scheduled dates for installation.

j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Engineer's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be

provided by Engineer for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Engineer will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract

Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.

a. Engineer makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in

Autocad.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless

partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification

Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for

coordination.

a. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.

Time for review shall commence on Engineer's receipt of submittal. No extension of the

Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of

the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time

if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will advise Contractor

when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as

initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Engineer's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals

may be transmitted simultaneously to Engineer and to Engineer's consultants, allow 15

days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Engineer before being

returned to Contractor.

D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for

identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Engineer.

3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Engineer.

d. Name of Construction Manager.

e. Name of Contractor.

f. Name of subcontractor.

g. Name of supplier.

h. Name of manufacturer.

i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a

decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals

shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,

061000.01.A).

j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

m. Other necessary identification.

4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and

unless Engineer observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents,

initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified

number of copies to Engineer.

5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately

for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Engineer

will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the

following information:

1) Project name.

2) Date.

3) Destination (To:).

4) Source (From:).

5) Name and address of Engineer.

6) Name of Contractor.

7) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

8) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

9) Category and type of submittal.

10) Submittal purpose and description.

11) Specification Section number and title.

12) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name

for each of multiple items.

13) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

14) Indication of full or partial submittal.

15) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

16) Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

17) Remarks.

18) Signature of transmitter.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as

follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling

navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed

by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01).

Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,

LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval

markings and action taken by Engineer.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner,

containing the following information:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Engineer.

d. Name of Construction Manager.


f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.

g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.

h. Category and type of submittal.

i. Submittal purpose and description.

j. Specification Section number and title.

k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each

of multiple items.

l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

n. Related physical samples submitted directly.

o. Indication of full or partial submittal.

p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.

q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.

r. Other necessary identification.

s. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file

metadata:

a. Project name.

b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

c. Manufacturer name.

d. Product name.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Engineer.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's

letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested

by Engineer on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract

Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information

as related submittal.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action

stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action

submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by

individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification

Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Engineer's FTP site

specifically established for Project.

a. Engineer will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an

electronic Project record document file.

2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Engineer will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an

electronic Project record document file.

3. Action Submittals: Submit Five paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise

indicated. Engineer will return one copy.

4. Informational Submittals: Submit five paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise

indicated. Engineer will not return copies.

5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be

signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that

entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted

certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications

where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and

type of product or equipment.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data

are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.

c. Standard color charts.

d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

e. Testing by recognized testing agency.

f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.

g. Notation of coordination requirements.

h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

b. Printed performance curves.

c. Operational range diagrams.

d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

b. Five paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Engineer will return

one copy.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless

submittal based on Engineer's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products.

b. Schedules.

c. Compliance with specified standards.

d. Notation of coordination requirements.

e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


b. Three opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Engineer will return one copy(ies).

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


c. Three opaque copies of each submittal. Engineer will retain one copy; remainder

will be returned.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic

submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and

identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-

control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual

Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time

of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's

property, are the property of Contractor.

5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two full set(s) of available choices where color,

pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from

manufacturer's product line. Engineer will return submittal with options selected.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared

from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and

physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of

color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the

following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or

containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing

color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing

and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Engineer will retain two

Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample

set as a project record sample.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication

techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to

be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in

material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of

paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary

indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the

following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract

Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.

3. Number and name of room or space.

4. Location within room or space.

5. Submit product schedule in the following format:


b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated. Engineer

will return two copies.

F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 31 00

"Project Management and Coordination."

G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 00

"Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in

Section 01 29 00 "Payment Procedures."

I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with

requirements specified in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements."

J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified

in Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures."

K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and

Maintenance Data."

L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of

firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact

information of Engineers and owners, and other information specified.

M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure

Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and

personnel certified.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is

authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of

manufacturing experience where required.

P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with

requirements in the Contract Documents.

S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on

evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or

on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.

3. Time period when report is in effect.

4. Product and manufacturers' names.

5. Description of product.

6. Test procedures and results.

7. Limitations of use.

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation

of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed

before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.

W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests

performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location,

for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.

Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for

calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide

products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit

a written request for additional information to Engineer.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other

required submittals, submit five paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible

design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be

designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing

these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with

other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections

and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Engineer.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01 77 00

"Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date

of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,

and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ENGINEER'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or

revisions required, and return it. Engineer will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and

will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Engineer will review each submittal and will not return it, or will

return it if it does not comply with requirements. Engineer will forward each submittal to

appropriate party.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial

submittals has received prior approval from Engineer.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned

for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Engineer without

action.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1

SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality

control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections

may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-

assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document

requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required

by Engineer, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of

this Section.

4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed

construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and

completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract

enforcement activities performed by Engineer.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to

verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where

indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to

show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified

installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved

mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to

verify performance characteristics.

2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from

the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and

subassemblies.

3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and

ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and

equipment, and lighting.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before

products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance

with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to

establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,

plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation

of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,

including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that

certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or

that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully

completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project;

being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of


1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards

establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply

with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but

apparently equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decision

before proceeding.


A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations,

indicating materials and size of mockup construction.

1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.

2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and

responsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction,

submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before

starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the

designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Engineer.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-

resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Engineer.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

3. Description of test and inspection.

4. Identification of applicable standards.

5. Identification of test and inspection methods.

6. Number of tests and inspections required.

7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

8. Requirements for obtaining samples.

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed,

and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to

Engineer. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate

with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and

experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures

similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through

review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible

for submittal review.

D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work

requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and

inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and

inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the

"Statement of Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during

construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and

inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into

compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved

mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of

approved and rejected results. Include work Engineer has indicated as nonconforming or

defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with

requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue.

2. Project title and number.

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

7. Identification of product and Specification Section.

8. Complete test or inspection data.

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements.

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other

Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.

4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.

5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting

manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in

other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative

making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.

3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.

5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as

well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed

for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and

extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be

performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy

qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for

specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according

to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where

required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation

of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for

this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the

following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with

performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will

perform same tasks for Project.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and

methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do

not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,

inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Engineer, with copy to Contractor.

Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work

complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using

materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Engineer.

2. Notify Engineer seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed.

3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers

that will be employed during the construction at Project.

4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

5. Obtain Engineer's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

1.10 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to

perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as

authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work

that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the

Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are

Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that

the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required

by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor

by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in

writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires

testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,

when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00 "Submittal

Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical

representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's

services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and

conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed

portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve

or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the

following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and

-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing

construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-

control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-

control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule.

Update as the Work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Engineer, testing agencies, and each party

involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and

inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as

follows:

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by

authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures

and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in

the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control

service to Engineer with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,

which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected

work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Engineer.

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and

inspection log for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas

and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as

possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in

Section 01 73 00 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00 - 1

SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including,

but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.

3. Warranties.

4. Final cleaning.

5. Repair of the Work.


1. Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion

construction photographic documentation.

2. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

3. Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in

other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and

corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why

the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days

prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below

that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction

permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities.

Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project

record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction

photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar

final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,

workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar

documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools,

spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by

Engineer. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of

maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item

and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Engineer's signature

for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

6. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted.

7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days

prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below

that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.

3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.

4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in

Section 01 79 00 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency

responders.

8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements.

9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a

minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and

tests. On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of

unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after

inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items

identified by Engineer, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final

completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 29 00 "Payment

Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Engineer's Substantial

Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed

and dated by Engineer. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been

completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage

complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit consent of surety.

5. Submit final liquidation damages settlement statement, acceptable to OWNER. 6. Completion of project closeout requirements.

7. Completion of items specified for completion beyond time of substantial completion

(regardless of whether special payment application was previously made).

8. Assurance, satisfactory to Owner, that unsettled claims will be settled and that work not

actually completed and accepted will be completed without undue delay.

9. Proof satisfactory to Owner that taxes, fees, and similar obligations of Contractor have

been paid.

10. Removal of temporary facilities, services, surplus materials, rubbish and similar

provisions.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of

10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On

receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of

unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection

or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate

will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by

construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if

necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name of Engineer.

d. Name of Contractor.

e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. MS Excel electronic file. Engineer will return annotated file.

b. PDF electronic file. Engineer will return annotated file.

c. Three paper copies. Engineer will return two copies.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer for designated portions of

the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is

indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of

designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during

construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project

Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch

paper.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark

tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or

installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone

number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title

"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty

and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling

navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous

to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not

applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum

allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply

with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution

regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other

foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other

foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured

surface.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from

Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.

f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural

weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original

condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.

Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.

Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign

substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during

construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01.

Provide written report on completion of cleaning.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01 74 19

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of

Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective

parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly

adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,

provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified

condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other

damaged transparent materials.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including

mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and

identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede

operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and

noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for

new fixtures.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1

SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.

2. Emergency manuals.

3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

4. Product maintenance manuals.

5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for

operation and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular

interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual

Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed

manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Engineer will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are

acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions

and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. PDF electronic file in searchable format. Assemble each manual into a composite

electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Engineer. Provide 3

CD’s.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable

item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance

directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose

title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Engineer will return one copy.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing

demonstration and training. Engineer will comment on whether general scope and content of

manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for

Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training.

Engineer will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Engineer's comments. Submit copies of

each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Engineer's comments and prior to

commencing demonstration and training.

2. Only originals of manufacturer’s data sheets shall be used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance

data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired

information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.

2. List of systems.

3. List of equipment.

4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation

and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For

pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance

manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,

identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to

ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building

Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.

Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.

2. Table of contents.

3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.

3. Name and address of Owner.

4. Date of submittal.

5. Name and contact information for Contractor.

6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager.

7. Name and contact information for Engineer.

8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority.

9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Engineer that designed the

systems contained in the manuals.

10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to

the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project

Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to

accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each

volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,

equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic

PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where

scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable

file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file

names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names

used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and

subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily

navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening

file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, 3” maximum, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in

thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with

clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside

covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize

data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-

reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper

operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of

contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate

volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual.

Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components

of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification

Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic

software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.

5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and

use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in

manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,

and drawing locations.

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and

equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.

3. Operating standards.

4. Operating procedures.

5. Operating logs.

6. Wiring diagrams.

7. Control diagrams.

8. Piped system diagrams.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


9. Precautions against improper use.

10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract

Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.

5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests.

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.

2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

3. Routine and normal operating instructions.

4. Regulation and control procedures.

5. Instructions on stopping.

6. Normal shutdown instructions.

7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as

installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for

identification.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include

source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,

and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and

telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation

or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3. Color, pattern, and texture.

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.

5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and

related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,

maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service

contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,

list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or

schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.

2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly.

3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.

4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential

maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.

2. Troubleshooting guide.

3. Precautions against improper maintenance.

4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.

5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine

maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,

quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording

maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local

sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and

telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides

an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies

indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and

maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment

not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information

for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional

manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only

sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or

component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format,

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data

applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and

where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or

systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and

flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to

ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 01 78 39

"Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and

maintenance documentation.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents,


1. Record Drawings.

2. Record Specifications.

3. Record Product Data.

4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Section 01 77 00 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.

2. Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit two set(s) of marked-up record prints.

2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit two paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.

2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints.

3) Submit record digital data files and one set(s) of plots.

4) Engineer will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints.

2) Submit record digital data files and three set(s) of record digital data file

plots.

3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information

were recorded.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files of Project's

Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files and directories

of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,

submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-

keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit

one paper copy or annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

E. Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record

documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions,

field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one complete set of the contract drawings, marked to show changes.

The contractor will maintain “Working” drawings throughout the progress of the work.

Drawings shall be a “living” record of all approved changes to the construction documents as

the work progresses. Additionally, drawings shall include both horizontal and vertical

references with three (3) tie dimensions to visible permanent physical features for all building

corner, structures, laterals valves and pipe appurtenances, and location of water mains and force

mains with respect to the centerline of adjacent roads with depth below grade.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,

whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide

information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.

d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.

b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.

c. Depths of foundations below first floor.

d. Locations and depths of encountered existing and constructed underground

utilities.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.

f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.

g. Actual equipment locations.

h. Duct size and routing.

i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.

j. Changes made by Change Order or Work Change Directive.

k. Changes made following Engineer's written orders.

l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.

m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use

personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record

prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish

between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted

from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order

numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. For pile lines, conduits and other buried components, alternatively to collection of reference

distances, maintain a digital file of x, y, and z coordinates of all constructed components along with identifying descriptors with each point. Incorporate digital point information into final record drawing digital data files.

C. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial

Completion, review marked-up record prints with Engineer. When authorized, prepare a full set

of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the

original Contract Drawings.

2. Format: DWG, Version , Microsoft Windows operating system.

3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.

4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.

5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Engineer for resolution.

6. Engineer will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for

use in recording information.

a. See Section 01 33 00 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of

Engineer's digital data files.

b. Engineer will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate

layers.

D. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings

where Engineer determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are

suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting

an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2. Consult Engineer for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record

the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly

prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for

formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

E. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD

DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into

manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on

cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled.

3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet

identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."

d. Name of Engineer.


2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to

provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in

operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file or paper copy or scanned

PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where

applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or paper copy or scanned

PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and

title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file

miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section

number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project

record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they

occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record

documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean,

dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record

documents for Engineer's reference during normal working hours.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1

SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel,


1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.

B. Costs for demonstration and training shall be considered incidental and shall be included in line

item bid amounts for each respective component where training is required.


A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training,

including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of

instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and

outline for each training module.

1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and

training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording

of live instructional module.

B. Qualification Data: For instructor.

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of

instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and

documentation of performance-based test.


1. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared

and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with

requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and

maintenance procedures and training.

B. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Section 01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures

related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.

2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.

3. Review required content of instruction.

4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions

and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to

minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction

time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data

has been reviewed and approved by Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules

for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification

Sections.

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a

description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each

module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or

component:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.

b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.

c. Operating standards.

d. Regulatory requirements.

e. Equipment function.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


f. Operating characteristics.

g. Limiting conditions.

h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals.

b. Operations manuals.

c. Maintenance manuals.

d. Project record documents.

e. Identification systems.

f. Warranties and bonds.

g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.

b. Instructions on stopping.

c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.

d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.

e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.

f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Startup procedures.

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.

c. Routine and normal operating instructions.

d. Regulation and control procedures.

e. Control sequences.

f. Safety procedures.

g. Instructions on stopping.

h. Normal shutdown instructions.

i. Operating procedures for emergencies.

j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.

k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.

l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments.

b. Checking adjustments.

c. Noise and vibration adjustments.

d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions.

b. Test and inspection procedures.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures.

b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.

c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.

d. Procedures for routine cleaning

e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.

f. Procedures for routine maintenance.

g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions.

b. Repair instructions.

c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions.

d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.

e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training

module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with

requirements in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain

systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Engineer will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational

requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy.

3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires

seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.

C. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully

operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation

and maintenance data submittals.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


D. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove

instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial

training use.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1

SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.


1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for restrictions on use of the premises, Owner-occupancy

requirements, and phasing requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated

to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage,

prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

C. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise

indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones

and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to

Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.

3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid

delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed

by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.

C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures

proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control

and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending

dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction,

including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition

operations. Comply with Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation." Submit before Work

begins.

F. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion

of selective demolition.


A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.

Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as

far as practical.

C. Notify Engineer of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding

with selective demolition.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the

Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.

2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Engineer and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate

contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so

as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. Notify warrantor on

completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has

been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition

operations.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and

hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing

conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building

demolition operations.

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction

photographs or video.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation."

2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide

photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by

salvage operations.

3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be

reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,

materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas

to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.

2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies.

3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC

systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap

or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same

or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and

make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible

ductwork material and leave in place.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3.3 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent

injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and

to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of

existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage

and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are

exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as

required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and

finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of

construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of

governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and

chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden

space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices

during flame-cutting operations.

4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least one hour after flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site.

7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials

necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling

during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,

protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their

original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain

and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,

using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.

C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and

remove.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved

construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition

operations began.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 53 - 1

SECTION 03 30 53 - MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture

design, placement procedures, and finishes.


1. Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.

2. Section 32 13 13 "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of fly ash,

slag cement, and other pozzolans.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR: For products having recycled content, documentation

indication percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.

Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.


A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-

mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94 requirements for production

facilities and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. Comply with the following sections of ACI 301 unless modified by requirements in the

Contract Documents:


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. "General Requirements."

2. "Formwork and Formwork Accessories."

3. "Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports."

4. "Concrete Mixtures."

5. "Handling, Placing, and Constructing."

B. Comply with ACI 117.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064, as drawn.

D. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel

wire into flat sheets.

E. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064, flat sheet.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from

single source from single manufacturer throughout the project.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: C 150M, Type II.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and

that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened

concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017, Type II.

F. Water: ASTM C 94.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Vapor Retarder: Plastic sheet, ASTM E 1745, Class A or B.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or

self-expanding cork.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application

to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth or cotton mats.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Comply with ACI 301.

B. Normal-Weight Concrete:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.

2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50.

3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of

trowel-finished floor slabs to exceed 3 percent.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION

A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position

with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturers recommended adhesive or joint tape.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting

reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations

indicated or as approved by Engineer.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-

fourth of concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing

each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after

applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting

action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops

random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab

junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and

other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished

concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Comply with ACI 301 for placing concrete.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.

C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes

and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in

an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and

defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following rubbed finish, defined in ACI 301, to smooth-formed-

finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-rubbed finish.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent

formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent

unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for

concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or

darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleed

water appears on surface.

1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.

C. Float Finish: Apply float finish to surfaces indicated, to surfaces to receive trowel finish, and to

floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, fluid-applied or

direct-to-deck-applied membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo.

D. Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces

exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a

cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling,

to surfaces indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either

thickset or thinset methods. Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still

plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

F. Slip-Resistive Broom Finish: Apply a slip-resistive finish to surfaces indicated and to exterior

concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen

trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hot-

weather protection during curing.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy

conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing

operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and

bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete

surface.

D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a

combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the

following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at

least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven

days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material

and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall

within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair

damage during curing period.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301.

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction

thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES 09 96 36 - 1

SECTION 09 96 36 - CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER

FACILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Field application of chemical-resistant coatings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Refer to ASTM D16 for definitions of terms used in this Section.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and

Applications.

2. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood

and Wood-Base Materials.

3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

B. Master Painters Institute:

1. MPI - Approved Products List.

C. NSF International:

1. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.

D. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings:

1. SSPC-PA 2 - Procedure for Determining Conformance to Dry Coating Thickness

Requirements.

2. SSPC-SP 6/NACE 3 - Commercial Blast Cleaning.

3. SSPC-SP 10/NACE 2 - Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning.

4. SSPC-SP 11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal.

E. NAPF: National Association of Pipe Fabricators

1. NAPF 500-03

a. 500-03-04 - Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Ductile Iron Pipe

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


b. 500-03-05 - Abrasive Blast Cleaning for Cast Ductile Iron Fittings


A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for preinstallation meeting.

B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.

1.5 SEQUENCING

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Requirements for sequencing.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer data on coatings.

2. Include MPI - Approved Products Lists with proposed products highlighted.

C. Samples:

1. Submit two paper chip samples, illustrating range of colors and textures available for each

surface finishing product as scheduled.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer Instructions: Submit special surface preparation procedures, substrate conditions

requiring special attention, and.

F. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.

G. Qualifications Statements:

1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer and applicator.

2. Submit manufacturer's approval of applicator.


A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit information on cleaning, touchup, and repair of coated

surfaces.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



A. Extra Stock Materials:

1. Furnish 1 gal. of each color, type, and surface texture as provided for Project.

2. Label each container with manufacturer's label, color, type, texture, room number and Site

location.

3. Store where directed by Owner.


A. Materials in Contact with Potable Water: Certified to NSF 61.

B. Surface Burning Characteristics:

1. Fire-Retardant Finishes: Maximum 25/450 flame-spread/smoke-developed index when

tested according to ASTM E84.

C. Perform Work according to Wakulla standards.

D. Maintain 1 copy of each standard affecting Work of this Section on Site.

1.10 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with

minimum three years' documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum three years'

documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Container Labeling: Include manufacturer's name, type of coating, brand name, lot number, brand

code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and

instructions for mixing and reducing.

B. Inspection:

1. Accept materials on Site in manufacturer's sealed and labeled containers.

2. Inspect for damage and to verify acceptability.

C. Store materials in ventilated area and otherwise according to manufacturer instructions.

D. Protection:

1. Protect materials from moisture and dust by storing in clean, dry location remote from

construction operations areas.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2. Provide additional protection according to manufacturer instructions.

1.12 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

A. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Requirements for ambient condition

control facilities for product storage and installation.

B. Storage Conditions:

1. Minimum Ambient Temperature: 45 degrees F.

2. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 90 degrees F

C. Application Conditions:

1. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature

ranges required by coating manufacturer.

2. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, when relative humidity is outside

humidity ranges, or when moisture content of surfaces exceeds those required by coating

manufacturer.

3. Lighting Level: 80fcmeasured mid-height at substrate surface.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Requirements for warranties.

B. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for coatings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 APPLICATORS

A. Applicators shall be approved by coating manufacturer.

2.2 COATINGS

A. Materials:

1. Coatings:

a. Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings.

b. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Accessories:

a. Grade: Industrial

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


b. Thinners.

c. Other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve specified finishes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive Work as recommended by

product manufacturer.

B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of Work, and report

conditions capable of affecting proper application to Engineer.

C. Test or verify with manufacturer that shop-applied primer is compatible with subsequent cover

materials.

D. Moisture Content:

1. Measure moisture content of surfaces using electronic moisture meter.

2. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below maximum recommended

by product manufacturer.

3.2 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT SCHEDULED TO BE COATED

A. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be coated from damage during surface

preparation and application of coatings.

B. Immediately remove coatings that fall on surrounding areas and surfaces not scheduled to be

coated.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Prepare coatings as follows:

1. To soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to homogeneous

coating.

2. For smooth flow and brushing properties.

B. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

C. Defects:

1. Correct defects and clean surfaces capable of affecting Work of this Section.

2. Remove or repair existing coatings exhibiting surface defects.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


D. Cleaning

1. Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for

each particular substrate condition and as specified.

E. Impervious Surfaces:

1. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach.

2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

F. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Coating:

1. Remove surface contamination by steam or high-pressure water.

2. Remove oxidation and provide a uniform profile of 1.0 mil by abrasive blasting or power

tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP 11.

G. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.

H. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for Coating:

1. Remove contamination by steam, high-pressure water, or solvent washing.

2. Remove oxidation and provide a uniform profile of 1.0 mil by abrasive blasting or power

tool cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP 11.

I. Copper Surfaces Scheduled for Natural Oxidized Finish:

1. Remove contamination by applying oxidizing solution of copper acetate and ammonium

chloride in acetic acid.

2. Rub on repeatedly for required effect, and, once attained, rinse surfaces with clear water and

allow to dry.

J. Galvanized Surfaces:

1. Remove surface contamination and oils, and wash with solvent.

2. Treat interior non-immersed surfaces using Great Lakes Laboratories Clean’N Etch in strict

accordance with manufacturer’s literature. Exterior galvanized or galvanized in immersion

service shall be abrasive blasted to remove all passivators nd to provide a uniform surface

profile of at least 1.0 mil.

K. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces:

1. Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust.

2. Abrasive blast as follows:

a. Non-Immersion: SSPC-SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning

b. Immersion: SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning.

3. Clean by washing with solvent.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


4. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring that weld joints, bolts, and nuts are

similarly cleaned.

5. Spot-prime coat after repairs.

L. Ductile or Cast Iron

1. Surfaces shall be abrasive swept blasted to removal oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose annealing

oxides, loose rust and loose mold coatings.

2. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.

M. Ferrous Metal Structures and Miscellaneous Fabrications

1. General: Remove hardware, plates, and similar items already installed that are not to be

painted. Remove these items to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following

completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers

skilled in the trades involved.

1. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of sub-

stances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to

cleaning. Where indicated for blast cleaning, conform to the specified reference standard of

SSPC.

N. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces:

1. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust.

2. Feather edges to make touchup patches inconspicuous.

3. Clean bare metal surfaces as follows:

a. Immersion Service: SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning.

b. Non-Immersion Service: SSPC-SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning or SSPC-SP 11

Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal”.

4. Prime bare steel surfaces prior to the formation of rust and within eight hours of surface

preparation.

O. Existing Work:

1. Extend existing paint and coatings installations using materials and methods compatible with

existing installations and as specified.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.

B. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions

C. Keep containers closed when not in use to avoid contamination

D. Do not use mixed coatings beyond pot life limits.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


E. Ensure coatings are applied within recoat windows as specified by manufacturer.

F. Use application equipment, tools, pressure settings, and techniques in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions

G. Uniformly apply coatings at spreading rate required to achieve specified DFT. DFT shall be as

scheduled, but not less than per manufacturer recommendations.

H. Apply each coat slightly darker than preceding coat, unless specified otherwise.

I. Apply coatings to be free of film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect

performance or appearance of coating systems

J. Stripe paint with brush critical locations on steel such as welds, corners, and edges using

specified primer or intermediate coat.

K. Cleaning:

1. Vacuum surfaces to remove loose particles.

2. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.

3. At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint

materials from the site

L. Finishing Mechanical and Electrical Equipment:

1. Schedule of Color-Coding shall be in accordance with Wakulla standard details.

2. Coat shop-primed equipment.

3. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical

components, and coat separately.

4. Coat insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers,

brackets, collars and supports, and except where these items are shop finished.

5. Color-Coding:

a. Color-code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work according to indicated

requirements.

b. Color band and identify with flow arrows, names, and numbering.

6. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, escutcheons, and fittings that were removed prior

to finishing.

M. Monitor and ensure strict observance of manufacturer’s stated allowable recoat window. Prepare

surfaces which have exceeded the allowable exposure time in strict accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions.

N. Installation Standards: Install Work according to Wakulla standards.


A. Services:

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Verify coatings and other materials are as specified.

2. Verify surface preparation and application are as specified.

3. Verify DFT of each coat and total DFT of each coating system are as specified using wet

film and dry film gauges.

4. Coating Defects: Check coatings for film characteristics or defects that would adversely

affect performance or appearance of coating systems.

a. Check for holidays on interior steel immersion surfaces using holiday detector.

B. Report:

1. Submit written reports describing inspections made and actions taken to correct

nonconforming work.

2. Report nonconforming work not corrected.

3. Submit copies of report to Engineer.

C. Inspecting:

1. Surface Preparation: Comply with specified reference standards of SSPC.

D. Testing:

1. Holiday Testing: Submerged surfaces including surfaces within vapor area.

2. Dry Film Thickness: Measure according to SSPC-PA 2.

E. Equipment Acceptance:

1. Repair or recoat areas containing holidays or substandard thicknesses according to coating

manufacturer instructions.

2. Retest repaired or recoated areas.

3. Materials and Surfaces Not Scheduled To Be Coated: Repair or replace damaged materials

and surfaces not scheduled to be coated.

4. Damaged Coatings: Touch-up or repair damaged coatings. Touch-up of minor damage shall

be acceptable where result is not visibly different from adjacent surfaces. Recoat entire

surface where touch-up result is visibly different, either in sheen, texture, color or DFT.

5. Coating Defects: Repair in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions coatings that exhibit

film characteristics or defects that would adversely affect performance or appearance of

coating systems.

3.6 PROTECTION OF COATING SYSTEMS

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct

damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Engineer.

B. Provide “Wet Paint” signs to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective

wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 CHEMICAL-RESISTANT COATINGS FOR METALS IN WASTEWATER FACILITIES09 96 36 - 10

3.7 APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Application: Ferrous metal structures and miscellaneous fabrications.

1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 10.

a. Non-Immersed: SSPC-SP 6.

b. Immersed: SSPC-SP 10

2. Manufacturers:

a. Sherwin Williams Company.

b. Tnemec Company, Inc.

c. Furnish materials according to Wakulla standards.

B. Interior & Exterior Exposed (not immersed):

1. Primer:

a. Sherwin Williams Galva Pack applied at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT

b. Tnemec Series 91-H2O Hydro-Zinc applied at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT

2. Intermediate Coat:

a. Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 5500 applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT

b. Tnemec Series 49 Multi-Purpose Epoxy applied at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT

3. Finish Coat:

a. Sherwin Williams Acrolon Ultra applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT

b. Exterior: Tnemec Series 73U Endura-Shield applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT, Interior:

Tnemec Series 73 Endura-Shield applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT

4. Finish Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer’s standard colors.

C. Immersed – Wastewater:

1. Primer:


b. Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane applied at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT

2. Stripe Coat:


b. Tnemec Series 142 Epoxoline applied at 8.0 to 10.0 mils DFT

3. Finish Coat:

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



b. Tnemec Series 142 Epoxoline applied at 8.0 to 10.0 mils DFT

D. Application: Ductile or cast iron pipe, pumps, motors, and valves.

1. Surface Preparation:

a. Ductile Pipe: NAPF 500-03-04

b. Cast Ductile Fittings: NAPF 500-03-05

2. Manufacturers:



c. Furnish materials according to WAKULLA standards.

E. Interior and/or Exterior Exposed:

1. Primer:


b. Tnemec Series N140-1211 Pota-Pox Plus at 4.0 to 8.0 mils DFT




3. Finish Coat:

a. Sherwin Williams Acrolon Ultra applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT

b. Exterior: Tnemec Series 73U Endura-Shield applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT, Interior:



F. Steel pipe and equipment:

1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 6.

2. Manufacturers:



c. Furnish materials according to Wakulla standards.

G. Interior and/or Exterior Exposed:

1. Primer:

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



b. Tnemec Series 91-H2O Hydro-Zinc applied at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT




3. Finish Coat:


b. b. Exterior: Tnemec Series 73U Endura-Shield applied at 2.0 to 5.0 mils DFT, Interior:




James J. Tatone, P.E.

BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500-1

SECTION 26 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Related Sections

1. Division 01 – General Requirements

2. Division 26 – Electrical

3. Section 40 90 00 – Systems Integration

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Scope

1. This section includes the furnishing, installation, testing, adjusting and placing in

operation all electrical equipment, devices, facilities, materials, and auxiliary

items necessary for the complete and successful operation of all electrical

equipment as described herein, shown on the Drawings, or deemed necessary for

the satisfactory completion of the electrical Work. A comprehensive electrical

scope of work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Power/Electrical System

b. Grounding System

c. Control System

d. Connection of electrically powered mechanical equipment

e. All incidentals necessary for a complete and fully operational electrical

system

B. Coordination

1. Review installation procedures and schedules under other Specification sections

and coordinate with other trades the installation of electrical items that must be

installed with or within formwork, walls, partitions, ceilings, and panels.

2. The electrical design provides a number of branch circuits, ampacity and

overcurrent protection for other divisions design basis equipment conforming to

manufacturer's specifications available at time of design. The Contractor shall

verify all equipment loads prior to rough-in. If requirements of equipment

actually provided under contract for construction are different, Contractor shall

make all changes necessary without increase in the contract amount. Such

changes shall be based upon requirements, nameplate values and code

requirements, whichever is more stringent, and may include, but are not limited

to: size of conductors, size of conduit, number of conductors and conduits, type


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


and size of circuit breaker or disconnect, overloads, starters, variable frequency

drives, fuse protection and additional disconnect switches.

3. The electrical Contractor is required to coordinate with all process equipment

manufacturers, to provide and install for electrical and controls, all (but not

limited to) the following: circuit breakers, disconnects, starters, variable

frequency drives, control panels, equipment, devices, conduits, conductors, etc.

As required to provide a fully operational and code compliant electrical system.

This may include the addition of electrical items not shown on the electrical plans,

but required for system operation.

C. Interpretation of Drawings

1. Dimensions on Drawings related to equipment are based on equipment of certain

manufacturers. Conform the dimensions of equipment furnished to space

allocated to the equipment.

2. Drawings show the principal elements of the electrical work and are not intended

as detailed working drawings for the electrical Work. Drawings supplement and

complement the Specifications relative to principal features of electrical systems.

3. Equipment and devices furnished and installed under this Contract shall be

properly connected and interconnected with other equipment and devices for

successful operation of complete systems, whether or not all connections and

interconnections are specifically mentioned or shown in the Contract Documents.

4. Similar products shall be from the same manufacturer for uniformity.

5. Drawings are provided for Contractor’s guidance in fulfilling the operational

intent of the Contract Documents.

6. The Contractor is required to read all other equipment specifications contained in

these Contract Documents and provide required power and control conductors for

proper function as described.

D. Working Clearances

1. Working clearances around equipment requiring electrical services shall be

verified by Contractor to comply with Code requirements. Should there be

apparent violations of clearances; the Contractor shall notify the Engineer before

proceeding with connection or placing of equipment.

2. In the case of panelboards, safety switches and other equipment requiring wire

and cable terminations, the Contractor shall ascertain that lug sizes and wiring

gutters or space allowed for proper accommodation and termination of the wires

and cables are adequate.

3. Working space for all electrical and control equipment operating at 600v volts or

less to ground and likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or

maintenance while energized shall comply with NEC Article 110.26.

E. Workmanship

1. Workmanship under this Division shall be accomplished by persons skilled in the

performance of the required task. All work shall be done in keeping with

conventions of the trade. Work of this Division shall be closely coordinated with

work of other trades to avoid conflict and interference.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


F. Work Included in This Contract but Specified Elsewhere:

1. Excavation and backfilling for buried electrical Work shall conform to Division

31, Earthwork.

2. Concrete for pads, manholes, ductbanks, and conduit encasement shall conform to

Division 3, Concrete.

3. Shop painting and surface preparation shall conform to Division 09, Finishes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)


A. Refer to Section 01 33 00, Submittal Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Submit Shop Drawings for each Specification section as a single submittal.

C. Review of equipment submittals does not relieve Contractor of their contractual

responsibility to provide complete and successfully operating systems.

D. Shop Drawings shall include the following information to the extent applicable to the

particular item:

1. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number.

2. Electrical ratings.

3. Conformance to applicable standards or specifications of ANSI, ASTM, ICEA,

IEEE, ISA, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, OSHA, UL, or other organizations.

4. Dimensioned plan, section, elevations, and panel layouts showing means for

mounting, conduit connection, and grounding.

5. Materials and finish specifications, including paints.

6. List of components including manufacturer’s names and catalog numbers.

7. Internal wiring diagram and drawings indicating all connections to components

and numbered terminals for external connections.

E. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified.


A. Equipment tests

1. Submit operating test procedures and results for equipment.


A. Refer to the following Sections for additional requirements.

1. Section 01 77 00, Closeout Procedures

2. Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data

3. Section 01 78 39, Project Record Documents


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


B. General

1. The Contractor shall provide detailed as-built drawings for the project indicating

all power wiring.

2. Drawings shall be delivered to the Owner in AutoCAD 2019 Format.

3. The as-built drawings shall include detailed drawings of all duct banks,

underground conduit, above ground conduit, motor control centers, PLC control

panels, and control drawings. These drawings shall indicate exact location of all

underground electrical wiring and fiber optic cable.

C. Record Drawings

1. System Record Drawings: Include the following:

a. Single-line wiring diagram of the distribution system.

b. Actual, in-place conduit and cable layouts with schedule of conduit sizes

and number, and size of conductors.

c. Layouts of the power and lighting arrangements and the grounding system.

d. Control schematic diagrams, with terminal numbers and all control devices

identified, for all equipment.

2. Point-to-Point interconnection wiring diagram drawings: Include the following:

a. External wiring for each piece of equipment, panel, instrument, and other

devices and wiring to control stations, lighting panels, and motor

controllers.

b. Numbered terminal block identification for each wire termination.

c. Identification of the assigned wire numbers for all interconnections.

d. Identification of wiring by the conduit tag in which the wire is installed.

e. Terminal, junction, and pull boxes through which wiring is routed.

f. Identification of all equipment and the Shop Drawing transmittal number

for equipment from which the wiring requirements and termination

information was obtained.

3. The record documents shall reflect final equipment and field installation

information.


A. Electrical installation shall be in accordance with the latest edition (unless noted

otherwise) of the following codes and standards:

1. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).

2. National Electrical Safety Code (NFPA 70E).

3. Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities

(NFPA 820).

B. References

1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code

2. IEEE C2 – National Electrical Safety Code

3. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturer's Association

4. UL – Underwriters Laboratories

5. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


6. IEEE – The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

7. IESNA – The Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

8. NETA – International Electrical Testing Association

C. Permits

1. Refer to the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions for

responsibilities relative to obtaining and paying for Contractor’s permits, licenses,

and inspection fees.

D. Testing Laboratory Labels

1. Electrical material and equipment shall be new and bear the label of Underwriters'

Laboratories, Inc. or other nationally recognized, independent testing laboratory,

where standards have been established and label service applies.

E. Area Classifications

1. Materials, equipment, and incidentals shall conform to the area classification(s) as

defined under NFPA 820.

2. Wet Locations: Conform to NEC and NEMA requirements for wet locations.

Enclosures in wet locations shall meet NEMA 4 requirements unless specified

otherwise.

3. Corrosive Locations: Conform to NEC and NEMA requirements for corrosive

locations. Enclosures in corrosive locations shall conform to NEMA 4X

requirements unless specified otherwise.

4. Hazardous Locations: Conform to NEC requirements for the Class and Division

designated.

5. Dusty Locations: Indoor areas not designated as hazardous, corrosive, or wet are

dusty locations. Conform to NEC and NEMA 12 requirements unless specified

otherwise.

F. Guarantee

1. The Contractor shall guarantee all other electrical systems, materials and

workmanship to be free from defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of

final acceptance. Contractor shall correct all defects arising within this period

upon notification by the Owner, without additional compensation.

2. The rights and/or benefits given to the Owner by the guarantees found in these

technical specifications are in addition to and not in contradiction to any rights

and/or benefits found in the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions of

the Contract.

G. Regulatory Requirements

1. Conform to applicable sections of the Building Code and all local rules,

regulations and ordinances.

2. Electrical: Conform to NFPA 70 & National Electric Safety Code.

H. Staffing

1. The Contractor shall provide a “Master Electrician” who has been deemed a

“Master Electrician” by exam through the State of Florida, or any other Florida


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


County Permitting Authority as the Electrical Superintendent for the project. The

Electrical Superintendent shall be on the project site any time any electrical work

is performed by the Contractor.

I. Field Quality Control

1. Conduct field quality control Work for the electrical installation. Field quality

control shall be per the requirements specified in Article 3.5 of this Section.

2. Obtain from Owner record drawings required to execute the Work.


A. Protection Of Electrical Equipment

1. Refer to Section 01 73 00, Execution, for additional protection requirements.

2. Electrical equipment shall be protected by the weather, especially from water

dripping or splashing upon it, at all times during shipment, storage and after

installation.

3. Should any apparatus be subjected to possible damage by water, it shall be

thoroughly dried and put through a dielectric test, at the expense of the

Contractor, to ascertain the suitability of this apparatus. The results of the test

shall be submitted to the Engineer and if the apparatus is found to be unsuitable,

the Contractor shall replace it without additional cost to the Owner.

B. Product Delivery, Storage, And Handling

1. Refer to Section 01 60 00, Product Requirements, for additional product delivery,

storage, and handling requirements.

2. Delivery of Products: Advise Subcontractors and Suppliers of the maximum

shipping sizes of equipment that can be accommodated at the Site.

C. Existing Site Conditions

1. Examine the Site and existing facilities to compare them with the Contract

Documents relative to the conditions of the premises, location of and connection

to existing facilities, and obstructions that may affect the Work.

2. Perform the Work with due regard to safety and in a manner that will not interfere

with the existing equipment or cause interruption of the functions of the Site,

unless specified otherwise.

3. Work shall be performed with a minimum amount of disruption to the operation

of the existing facilities and Site and with prior approval of Owner. Submit for

review by Owner and Engineer a detailed written procedure for Work affecting

operation of existing facilities and Site, a detailed procedure for modifying

existing electrical equipment, and anticipated time required to complete the Work

and the required shutdown time, if any.

4. Where the Work ties in with existing installations, Contractor shall take

precautions and safeguards in connecting the Work to existing operating circuits

to prevent interruption to existing circuits. Connection of Work to existing


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


circuits shall be performed in the presence of Owner and Engineer. Advance

written notice is required before equipment is removed from service.

D. Staging

1. Where the Work requires certain equipment to be taken out of service, Contractor

shall perform the Work with due regard to maintenance of operations and

construction staging per Section 01 35 16, Alteration Project Procedures.

2. The level of service and control existing at the start of the Contract shall be

maintained at all times, except as required during actual change-over to new

equipment. Interruptions of existing circuits shall be coordinated with the Owner

who will determine the length of time a circuit may be de-energized to maintain

the Owner’s processes in dependable and safe operation.

1.9 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Unless specified otherwise, electrical equipment shall have ratings based on 75ºC

terminations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

A. Field mounted control panels shall be oriented in a north/south configuration such that

the front mounted displays are not subjected to direct sun light.

B. Provide 3" concrete house-keeping pad under all floor/grade mounted electrical and

control equipment. Vertical sides and 3" around horizontal perimeter of pad shall be

painted safety yellow.

C. Electrical enclosures shall be rated as follows for the installation area, unless noted

otherwise:

1. Interior – NEMA 1

2. Exterior – NEMA 4X stainless steel

3.2 INSPECTION

A. Examine the conditions under which Work is to be performed and notify Engineer in

writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do

not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


3.3 FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING

A. After the electrical Work is complete, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer the

following information with his request for final inspection.

1. One set of contract drawings marked to show all significant changes in equipment

ratings and locations, alterations in locations of conduit runs, or of any data

differing from the contract drawings. This shall include revised or changed

panelboard and switchgear schedules.

2. Certificates of final inspection from local authority.

3. A tabulation of all motors listing their respective manufacturer, horsepower,

nameplate voltage and current, actual running current after installation and

overload heater rating.

B. The electrical Work shall be thoroughly tested to demonstrate that the entire system is

in proper working order and in accordance with the plans and specifications. Each

motor with its control shall be run as nearly as possible under operating conditions for a

sufficient length of time to demonstrate correct alignment, wiring capacity, speed and

satisfactory operation. All main switches and circuit breakers shall be operated, but not

necessarily at full load. Contractor may be required during final inspection, at the

request of the Engineer to furnish test instruments for use during the testing.

C. Conductor Testing

1. Refer to Section 26 05 19, Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables,

for testing requirements.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Demonstrate to Owner and Engineer when the Work is Substantially Complete that all

electrical systems and electrically operated equipment operate per the Contract

Documents and as required.

B. Perform the following operational tests:

1. Operate power circuits to verify proper operation and connection to equipment.

2. Operate control circuits including pushbuttons, indicating lights, and similar

devices to verify proper connection and function. Operate all devices, such as

pressure and flow switches and similar devices, to verify that shut-downs and

control sequences operate as required.

3. Test receptacle devices to verify proper operation and connections.

C. Provide a report on the equipment demonstration and operating tests. The report shall

include complete information on the tests performed and results.


A. Provide services to interface with existing circuits. Field-determine system and

equipment requirements prior to modifying existing systems.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


B. Field services required shall include the following:

1. Coordinate the interface of equipment with Owner’s personnel and field

conditions.

2. Field compare existing starter and panel control circuit terminations from record

documents with the existing circuits.

3. Field-trace existing circuits as required to interface the equipment provided.

4. Field-identify terminations for starters and panel controls for follow function for

re-connection.

C. Provide tools and equipment required to trace circuits necessary for proper execution of

the Work.

D. Define and identify all wiring, circuit terminations, and equipment to be modified to

ensure the proper interface of all components. The Contract Price includes all costs

associated with field services specified for a complete and functional system.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19-1

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. VFD: Variable frequency drive




A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


1. Alpha Wire Company.

2. Belden Inc.

3. Cooper Industries, Inc.

4. Encore Wire Corporation.

5. General Cable; General Cable Corporation.

6. Senator Wire & Cable Company.

7. Southwire Company.

B. Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN/THWN-2

and Type XHHW-2.

D. VFC Cable:

1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable.

2. Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus

85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire or dual spirally

wrapped copper tape shields and three bare symmetrically applied ground wires, and

sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.

3. Comply with UL requirements for cables in Classes I and II, Division 2 hazardous

location applications.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


following:

1. 3M.

2. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.

3. Gardner Bender.

4. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

5. Ideal Industries, Inc.

6. NSi Industries LLC.

7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,

and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 10 AWG and

larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW-2,

single conductors in raceway.

E. Feeders in Cable Tray: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Type XHHW-2,

single conductors larger than No. 1/0 AWG.

F. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors

in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.

I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-

steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

J. VFD Output Circuits: Type TC-ER cable with braided shield.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to

Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and

cables.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will

not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and

follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that

possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced

conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for

Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of

conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test service entrance and feeder conductors and conductors feeding the following critical

equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

a. 20HP motor and larger feeders.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and

larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner.

Correct deficiencies determined during the scan.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for

device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices

checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

D. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.

3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

E. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES 26 05 23-1

SECTION 26 05 23 - CONTROL-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Multimode optical-fiber cabling.

2. UTP cabling.

3. RS-485 cabling.

4. Low-voltage control cabling.

5. Control-circuit conductors.

6. Identification products.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or

for remote-control and signaling power-limited circuits.

C. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air ducts are

connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for transporting air to or from

heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.

D. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.




A. Qualification Data: For qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Source quality-control reports.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


C. Field quality-control reports.



1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to

supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS





A. Flame Travel and Smoke Density in Plenums: As determined by testing identical products

according to NFPA 262 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products for installation in

plenums with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame Travel Distance: 60 inches or less.

2. Peak Optical Smoke Density: 0.5 or less.

3. Average Optical Smoke Density: 0.15 or less.

B. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Riser Cables in Non-Plenum Building Spaces: As

determined by testing identical products according to UL 1666.

C. Flame Travel and Smoke Density for Cables in Non-Riser Applications and Non-Plenum

Building Spaces: As determined by testing identical products according to UL 1685.

2.3 OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. 3M.

2. Belden Inc.

3. Berk-Tek Leviton; a Nexans/Leviton alliance.

4. Corning Cable Systems.

5. Emerson Connectivity Solutions.


7. Siemon.

B. Description: Multimode, 50/125 -micrometer, 24-fiber, tight-buffer, optical-fiber cable.

1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


2. Comply with TIA-568-C.3 for performance specifications.

3. Comply with TIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications.

4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFN, Type OFNG, Type OFNP, or

Type OFNR in metallic conduit.

b. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFN, Type OFNG, Type OFNP, or

Type OFNR in metallic conduit installed per NFPA 70, Article 300.22, "Wiring in

Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces."

c. General Purpose, Nonconductive: Type OFN, Type OFNG, Type OFNP, or

Type OFNR in metallic conduit.

5. Conductive cable shall be steel-armored type.

6. Maximum Attenuation: 3.5 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm.

7. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.

C. Jacket:

1. Jacket Color: Aqua for 50/125-micrometer cable.

2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA-598-C.

3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to

exceed 40 inches.

2.4 OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE HARDWARE


following:

1. ADC.

2. Belden CDT Networking Division/NORDX.

3. Belden Inc.

4. Berk-Tek Leviton; a Nexans/Leviton alliance.


6. Hubbell Premise Wiring.

7. Optical Connectivity Solutions Division.

8. Panduit Corp.

B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable

connectors.

1. Number of Connectors per Field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field,

plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

C. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 36-inch lengths.

D. Cable Connecting Hardware:

1. Comply with Optical-Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications

of TIA-604-2-B, TIA-604-3-B, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA-568-C.3.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC, Type ST. or Type LC connectors.

Insertion loss of not more than 0.75 dB.

3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.

2.5 UTP CABLE


1. 3M.


3. Nexans.

4. Superior Essex Inc.

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties of Category 5e cables.

2. Comply with ICEA S-102-700 for mechanical properties of Category 6 cables.

3. Comply with TIA-568-C.1 for performance specifications.

4. Comply with TIA-568-C.2, Category 5e.

a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP complying with UL 1685 or

Type CMP in listed plenum communications raceway.

b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CM, Type CMG, Type CMP, Type CMR,

or Type CMX in metallic conduit installed per NFPA 70, Article 300.22, "Wiring

in Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces."

c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMP or Type CMR in metallic conduit

installed per NFPA 70, Article 300.22, "Wiring in Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-

Handling Spaces."

d. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM, Type CMG, Type CMP,

Type CMR, or Type CMX in metallic conduit installed per NFPA 70,

Article 300.22, "Wiring in Ducts, Plenums, and Other Air-Handling Spaces."

2.6 UTP CABLE HARDWARE



2. Belden Inc.


4. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

5. Hubbell Premise Wiring.

6. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

7. Panduit Corp.

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.2, IDC

type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with

connecting hardware of same category or higher.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 5e. Provide blocks for the number of cables

terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs

and jacks where indicated.

D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and

permit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at

each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables,

plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position

modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-C.1.

G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 36-inch lengths; terminated with eight-position

modular plug at each end.

1. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

H. Workstation Outlets: Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate.

I. Faceplates:

1. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, complying with requirements in Section 26 27 26

"Wiring Devices."

2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical-fiber, and

coaxial work area cords.

a. Flush-mounted jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.

J. Legend:

1. Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.

2. Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

2.7 RS-485 CABLE

A. Standard Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.

1. Paired, two pairs, twisted, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.

B. Plenum-Rated Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


1. Paired, two pairs, No. 22 AWG, stranded (7x30) tinned-copper conductors.

2. Fluorinated ethylene propylene insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. Fluorinated ethylene propylene jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: NFPA 262.

2.8 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL CABLE

A. Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMG.

1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with UL 1685.

B. Plenum-Rated, Paired Cable: NFPA 70, Type CMP.

1. One pair, twisted, No. 16 AWG, stranded (19x29) tinned-copper conductors.

2. PVC insulation.

3. Unshielded.

4. PVC jacket.

5. Flame Resistance: Comply with NFPA 262.

2.9 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS


following:


2. Encore

3. Service Wire Co.

B. Class 1 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway.

C. Class 2 Control Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2, in raceway.

D. Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits: Stranded copper, Type THHN-2-THWN-2.

E. Class 2 Control Circuits and Class 3 Remote-Control and Signal Circuits That Supply Critical

Circuits: Circuit Integrity (CI) cable.

1. Smoke control signaling and control circuits.

2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA-568-C.2.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


C. Factory test optical-fiber cables according to TIA-568-C.3.

D. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Test cables on receipt at Project site.

1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS AND BOXES

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems"

for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits, and wireways as

supplemented or modified in this Section.

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

2. Outlet boxes for optical-fiber cables shall be no smaller than 4 inches square by 2-1/8

inches deep with extension ring sized to bring edge of ring to within 1/8 inch of the

finished wall surface.

3. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.

B. Comply with TIA-569-B for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends

between pull points.

C. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.

D. Raceway Installation in Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard if a single piece of plywood is

installed, or in the corner of the room if multiple sheets of plywood are installed around

perimeter walls of the room.

2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions.

3. Secure conduits to backboard if entering the room from overhead.

4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor.

5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to

grounding system.

E. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly and

form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NFPA 70.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch. 6,

"Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems."

3. Terminate all conductors and optical fibers; no cable shall contain unterminated elements.

Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and patch

panels.

4. Cables may not be spliced.

5. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6

inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

6. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's

limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5,

"Copper Structured Cabling Systems" and Ch. 6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling

Systems." Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

7. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable

between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged

during installation and replace it with new cable.

8. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Do not use

heat lamps for heating.

9. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling

Systems" and Ch. 6, "Optical Fiber Structured Cabling Systems." Monitor cable pull

tensions.

10. Support: Do not allow cables to lay on removable ceiling tiles.

11. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and installed so as

to not damage cables.

C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2.

2. Install termination hardware as specified in Section 27 15 00 "Communications

Horizontal Cabling" unless otherwise indicated.

3. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch at the point of termination to maintain

cable geometry.

D. Installation of Control-Circuit Conductors:

1. Install wiring in raceways. Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 05 33

"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

E. Optical-Fiber Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA-568-C.3.

2. Terminate cable on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

F. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces

with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

2. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings

by cable supports not more than 30 inches apart.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


3. Cable shall not be run through or on structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or

other potentially damaging items. Do not run cables between structural members and

corrugated panels.

G. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B recommendations for separating unshielded

copper voice and data communications cable from potential EMI sources including

electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and

unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches.

b. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12

inches.

c. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24

inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and

unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2

inches.


inches.


inches.

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power

lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall

be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment or Circuit Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement.


inches.


inches.

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5

kVA or 5 HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches.

6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5

inches.

3.4 REMOVAL OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Remove abandoned conductors and cables. Abandoned conductors and cables are those

installed that are not terminated at equipment and are not identified for future use with a tag.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


3.5 CONTROL-CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS

A. Minimum Conductor Sizes:

1. Class 1 remote-control and signal circuits; No 14 AWG.

2. Class 2 low-energy, remote-control, and signal circuits; No. 16 AWG.

3. Class 3 low-energy, remote-control, alarm, and signal circuits; No 12 AWG.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.

3.7 GROUNDING

A. For data communication wiring, comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A and with BICSI TDMM,

"Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)" Chapter.

B. For low-voltage control wiring and cabling, comply with requirements in Section 26 05 26

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for

Electrical Systems."

B. Identify data and communications system components, wiring, and cabling according to TIA-

606-A; label printers shall use label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks complying with

UL 969.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical-fiber cable jacket materials for UL or third-party

certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations to confirm color-coding for pin

assignments, and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA-568-C.1.

2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment

and patch cords, and labeling of all components.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


3. Test UTP cabling for direct-current loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and

polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test

cables after termination but not after cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.2.

Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test

Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified

in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters

that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test

configuration.

4. Optical-Fiber Cable Tests:

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA-568-C.0.

Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer

for channel or link test configuration.

b. Link End-to-End Attenuation Tests:

1) Multimode Link Measurements: Test at 850 or 1300 nm in one direction

according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A, Method B, One Reference Jumper.

2) Attenuation test results for links shall be less than 2.0 dB that calculated

according to equation in TIA-568-C.0.

C. Document data for each measurement. Print data for submittals in a summary report that is

formatted using Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM as a guide, or transfer the data from the instrument

to the computer, save as text files, print, and submit.

D. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26-1

SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

B. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special

applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding.

2. Foundation steel electrodes.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in

"Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Test wells.

2. Ground rods.

3. Ground rings.

4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency’s field supervisor.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and


1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"

include the following:


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells

ground rings grounding connections for separately derived systems based on

NETA MTS.

1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain

within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective

action if values do not.

2) Include recommended testing intervals.




B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.

2. ERICO International Corporation.

3. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.

4. Harger Lightning & Grounding.


6. Robbins Lightning, Inc.




B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise

required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 412 inches in cross

section, with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall

comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested

at 5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items

connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire

terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, sectional type; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare tinned-copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG

minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.

2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as

part of duct-bank installation.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


C. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and

elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches

above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top

of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.

D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.

1. Grounding Conductor: Bare, tinned copper, not less than No. 8 AWG.

2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper.

3. Barbed Wire: Strands shall be bonded to the grounding conductor.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless

otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if

any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length

(10 feet minimum) from each other and located at least the same distance from other

grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

C. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are

specified in Section 26 05 43 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and

shall be at least 12 inches deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated.

Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush

with finished grade or floor.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;

use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or

sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells

and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are

connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural

drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of

reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod

assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order,

and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena

that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.

3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.

4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 1 ohm(s).

5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.

6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29-1

SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.




1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for the following:

a. Hangers.

b. Steel slotted support systems.

c. Nonmetallic support systems.

d. Trapeze hangers.

e. Clamps.

f. Turnbuckles.

g. Sockets.

h. Eye nuts.

i. Saddles.

j. Brackets.

2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support

systems.

1. Trapeze hangers. Include product data for components.

2. Steel slotted-channel systems.

3. Nonmetallic slotted-channel systems.

4. Equipment supports.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


5. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,

rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For hangers and supports for electrical systems.

1. Include design calculations and details of trapeze hangers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Aluminum Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for

field assembly.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Cooper Industries, Inc.

b. Flex-Strut Inc.

c. Haydon Corporation.

d. MKT Metal Manufacturing, Inc.

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group.

2. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.

4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4.

5. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.

6. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated

fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

C. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in

riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as

required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable

iron.

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes,

and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their

supports to building surfaces include the following:


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Hilti, Inc.

2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3) MKT Fastening, LLC.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) B-line, an Eaton business.

2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.

3) Hilti, Inc.

4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS

Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: Stainless-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes

and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical

equipment and systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways

and Boxes for Electrical Systems."


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for

EMTs, IMCs, and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in

diameter.

D. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or

other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without

exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb.

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods

unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers

and nuts.

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means

that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for

reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for site-

fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both

directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from

edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and

placement requirements are specified in Division 3.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows:

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with

SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33-1

SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.

5. Surface raceways.

6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.


1. Section 26 05 43 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior

DEFINITIONS

C. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

D. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metallic conduit

G. LFNC or LFNMC: Liquuidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit


A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover

enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and

attachment details.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020



A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their

mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the

certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


following:


2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.

3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.

4. Electri-Flex Company.

5. FSR Inc.


7. Patriot Aluminum Products, LLC.

8. Picoma Industries, Inc.

9. Republic Conduit.

10. Robroy Industries.

11. Southwire Company.

12. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group.

13. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.

E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.

2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; aluminum.

I. LFMC: (CLASS 1/ DIV 1 AND 2 LOCATIONS ONLY) Flexible steel conduit with PVC

jacket and complying with UL 360.

J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and

NFPA 70.

2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel or die cast.

b. Type: compression.

3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.

4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with

overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities

having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and

protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


following:


2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.

3. Arnco Corporation.

4. CANTEX INC.

5. CertainTeed Corporation.

6. Condux International, Inc.


8. Kraloy.

9. Lamson & Sessions.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


10. Niedax Inc.

11. RACO; Hubbell.

B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.

D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, and Type EPC-80-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651

unless otherwise indicated.

E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.

F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.

G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.

H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.

I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.

J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and

material.

K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,

respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements

of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


following:

1. B-line, an Eaton business.

2. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.

3. MonoSystems, Inc.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 4 unless otherwise

indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,

hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for

complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


following:

1. Adalet.

2. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business.

3. EGS/Appleton Electric.

4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

5. FSR Inc.

6. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection.

7. Hubbell Incorporated.

8. Kraloy.

9. Milbank Manufacturing Co.

10. MonoSystems, Inc.

11. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions.


13. RACO; Hubbell.

14. Robroy Industries.

15. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

16. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures.

17. Thomas & Betts Corporation, A Member of the ABB Group.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum,

Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast

aluminum with gasketed cover.

H. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as

recessed box.

I. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


J. Gangable boxes are allowed.

K. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 4 with continuous-hinge

cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

L. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC IMC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC IMC.

3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC Type EPC-80-PVC, concrete encased.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment):

a. Class 1, Division 1 and 2 locations: LFMC.

b. Non-hazardous or unclassified locations: LFNC

5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

6. Conduit, Class1/Division 1 or 2 Locations: GRC, IMC, and concreted-encased Type

EPC-80 PVC

7. Boxes and Enclosures, Class 1/Division 1: UL listed for the location

8. Boxes and Enclosures, Class 1/Division 2: NEMA 250, Type 4X

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC IMC. Raceway locations include

the following:

a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


c. Mechanical rooms.

4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FNC, except use LFNC in damp or wet

locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC IMC.

7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this

type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after

installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and

apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

3. EMT: Use compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum

raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Aluminum conduits or fittings in direct contact with concrete shall be coated with coal tar

epoxy or installed with a conduit sleeve

G. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

H. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits.

Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and

number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.

Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems"

for hangers and supports.

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of

changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

I. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:

1. Run conduit1-inchparallel or at right angles to main reinforcement. Where at right angles

to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at

maximum 10-footintervals.

2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion

fittings.

3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.

4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for

each specific location.

5. Change from RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, to GRC or IMC before rising above floor.

J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways.

2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound

manufacturer's written instructions.

L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive

compound prior to assembly.

M. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings

to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

N. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter

or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

Q. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap

underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

R. Surface Raceways:


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inchradius control at bend points.

2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not

exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section.

Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue

are not acceptable support methods.

S. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway

sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

T. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70, except for conduit transitions from hazardous to

non-hazardous location, which shall be sealed as detailed on the drawings

U. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

V. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install

in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental

temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds

100 feet.

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each

of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.

c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F

temperature change.

d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

e. .

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot

of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install

fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of

length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure

expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time

of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


W. Flexible Conduit Connections to Light Fixtures: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of

72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to

vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

X. Flexible Conduit Connections to Vibrating and Motor Loads: Maximum of 18 inches in length.

Y. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to

center of box unless otherwise indicated.

Z. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a

raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

AA. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

BB. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

CC. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

DD. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.

EE. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

FF. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 43-1

SECTION 26 05 43 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Direct-buried conduit, ducts, and duct accessories.

2. Concrete-encased conduit, ducts, and duct accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Trafficways: Locations where vehicular or pedestrian traffic is a normal course of events.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions, and then only

after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Engineer or Owner no fewer than three days in advance of proposed interruption

of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Engineer’s or Owner's

written permission.

B. Ground Water: Assume ground-water level is at grade level unless a lower water table is noted

on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DUCTS AND RACEWAYS

A. Comply with ANSI C2.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


2.2 CONDUIT

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC and Type EPC-80-PVC, UL 651, with matching

fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

2.3 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES


following:

1. ARNCO Corp.

2. Beck Manufacturing.

3. CANTEX INC.

4. CertainTeed Corporation.

5. Condux International, Inc.

6. ElecSys, Inc.


8. IPEX USA LLC.

9. Lamson & Sessions.

10. Manhattan/CDT.

B. Underground Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 2, UL 651, ASTM F 512, Type EPC-80 and

Type EPC-40, with matching fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 by same manufacturer as the

duct.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, manholes, handholes, and boxes with final

arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.

Notify Architect and Engineer if there is a conflict between areas of excavation and existing

structures or archaeological sites to remain.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes, handholes, and boxes

with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks, as determined by coordination with

other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations

as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes,

and as approved by Architect.

3.2 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Ducts for Electrical Cables More than 600 V: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80, or Type EPC-40-

PVC, as indicated on the drawings in concrete-encased duct bank unless otherwise indicated.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


B. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 V and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-80, or Type EPC-40-

PVC, as indicated on the drawings, in direct-buried duct bank unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in direct-buried duct

bank unless otherwise indicated.

D. Underground Ducts Crossing Driveways Roadways and Railroads: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-

PVC.

3.3 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving," but do not use heavy-

duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation, and re-establish original grades unless

otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore

vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and

mulching.

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures.

3.4 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts according to NEMA TCB 2.

B. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away

from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes, to

drain in both directions.

C. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use

manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches both horizontally and

vertically, at other locations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in

same plane.

E. Installation Adjacent to High-Temperature Steam Lines: Where duct banks are installed parallel

to underground steam lines, perform calculations showing the duct bank will not be subject to

environmental temperatures above 40 deg C. Where environmental temperatures are calculated

to rise above 40 deg C, and anywhere the duct bank crosses above an underground steam line,

install insulation blankets listed for direct burial to isolate the duct bank from the steam line.

F. Duct Entrances to Manholes and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells,

spaced approximately 10 inches o.c. for 45-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct

sizes.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without

reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line.

2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in

the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. Install an expansion fitting

near the center of all straight line direct-buried duct banks with calculated expansion of

more than 3/4 inch.

3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

G. Building Wall Penetrations: Make a transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit at

least 10 feet outside the building wall, without reducing duct line slope away from the building,

and without forming a trap in the line. Use fittings manufactured for duct-to-conduit transition.

Install conduit penetrations of building walls as specified in Section 26 05 44 "Sleeves and

Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

H. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare

ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig hydrostatic

pressure.

I. Pulling Cord: Install 100 200-lbf-test nylon cord in empty ducts.

J. Direct-Buried Duct Banks:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank.

2. Support ducts on duct separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing, and outdoor

temperature.

3. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches below finished grade unless otherwise

indicated.

4. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below frost line.

5. Install ducts with a minimum of 37.5 inches between ducts o.c. for like services and 12

inches between power and signal ducts.

6. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment, at

building entrances through floor, and at changes of direction in duct run.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase

coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit

horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation.

Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

7. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work

toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and

contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing

each tier. After placing last tier, hand place backfill to 4 inches over ducts and hand tamp.

Firmly tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand

tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections

at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. Comply with

requirements in Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for installation of backfill materials.

a. Place minimum 3 inches of sand as a bed for duct bank. Place sand to a minimum

of 6 inches above top level of duct bank.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


b. Place minimum 6 inches of engineered fill above concrete encasement of duct

bank.

K. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried ducts and

duct banks, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of

duct bank. Provide an additional plank for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a

nominal 18 inches. Space additional planks 12 inches apart, horizontally.

L. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased ducts

and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of centerline of duct bank. Provide an

additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18

inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation

of underground ducts and utility structures.

2. Pull solid aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and

adequate bend radii, and test for out-of-round duct. Provide a minimum 6-inch-long

mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions

and retest.

3. Test manhole and handhole grounding to ensure electrical continuity of grounding and

bonding connections. Measure and report ground resistance as specified in

Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts.

Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout

ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53-1

SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.

2. Identification of power and control cables.

3. Identification for conductors.

4. Underground-line warning tape.

5. Warning labels and signs.

6. Instruction signs.

7. Equipment identification labels, including arc-flash warning labels.

8. Miscellaneous identification products.




and profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products.

B. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system

components to be an index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components

used in identification signs and labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For arc-flash hazard study.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2.


C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks

used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS

A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

B. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: "DANGER - CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."

C. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN

FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

3. Arc Flash Warning: As required by the arc flash study.

2.3 LABELS

A. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible labels

laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear

adhesive tape for securing label ends.


following:

a. Brady Corporation.

b. Champion America.

c. emedco.

d. Grafoplast Wire Markers.

e. LEM Products Inc.

f. Marking Services, Inc.

g. Panduit Corp.

B. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit,

pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameters sized to suit

diameters of raceways they identify, and that stay in place by gripping action.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020



following:


b. Marking Services, Inc.

c. Panduit Corp.

C. Self-Adhesive Labels:


following:


b. Brother International Corporation.

c. emedco.

d. Grafoplast Wire Markers.

e. Ideal Industries, Inc.

f. LEM Products Inc.

g. Marking Services, Inc.

h. Panduit Corp.

2. Preprinted or Write-on, 3-mil-thick, polyester or vinyl flexible label with acrylic

pressure-sensitive adhesive.

a. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating,

protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable and raceway

diameter, such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

3. Vinyl, thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil-thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-resistant,

pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other

access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

a. Nominal Size: 3.5-by-5-inch.

4. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink recommended by

printer manufacturer.

2.4 BANDS AND TUBES:

A. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-

colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameters sized to suit diameters of raceways or

cables they identify, and that stay in place by gripping action.


following:




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-printed

identification labels, sized to suit diameters of and shrunk to fit firmly around cables they

identify. Full shrink recovery occurs at a maximum of 200 deg F. Comply with UL 224.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:


b. 3M.

2.5 TAPES AND STENCILS:

A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification

legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.


following:

a. Carlton Industries, LP.

b. Champion America.

c. Ideal Industries, Inc.

d. Marking Services, Inc.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils

thick by 1 to 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use.


following:


b. Carlton Industries, LP.

c. emedco.

C. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits 600 V or Less: 4-inch-wide black stripes on

10-inch centers placed diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway

or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stop stripes at legends.


following:

a. LEM Products Inc.


D. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch-wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black

stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

E. Underground-Line Warning Tape


following:


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020



b. Ideal Industries, Inc.

c. LEM Products Inc.

d. Marking Services, Inc.

e. Reef Industries, Inc.

2. Tape:

a. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to

identify and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.

b. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.

c. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert and not subject to degradation

when exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found

in soils.

3. Color and Printing:

a. Comply with ANSI Z535.1, ANSI Z535.2, ANSI Z535.3, ANSI Z535.4, and

ANSI Z535.5.

b. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: "ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE".

c. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: "TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,

COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE".

F. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be

1 inch.

2.6 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with

self-locking cable tie fastener.

B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.015 inch thick, color-coded for phase and

voltage level, with factory screened or printed permanent designations; punched for use with

self-locking cable tie fastener.

C. Write-On Tags:


following:

a. Carlton Industries, LP.

b. LEM Products Inc.

2. Polyester Tags 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable tie for

attachment to raceway, conductor, or cable.

3. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


2.7 SIGNS

A. Baked-Enamel Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size

required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches.

B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396-

inch galvanized-steel backing and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches.

C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:

1. Engraved legend.

2. Thickness:

a. For signs up to 20 sq. inches, minimum 1/16-inch-.

b. For signs larger than 20 sq. inches, 1/8 inch thick.

c. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.

d. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.8 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6

nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.

4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight,

self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.


2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.


4. Color: Black.

C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self-locking.


2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F according to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.


5. Color: Black.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application

requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or

interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean

substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by

manufacturer of identification product.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,

manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent

designations throughout Project.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without

interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to

provide view of identifying devices.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

F. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners

appropriate to the location and substrate.

G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation

and paint application.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


I. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or

cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

J. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band

shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in

contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at

50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested

areas.

K. During backfilling of trenches, install continuous underground-line warning tape directly above

cable or raceway at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of

multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More Than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil 4-

inch-wide black stripes on 10-inch centers over orange background that extends full length of

raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH

VOLTAGE WIRING" with 3-inch-high black letters on 20-inch centers. Stop stripes at legends.

Apply stripes to the following finished surfaces:

1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of a floor that

is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.

2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.

3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in

the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.

B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More Than 600 V: Self-adhesive vinyl

labels. Install labels 30-foot maximum intervals.

C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch

Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install

labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.

D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull

box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels containing the wiring system

legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. "EMERGENCY POWER."

2. "POWER."

3. "UPS."

4. ”CONTROLS”

5. “DATA”.

E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and

junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors

listed below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if

authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Brown.

2) Phase B: Orange.

3) Phase C: Yellow.

d. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a

minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or

taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible

unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.

F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More Than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull and

junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use nonmetallic preprinted tags colored and marked

to indicate phase, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.

G. Install instructional sign, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors

using adhesive-film-type labels.

H. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes,

manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels with the conductor

or cable designation, origin, and destination.

I. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations,

provide heat-shrink preprinted tubes with the conductor designation.

J. Conductors To Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.

K. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,

and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and

pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker-tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used

by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and

operation and maintenance manual.

L. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,

lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical-fiber cable.

1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.

2. Install underground-line warning tape for direct-buried cables and cables in raceways.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


M. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of

access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless

otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in

finished spaces.

N. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-

adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power-transfer switches.

b. Controls with external control power connections.

c. .

O. Arc Flash Warning Labeling: Self-adhesive thermal transfer vinyl labels.

1. Comply with NFPA 70E and ANSI Z535.4.

2. Comply with Section 26 05 74 "Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study"

requirements for arc-flash warning labels.

P. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and

maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with

approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

Q. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red

background with minimum 3/8-inch-high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used

for power transfer.

R. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label

that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual.

Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control

panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,

lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm unless equipment is provided

with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic

label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high

letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2

inches high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label Stenciled

legend 4 inches high.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


d. Unless labels are provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten them

with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL

rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment To Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a self-

adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.

c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

d. Switchgear.

e. Switchboards.

f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.

g. Substations.

h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.

i. Motor-control centers.

j. Enclosed switches.

k. Enclosed circuit breakers.

l. Enclosed controllers.

m. Variable-speed controllers.

n. Push-button stations.

o. Power-transfer equipment.

p. Contactors.

q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.

r. Battery-inverter units.

s. Battery racks.

t. Power-generating units.

u. Monitoring and control equipment.

v. UPS equipment.

w. .



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00-1

SECTION 26 22 00 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Distribution and buck-boost, dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with

capacities up to 1500 kVA.




and profiles, and finishes for each type and size of transformer.

2. Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum clearances,

installed devices and features, and performance for each type and size of transformer.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments

to structure and to supported equipment.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



B. Source quality-control reports.



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.



A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions

within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit, throughout periods during which equipment is

not energized and when transformer is not in a space that is continuously under normal control

of temperature and humidity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Square D; by Schneider Electric.

2. Acme Electric Corporation.

3. Eaton.

4. Federal Pacific.

5. Hammond Power Solutions Inc.

6. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.



C. Comply with NEMA TP 1 energy-efficiency levels as verified by testing according to NEMA

TP 2.

D. Cores: Electrical grade, non-aging silicon steel with high permeability and low hysteresis losses.

E. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.

1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.

2. Coil Material: Copper.

F. Encapsulation: Transformers smaller than 30 kVA shall have core and coils completely resin

encapsulated.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


G. Shipping Restraints: Paint or otherwise color code bolts, wedges, blocks, and other restraints

that are to be removed after installation and before energizing. Use fluorescent colors that are

easily identifiable inside the transformer enclosure.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.

B. Cores: One leg per phase.

C. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated.

1. NEMA 250, Type 2: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound utilizing

a vacuum pressure impregnation process to seal out moisture and air.

2. KVA Ratings: Based on convection cooling only and not relying on auxiliary fans.

D. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated.

1. NEMA 250, Type 4X, Stainless Steel: Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin

compound, sealing out moisture and air.

E. Transformer Enclosure Finish: Comply with NEMA 250.

1. Finish Color: Powder coat painted white.

F. Taps for Transformers 3 kVA and Smaller: None.

G. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below

normal full capacity.

H. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps

below normal full capacity.

I. Insulation Class: 185 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of

115-deg C rise above 40-deg C ambient temperature.

J. Electrostatic Shielding: Each winding shall have an independent, single, full-width copper

electrostatic shield arranged to minimize interwinding capacitance.

1. Arrange coil leads and terminal strips to minimize capacitive coupling between input and

output terminals.

2. Include special terminal for grounding the shield.

K. Wall Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets for mounting on equipment rack.

L. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for coil and core.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted

with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 26 05 53

"Identification for Electrical Systems."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for

each transformer.

B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by

NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding

and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5

ohms at location of transformer.

D. Environment: Enclosures shall be rated for the environment in which they are located. Covers

for NEMA 250, Type 4X enclosures shall not cause accessibility problems.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mount transformer level and plumb with wall brackets fabricated by transformer manufacturer

installed on equipment rack.

B. Secure covers to enclosure and tighten all bolts to manufacturer-recommended torques to reduce

noise generation.

C. Remove shipping bolts, blocking, and wedges.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables."

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A-486B.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


D. Provide flexible connections at all conduit and conductor terminations and supports to eliminate

sound and vibration transmission to the building structure.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-1

SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.

D. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

E. SPD: Surge protective device.

F. VPR: Voltage protection rating.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.

1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and

components indicated.

2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes,

equipment features, and ratings.

3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection,

knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-2

4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

6. Series rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices is prohibited.

7. Include evidence of NRTL listing for SPD as installed in panelboard.

8. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

9. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

10. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.

11. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper;

include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include an

Internet link for electronic access to downloadable PDF of the coordination curves.



B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load

balancing.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23

"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device that allows adjustments.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and GFEP Types: Two spares for each panelboard.

3. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type,

but no fewer than three of each size and type.

4. Fuses for Fused Power-Circuit Devices: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each

size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-3


A. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Engineer no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Engineer’s written

permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace SPD that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. SPD Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS

A. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for

panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items.

Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.



C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

E. Enclosures: Surface-mounted, dead-front cabinets.

1. Rated for outdoor location: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel with powder coat white

finish.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-4

2. Height: 84 inches maximum.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within

hinged trim cover. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall have no exposed hardware.

4. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with

flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor.

5. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral

with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.

6. Fungus Proofing: Permanent fungicidal treatment for overcurrent protective devices and

other components.

F. Incoming Mains:

1. Location: Convertible between top and bottom.

2. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main

breaker.

G. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

a. Plating shall run entire length of bus.

b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.

2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective

devices shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.

3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance

applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure.

H. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating.

3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required,

for larger conductors.

4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the neutral bar for each pole in

the panelboard.

5. Ground Lugs: Mechanical type, with a lug on the bar for each pole in the panelboard.

I. NRTL Label: Panelboards or load centers shall be labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authority

having jurisdiction for use as service equipment with one or more main service disconnecting

and overcurrent protective devices. Panelboards or load centers shall have meter enclosures,

wiring, connections, and other provisions for utility metering. Coordinate with utility company

for exact requirements.

J. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections,

filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: 20 percent.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-5

K. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit

current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting

capacity.

1. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated 240 V or less shall have short-

circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 10,000 A rms symmetrical.

2. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated above 240 V and less than 600 V

shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms

symmetrical.


A. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying

with UL 1449 SPD Type 1 or Type 2.

2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS


following:

1. Square D, I-Line Type

2. Eaton.

3. Siemens Energy.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs, as indicated on the drawings.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:

Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release

for removal or bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: P

or bolt-on circuit breakerslug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device

requires mechanical release for removal.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS


following:

1. Square D Type NQ

2. Eaton

3. Siemens Energy.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-6

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs as indicated on drawings.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without

disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Door-in-door construction with concealed hinges; secured with multipoint latch with

tumbler lock; keyed alike. Outer door shall permit full access to the panel interior. Inner door

shall permit access to breaker operating handles and labeling, but current carrying terminals and

bus shall remain concealed.

F. SPD.

1. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per

phase shall not be less than 240 kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic

sum of the ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

2. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, three-

phase, four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

a. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.

b. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.

c. Neutral to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.

d. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V.

3. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for 208/120-V, three-phase, four-wire circuits shall

not exceed the following:

a. Line to Neutral: 700 V.

b. Line to Ground: 700 V.

c. Neutral to Ground: 700 V.

d. Line to Line: 1200 V.

4. SCCR: Equal to or exceed 100 kA.

G. Buses:

1. Copper phase and neutral buses

2. Copper equipment ground buses.

2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES


following:

1. Eaton.

2. Siemens Energy.

3. Square D, by Schneider Electric

B. MCCB: Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-7

a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.

b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-

mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers:

a. RMS sensing.

b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip.

c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays.

d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data.

e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and

magnitude of fault that caused the trip.

f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer.

g. Field-Adjustable Settings:

1) Instantaneous trip.

2) Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3) Long and short time adjustments.

4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response.

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and double-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault

protection (6-mA trip).

5. GFEP Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

2.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases,

and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.

B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC

rating.

C. Circuit Directory: Computer-generated circuit directory mounted inside panelboard door with

transparent plastic protective cover.

1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it

from all other circuits.

2.7 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device

test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from

panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and

switchboard class relays.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that

equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified

in NFPA 70.

B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged, rusted, or have

been subjected to water saturation.

D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors

and panels.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

D. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

E. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

G. Mounting panelboards with space behind is recommended for damp, wet, or dirty locations. The

steel slotted supports in the following paragraph provide an even mounting surface and the

recommended space behind to prevent moisture or dirt collection.

H. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque

wrench or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to

ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes and connections to separate ground bars.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-9

J. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; install warning

signs complying with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads;

incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Handwritten

directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard door.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for

Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-10



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-1

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.

2. Weather-resistant receptacles.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Eaton (Arrow Hart).

2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single

source from single manufacturer.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-2

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a

qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted

under the following conditions:

1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.

2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, feed-through type.

2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.

3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


following:

a. Eaton (Arrow Hart).

b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.

c. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

d. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.

2. Description:

a. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

b. Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding

screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from mounting

strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on

removable parts.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-

resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Device Color:


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-3

1. Wiring Devices: Gray unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device

listing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device

boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside

of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust,

paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and

cables.

3. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated

on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.

b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.

c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were

installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect

conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last

possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal

screw.

6. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

7. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26-4

8. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted

receptacles to the right.

3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles is

not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or

engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering for normal power circuits and red-filled

lettering for emergency power circuits on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside

outlet boxes.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 28 16-1

SECTION 26 28 16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fusible switches.

2. Nonfusible switches.

3. Receptacle switches.

4. Shunt trip switches.

5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).

6. Molded-case switches.

7. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component

indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data

on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Current and voltage ratings.

3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).

4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.

6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent

protective device.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and

components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.


1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

D. Manufacturer's field service report.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in

Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit

breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than

three of each size and type.

2. Fuse Pullers: Two for each size and type.

3. .


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective

devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from

single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed

switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces

and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by


E. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following

conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.

2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Engineer no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Engineer's written

permission.

4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment

served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances

for equipment access doors and panels.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES


following:

1. Eaton.

2. Siemens Industry, Inc.

3. Square D, by Schneider Electric.

B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with

capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and

NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses,

lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed

position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and

NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses,

lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed

position.

E. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and

bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate

before switch blades open.

6. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.

7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

8. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES


following:

1. Eaton.




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,

horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with

cover in closed position.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Six Pole, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and

NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and

interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Double Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and

NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and

interlocked with cover in closed position.

E. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground

conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;

labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Isolated Ground Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and

bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate

before switch blades open.

5. Hookstick Handle: Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.

6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES


following:

1. Bussmann, an Eaton business.

2. Littelfuse, Inc.

B. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA

interrupting and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.

C. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse

block; lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed

position.

D. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and

secondary fuses, with a control power source of enough capacity to operate shunt trip,

connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.

E. Accessories:

1. Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function.

2. Oiltight green ON pilot light.

3. Isolated neutral lug; 100 percent rating.

4. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


2.4 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS


following:

1. Eaton.



B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with

interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and

instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for

circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,

field-adjustable trip setting.

E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following

field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip.

2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less

than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style

fuse listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse

compartment door.

H. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations

with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

I. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting

circuits.

4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type

with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay

settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-

sequence current transformer/sensor.

5. Communication Capability: Universal-mounted communication module with functions

and features compatible with power monitoring and control system, specified in

Section 26 09 13 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


6. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.

7. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional

time delay.

8. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

9. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.

10. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be

removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

11. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-

fault protection function.

12. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.

13. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered; 120-V ac.

2.5 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES


following:

1. Eaton.


3. Square D, by Schneider Electric

B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit

withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.

C. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles.

2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.

3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with

mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings,

push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence

current transformer/sensor.

4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.

5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional

time delay.

6. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.

7. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when switch has tripped.

8. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be

removable only when switch is in off position.

9. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground-fault shunt trip unit; for interlocking

ground-fault protection function.

10. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.

11. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered; 120-V ac.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


2.6 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50,

to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X stainless steel.

3. Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

6. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance

with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless

otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide

warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.


A. Perform tests and inspections.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,

connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and

circuit breaker. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to

portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each enclosed switch and circuit breaker 11 months after date of Substantial

Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure

temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide

calibration record for device.

4. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and

inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches

and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 26 05 73 "Overcurrent

Protective Device Coordination Study."



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SITE CLEARING 31 10 00 - 1

SECTION 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain.

2. Removing existing vegetation.

3. Clearing and grubbing.

4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil.

5. Stripping and stockpiling rock.

6. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements.

7. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities and abandoning site

utilities in place.

8. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally

occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas,

surface soil is typically called "topsoil," but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the

surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-

place surface soil; the zone where plant roots grow. Its appearance is generally friable, pervious,

and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of

subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects larger than 2 inches in diameter; and free of

weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials.

D. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other

vegetation to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings.

E. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected

during construction and indicated on Drawings.

F. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1.5 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared

materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and

site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as

damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or video recordings.

2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each

tree or other plant designated to remain.

B. Topsoil stripping and stockpiling program.

C. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other

subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling Program: Prepare a written program to systematically

demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and

equipment during the Work. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement and protection of

stockpiles.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied

or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or


B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on

property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Engineer.

C. Salvageable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on

Owner's premises, coordinate location with owner’s representative.

D. Utility Locator Service: Notify Sunshine One Call for area where Project is located before site

clearing.

E. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-

control and plant-protection measures are in place.

F. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the soil is dry or slightly moist.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in

Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not

available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during

construction.

B. Verify that trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated have been flagged

and that protection zones have been identified and enclosed.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,

according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities


B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction

activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction

until permanent vegetation has been established.

D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls, and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during

removal.

3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. Protect trees and plants to remain on site.

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are

damaged by construction operations.

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Locate, identify, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.

B. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


C. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others, unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide

temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Engineer and Utility Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility

interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer written permission.

D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new

construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated.

2. Grind down stumps and remove roots larger than 2 inches in diameter, obstructions, and

debris to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade.

3. Use only hand methods or air spade for grubbing within protection zones.

4. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material

unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and

compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste

materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and

other objects larger than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste

materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil or other

materials. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust

and erosion by water.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.

2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate

new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut a long

line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut

faces vertically.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste

materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials.

Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials, and transport them to recycling

facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.



BDI/PNS

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EARTH MOVING 31 20 00 - 1

SECTION 31 20 00 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Geotechnical Reports have been prepared for the project. The contractor shall review the reports

for general subsurface conditions, recommendations for construction, etc. and comply with all

recommendations therein.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site.

2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, turf and grasses, and plants.

3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures.

4. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.

5. Subbase course for concrete walks.

6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches.

7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.

8. Excavating well hole to accommodate elevator-cylinder assembly.


1. Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed

over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade.

2. Section 31 10 00 "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling

topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

3. Section 31 23 19 "Dewatering" for lowering and disposing of ground water during

construction.

4. Section 31 50 00 "Excavation Support and Protection" for shoring, bracing, and sheet

piling of excavations.

5. Section 32 92 00 "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading in turf and grass areas, including

preparing and placing planting soil for turf areas.

6. Section 32 93 00 "Plants" for finish grading in planting areas and tree and shrub pit

excavation and planting.

7. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and

Bridge Construction, Section 204 “Graded Aggregate Base” for base courses beneath

pavement.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to

support sides of pipe.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying

pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer often supporting a slab-on-grade that minimizes upward

capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and

dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond

indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Engineer.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated

lines and dimensions without direction by Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as

remedial work directed by Engineer, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and

electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the

ground surface.

I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix

asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete

pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill

immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services

within buildings.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preexcavation conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to earthmoving, including, but not limited to, the

following:

a. Personnel and equipment needed to make progress and avoid delays.

b. Coordination of Work with utility locator service.

c. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of tree- and

plant-protection zones.

d. Extent of trenching by hand or with air spade.

e. Field quality control.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Geotextiles/ Geo synthetics.

2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.

3. Detectable Warning tapes.

B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:

1. Geotextile/ Geo Synthetics.: 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).

2. Detectable Warning Tape: 12 inches (300 mm) long; of each color.


A. Material Test Reports: For each borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557.

B. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction

and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused

by earth-moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied

or used facilities during earth-moving operations.


without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or


B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing earth moving indicated on

property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Owner’s Project

Representative.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before

beginning earth-moving operations.

D. Do not commence earth-moving operations until temporary site fencing and erosion- and

sedimentation-control measures are in place.

E. Do not commence earth-moving operations until plant-protection measures are in place.

F. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material.

2. Parking vehicles or equipment.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3. Foot traffic.

4. Erection of sheds or structures.

5. Impoundment of water.

6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

G. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

H. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not

available from excavations. Satisfactory and Unsatisfactory soils will be identified by

Geotechnical Engineer on site

B. Satisfactory Soils: See A above. General description follows: Soil Classification Groups GW,

GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free

of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,

vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: See A above. General description follows: Soil Classification Groups GC,

SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these

groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of

optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a

1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

E. Base Course: As specified in FDOT Specifications, Section 204.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; with at least 90 percent passing a

1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed

fractured stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940/D 2940M; except with 100 percent

passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm)

sieve.

H. Drainage Course Drainage Gravel, #57 stone: Narrowly graded mixture of washed, crushed

stone or gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-

1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and

natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-

inch (25-mm) sieve and zero to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.

J. Filter Material for pond filters will adhere specifications and characteristics given in plans.

K. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M; fine aggregate.

L. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES/ GEO SYNTHETICS

A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for

subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater

than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test

methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.

2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.

3. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.

4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made

from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with

AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.

2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.

3. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.

4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

C. Turf Reinforcement Mat: A geo synthetic consisting of a synthetic fiber matrix continued

between nets, top and bottom.

1. TRMs shall be Landlok 450 (unless indicated otherwise on the plans)

2.3 CONTROLLED LOW-STRENGTH MATERIAL

A. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Self-compacting, flowable concrete material produced from

the following:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type II.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.

3. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum

aggregate size.

4. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

5. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

B. Produce conventional-weight, controlled low-strength material with 140-psi (965-kPa)

compressive strength when tested according to ASTM C 495/C 495M.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape

manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150

mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility,

with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal

detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.

2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.

3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.

4. Blue: Water systems.

5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving

operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary

protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared

subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water

accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to

accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface

and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil

materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be

authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials

and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2. Remove rock and obstructions to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of

permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings.

b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings.

c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast

against grade.

d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without

forms or exterior waterproofing treatments.

e. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade.

f. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches and the greater of 24 inches (600 mm)

wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25

mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and

removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms

to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm) above bottom of pile

cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced

material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.

3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility

Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or

minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing

surfaces.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Excavate by hand or with an air spade to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and

subgrades. If excavating by hand, use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose

roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that

rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 01 56 39 "Temporary Tree

and Plant Protection."

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and

subgrades.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below

frost line.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or

conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than

top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of

pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of

pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp

objects along trench subgrade.

1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter, hand-excavate

trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of

trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions

with tamped sand backfill.

3. For flat-bottomed, multiple-duct conduit units, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support

conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

4. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other

unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-

tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed

roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with

installation of utilities.

3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Section 01 56 39 "Temporary Tree

and Plant Protection."

3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with

compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded

10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes) to identify soft

pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as

determined by Geotechnical Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as

directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to

Contract provisions for changes in the Work.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by Engineer, without additional compensation.

3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation

of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean

concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when


1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by

Engineer.

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing.

Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of

remaining trees.

3.11 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, damp

proofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents.

3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities.

4. Removing concrete formwork.

5. Removing trash and debris.

6. Removing temporary shoring, bracing, and sheeting.

7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450

mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of

footings. Concrete is specified in Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete."

C. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

D. Initial Backfill:

1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger

than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or

conduit.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


a. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on

both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or

displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

E. Final Backfill:

1. Soil Backfill: Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade

elevation.

F. Detectable Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm)

below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.13 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill

material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. Except final 12” of fill shall

be as required by landscape plans and specifications.

2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material.

3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.

4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill.

5. Under footings and foundations, use foundations and footings, fill approved by the

geotechnical engineer.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before

compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified

dry density.

3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth

for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches (100 mm)

in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and

uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight

according to ASTM D 1557:


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Under structures, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of

existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. Reference

#5 below.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and

compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below

subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent. Top 12”

below final grade shall be as specified in landscape plans and specifications.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 92

percent.

5. Under building slabs, foundations, and footings, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of

existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material as recommended by the

Geotechnical Engineer.

3.16 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply

with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.

2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding.

Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the

following subgrade tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested

with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.

3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Section 33 46 00 "Subdrainage."

B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated,

to within 12 inches (300 mm) of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches (150 mm) thick.

Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides

and ends at least 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry density according to

ASTM D 1557.

2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inch- (150-mm-) thick

compacted layers to final subgrade.

3.18 BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS

A. Place base courses under pavements according to FDOT Specification Section 204.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3.19 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDERWALKS

A. Place subbase course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course under walks as follows:

1. Install separation geotextile if shown on plans on prepared subgrade according to

manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place subbase course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

3. Place subbase course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of

equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than

3 inches (75 mm) thick.

4. Compact subbase course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross

sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according

to.

3.20 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Drainage courses shall be provided where shown on plans.

B. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

C. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-

on-grade as follows:

1. Install subdrainage geotextile (when required by plans) on prepared subgrade according

to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.

3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of

equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than

3 inches (75 mm) thick.

4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not

less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.


A. Special Inspections: Additional requirements may be necessary for earthwork associated with

structural building components. Comply with all requirements stated herein as well as in the

structural plans.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to

perform tests and inspections.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with

subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with

requirements.

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed

to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing

subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when



BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556,

ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2937, or ASTM D 6938, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the

following locations and frequencies:

1. Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, as

required by the Geotechnical Engineer.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At subgrade and each compacted backfill layer, at least one

test for every 25 feet (30 m) or less of wall length but (no fewer than two tests) or as

directed by Geotechnical Engineer..

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for

every 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length but no fewer than two tests.

F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of

compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to

depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.22 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep

free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed

surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent

construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Engineer; reshape and

recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,

backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,

and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.23 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and

debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 EXCAVATION 31 23 16 - 1

SECTION 31 23 16 - EXCAVATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Soil densification.

2. Excavating for building foundations.

3. Excavating for paving, roads, and parking areas.

4. Excavating for slabs-on-grade.

5. Excavating for site structures.

6. Excavating for landscaping.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches.

2. Section 31 23 23 - Fill.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Local utility standards when working within 24 inches of utility lines.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Excavation Protection Plan: Describe sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and installation

required to protect excavations and adjacent structures and property; include structural

calculations to support plan.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate soil densification grid for each size and configuration footing requiring

soils densification.


A. Perform Work in accordance with Wakulla County standard.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Prepare excavation protection plan under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced

in design of this Work and licensed in State of Florida.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Call Local Utility Line Information service at Sunshine One Call not less than three working days

before performing Work.

1. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding construction

areas.

B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

C. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.

D. Protect utilities indicated to remain from damage.

E. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcroppings and other features remaining as portion of final

landscaping.

F. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and

curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.

3.2 EXCAVATION

A. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work.

B. Excavate subsoil to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade paving and site structures,

and construction operations.

C. Excavate to working elevation for piling work.

D. Compact disturbed load bearing soil in direct contact with foundations to original bearing

capacity; perform compaction in accordance with Section 31 23 23 and Section 31 23 17.

E. Slope banks with machine to angle of repose or less until shored.

F. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

G. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.

H. Trim excavation. Remove loose matter.

I. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 1/3 cu yd measured by volume. Remove larger

material as specified in Section 31 23 23.

J. Notify Engineer of unexpected subsurface conditions.

K. Correct areas over excavated with structural fill as directed by Engineer.

L. Remove excess and unsuitable material from site.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


M. Repair or replace items indicated to remain damaged by excavation.


A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Request inspection of excavation and controlled fill operations in accordance with applicable

code.

C. Request visual inspection of bearing surfaces by Engineer before installing subsequent work.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Prevent displacement or loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability.

B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.

C. Protect structures, utilities and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral

movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth operations.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TRENCHING 31 23 17 - 1

SECTION 31 23 17 - TRENCHING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Excavating trenches for utilities from 5 feet outside building to utility service.

2. Compacted fill from top of utility bedding to subgrade elevations.

3. Backfilling and compaction.


1. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: General backfilling.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO T180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a

4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil

Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).

2. ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the

Sand-Cone Method.

3. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil

Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).


Rubber Balloon Method.

5. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by

Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

6. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Utility: Any buried pipe, duct, conduit, or cable.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Excavation Protection Plan: Describe sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and installation

required to protect excavations and adjacent structures and property; include structural

calculations to support plan.

C. Product Data: Submit data for geotextile fabric indicating fabric and construction.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


D. Materials Source: Submit name of imported fill materials suppliers.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.



B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Prepare excavation protection plan under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced

in design of this Work and licensed in State of Florida.

1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify Work associated with lower elevation utilities is complete before placing higher elevation

utilities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 LINES AND GRADES

A. Lay pipes to lines and grades indicated on Drawings.

1. Engineer reserves right to make changes in lines, grades, and depths of utilities when

changes are required for Project conditions.

B. Use laser-beam instrument with qualified operator to establish lines and grades.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Call Local Utility Line Information service at Sunshine One Call not less than three working days

before performing Work.

1. Request underground utilities to be located and marked within and surrounding construction

areas.

B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


C. Protect plant life, lawns, rock outcropping and other features remaining as portion of final

landscaping.

D. Protect bench marks, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs from excavating

equipment and vehicular traffic.

E. Maintain and protect above and below grade utilities indicated to remain.

F. Establish temporary traffic control and detours when trenching is performed in public right-of-

way. Relocate controls and reroute traffic as required during progress of Work.

3.3 TRENCHING

A. Excavate subsoil required for utilities to utility service.

B. Perform excavation within 24 inches of existing utility service in accordance with utility’s

requirements.

C. Do not advance open trench more than 200 feet ahead of installed pipe.

D. Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation and allow inspection. Remove water or

materials that interfere with Work.

E. Excavate bottom of trenches maximum 2 feet wider than outside diameter of pipe.

F. Excavate trenches to depth indicated on Drawings. Provide uniform and continuous bearing and

support for bedding material and pipe.

G. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.

H. When Project conditions permit, slope side walls of excavation starting 2 feet above top of pipe.

When side walls can not be sloped, provide sheeting and shoring to protect excavation as

specified in this section.

I. When subsurface materials at bottom of trench are loose or soft, excavate to greater depth as

directed by Engineer until suitable material is encountered.

J. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with Structural Fill

and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material.

K. Trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter.

L. Correct areas over excavated areas with compacted backfill as specified for authorized excavation

or replace with fill concrete as directed by Engineer.

M. Stockpile subsoil in area designated on site to depth not exceeding 8 feet and protect from

erosion.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3.4 SHEETING AND SHORING

A. Sheet, shore, and brace excavations to prevent danger to persons, structures and adjacent

properties and to prevent caving, erosion, and loss of surrounding subsoil.

B. Design sheeting and shoring to be removed at completion of excavation work.

C. Repair damage caused by failure of the sheeting, shoring, or bracing and for settlement of filled

excavations or adjacent soil.

D. Repair damage to new and existing Work from settlement, water or earth pressure or other causes

resulting from inadequate sheeting, shoring, or bracing.

3.5 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen fill materials.

B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over

porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces.

C. Place material in continuous layers as follows:

1. Subsoil Fill: Maximum12 inches compacted depth.

2. Structural Fill: Maximum8 inches compacted depth.

3. Granular Fill: Maximum8 inches compacted depth.

D. Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage,

utilities in trench.

E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

F. Do not leave more than 50 feet of trench open at end of working day.

G. Protect open trench to prevent danger to the public.

3.6 TOLERANCES

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

C. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Perform laboratory material tests in accordance with ASTM D1557.

C. Perform in place compaction tests in accordance with the following:

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Density Tests: ASTM D1556.

2. Moisture Tests: ASTM D3017.

D. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, compact,

and retest.

E. Frequency of Tests: One test for every 2,000 square feet but not less than 3 tests per project site.

3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work.

B. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic during construction.

3.9 SCHEDULE

A. Storm and Sanitary Piping:

1. Cover pipe and bedding with Fill Type: To subgrade elevation.

2. Compact uniformly to minimum 95 percent of maximum density.

B. Duct Bank:

1. Cover duct and bedding with Fill: To subgrade elevation.

2. Compact uniformly to minimum 95 percent of maximum density.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DEWATERING 31 23 20 - 1

SECTION 31 23 20 - DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes construction dewatering.


1. Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation" for recording preexisting conditions and

dewatering system progress.

2. Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for excavating, backfilling, site grading, and

controlling surface-water runoff and ponding.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

A. Dewatering observation wells are part of dewatering bid item.



1. Verify availability of Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make

progress and avoid delays.

2. Review condition of site to be dewatered including coordination with temporary erosion-

control measures and temporary controls and protections.

3. Review geotechnical report.

4. Review proposed site clearing and excavations.

5. Review existing utilities and subsurface conditions.

6. Review observation and monitoring of dewatering system.


A. Shop Drawings: For dewatering system, prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified

professional engineer.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2. Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of risers,

headers, filters, pumps, power units, and discharge lines; and means of discharge, control

of sediment, and disposal of water.

3. Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring performance

of dewatering system.

4. Include written plan for dewatering operations including sequence of well and well-point

placement coordinated with excavation shoring and bracings and control procedures to be

adopted if dewatering problems arise.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer land surveyor and professional engineer.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Existing Conditions: Using photographs or video recordings, show existing conditions of

adjacent construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by

dewatering operations. Submit before Work begins.

D. Record Drawings: Identify locations and depths of capped wells and well points and other

abandoned-in-place dewatering equipment.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in design of dewatering

systems and dewatering work.


A. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to survey adjacent

existing buildings, structures, and site improvements; establish exact elevations at fixed points

to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain

dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control hydrostatic pressures and to

lower, control, remove, and dispose of ground water and permit excavation and construction to

proceed on dry, stable subgrades.

1. Design dewatering system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified

professional engineer.

2. Continuously monitor and maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control,

stability of excavations and constructed slopes, prevention of flooding in excavation, and

prevention of damage to subgrades and permanent structures.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.

4. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings, structures, and site

improvements adjacent to excavation.

5. Remove dewatering system when no longer required for construction.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning dewatering. Comply with water- and debris-disposal regulations of authorities having

jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering

operations.

1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from

ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site or surrounding area.

2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water

accumulation.

B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.


without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate

routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Provide temporary grading to facilitate dewatering and control of surface water.

D. Protect and maintain temporary erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in

Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls” during dewatering operations.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump

equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water

disposal, and surface-water controls.

1. Space well points or wells at intervals required to provide sufficient dewatering.

2. Use filters or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands or silts from the subsurface.

B. Place dewatering system into operation to lower water to specified levels before excavating

below ground-water level.

C. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by authorities


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


D. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain

dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails.

3.3 OPERATION

A. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill

materials have been placed or until dewatering is no longer required.

B. Operate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of

structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Drain water-bearing strata above

and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.

1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade

softening, and slope instability.

2. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of

foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations.

3. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches below bottom of excavation.

C. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health,

property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water and sediment

in a manner that avoids inconvenience to others.

D. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well

holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction.


A. Observation Wells: Provide observation wells or piezometers, take measurements, and maintain

at least the minimum number indicated; additional observation wells may be required by


1. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in

observation wells.

2. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or

destroyed. In areas where observation wells are not functioning properly, suspend

construction activities until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from

observation-well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly.

3. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed.

B. Survey-Work Benchmarks: Resurvey benchmarks monthly during dewatering and maintain an

accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify

Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent

construction.

C. Provide continual observation to ensure that subsurface soils are not being removed by the

dewatering operation.

D. Prepare reports of observations.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect and maintain dewatering system during dewatering operations.

B. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 FILL 31 23 23 - 1

SECTION 31 23 23 - FILL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Backfilling building perimeter to subgrade elevations.

2. Fill under slabs-on-grade.

3. Fill under paving.

4. Fill for over-excavation.


1. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation.

2. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching: Backfilling of utility trenches.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO T180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a

4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil

Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)).


Sand-Cone Method.

3. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil

Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)).


Rubber Balloon Method.

5. ASTM D2922 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by


6. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data for geotextile fabric indicating fabric and construction.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.



B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected.

C. Verify underground tanks are anchored to their own foundations to avoid flotation after

backfilling.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Compact subgrade to density requirements for subsequent backfill materials.

B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with structural fill and

compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.

C. Scarify subgrade surface to depth of 6 inch.

D. Proof roll to identify soft spots; fill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements

for subsequent fill material.

3.3 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

B. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over

porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

C. Place geotextile fabric over fill prior to placing next lift of fill.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


D. Place material in continuous layers as follows:

1. Subsoil Fill: Maximum12 inches compacted depth.

2. Structural Fill: Maximum8 inches compacted depth.

3. Granular Fill: Maximum8 inches compacted depth.

E. Employ placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.

F. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.

G. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation

walls.

H. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in place.

I. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 percent slope for minimum distance of 10 ft, unless

noted otherwise.

J. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.

K. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.

L. Leave fill material stockpile areas free of excess fill materials.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Top Surface of Backfilling Within Building Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

C. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.

D. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Perform laboratory material tests in accordance with ASTM D1557.

C. Perform in place compaction tests in accordance with the following:

1. Density Tests: ASTM D1556, ASTM D2167, or ASTM D2922.

2. Moisture Tests: ASTM D3017.

D. When tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.

E. Frequency of Tests: One every 2,000 square feet, but never less than three per site.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


F. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs-on-grade, pavers, paving.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Protecting finished work.

B. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL 31 25 01 - 1

SECTION 31 25 01 - SEDIMENTATION AND EROSION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals

necessary to perform all installation, maintenance, removal, and area cleanup related to

sedimentation control work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein or as

required to prevent the transport of silt or sediment outside the limits of construction.

The work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, installation of temporary

access ways and staging areas, silt fences, temporary seeding, turbidity barriers,

sediment removal and disposal, device maintenance, removal of temporary devices,

temporary mulching, and final cleanup.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare a Sedimentation and Erosion Control Plan. This

plan shall be used as a minimum in developing the Pollution Prevention Plan for the

NPDES permit application (notification) to be filed by the CONTRACTOR.

1.2 RELATED WORK (REQUIREMENTS)

A. Section 32 92 25 – Sodding; Sodding for temporary erosion control.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Within 10 days after award of Contract, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the

ENGINEER for approval, technical product literature for all commercial products to be

used for sedimentation and erosion control.


A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the timely installation and maintenance of

all sedimentation control devices necessary to prevent the movement of sediment from

the construction site to off-site areas, via surface runoff or underground drainage

systems. Measures in addition to those shown on the Drawings necessary to prevent the

movement of sediment outside the limits of construction shall be installed, maintained,

removed, and cleaned up at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. No additional charges

to the OWNER will be considered.

B. Sedimentation and erosion control measures shall conform to the Best Management

Practices outlined in the Drawings and in the Florida Development Manual.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Silt Fence

1. Steel posts shall be a minimum of 5 feet in length, 2-1/2-in by 2-1/2-in by 1/4-in

angle post with self-fastening tabs and a 5-in by 4-in (nominal) steel anchor plate

at bottom.

2. Welded wire fabric shall be 4-in by 4-in mesh of 12 gauge by 12 gauge steel wire.

3. Silt fence fabric shall be a woven, polypropylene, ultraviolet resistant material

such as Mirafi 100X as manufactured by Mirafi, Inc., Charlotte, NC or equal.

4. Tie wires for securing silt fence fabric to wire mesh shall be light gauge metal

clips (hog rings), or 1/32-in diameter soft aluminum wire.

5. Prefabricated commercial silt fence may be substituted for built-in-field fence.

Pre-fabricated silt fence shall be "Envirofence" as manufactured by Mirafi Inc.,

Charlotte, NC or approved equal.

B. Turbidity Barriers: Turbidity barriers meeting FDOT Type I and Type II requirements

shall be provided. Turbidity barrier may be floating or staked, based on the conditions

at the location for installation. Turbidity barrier shall be capable of functioning

properly for flow conditions up to a 5 year/24 hour storm event. Turbidity barriers shall

be constructed of PVC or polypropylene material, all portions which will be exposed to

direct sunlight shall be ultraviolet resistant. All metal components shall be corrosion

resistant. Woven materials may be acceptable for installations where high flow

conditions may exist during storm events. Turbidity barriers shall be "Mark I", "Mark

II", or "PC-2" as manufactured by American Boom & Barrier Corporation, Cape

Canaveral, FL or approved equal.

C. Straw mulch shall be utilized on all newly graded areas to protect areas against

washouts and erosion. Straw mulch shall be comprised of threshed straw of oats,

wheat, barley, rye, or hay that is free from noxious weeds, mold or other objectionable

material. The straw mulch shall contain at least 50 percent by weight of material to be

10-in or longer. Straw shall be in an air-dry condition and suitable for placement with

blower equipment.

D. Latex acrylic copolymer, such as Soil Sealant with coalescing agent as manufactured by

Soil Stabilization Co., Merced, CA or approved equivalent shall be used as straw mulch

tackifier.

E. An asphalt tackifier may be used in place of a latex acrylic copolymer with prior written

approval from the ENGINEER.

F. Temporary Grassing: Certain areas of Grassing constructed in accordance with Section

32 92 25 may be designated by the ENGINEER as temporary erosion control features.

The ENGINEER may determine that permanent type grass seed be omitted from

Grassing and the specified rate of spread for fertilizer used in conjunction with grassing

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


operations be reduced when such work is designated as a temporary erosion control

feature.

G. Baled Hay or Straw: This work shall consist of construction of baled hay or straw dams

to protect against downstream accumulations of silt. The baled hay or straw dams shall

be constructed in accordance with the details in the FDOT Roadway and Traffic Design

Standards. All baled hay or straw utilized shall comply with the provisions of FDOT

Specification Section 104 for dry mulch.

H. Erosion control matting shall be installed as shown on the drawings or as approved by

the Engineer. Erosion control matting shall be North American Green P300 or

approved equal.

I. Excelsior matting shall be installed as shown on the drawings or as approved. Excelsior

matting shall be North American Green SC150 or approved equal.

J. Fabric formed concrete erosion protection shall be Armorform as manufactured by

Nicolon, or equal. Material shall correspond to the 4-inch thick Uniform Section Mat

(USM), or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LOCATION OF SEDIMENT/EROSION CONTROL AND TURBIDITY BARRIERS

A. At a minimum, sediment/erosion control devices shall be installed at all locations

shown on the plans and specified herein.

B. Sediment/erosion control devices shall be installed at 500 feet intervals along all swales

and ditches constructed and around all installed drainage structures prior to placement

of sod.

C. Sediment/erosion control shall be installed along all limits of construction.

D. CONTRACTOR shall provide additional sediment/erosion control and turbidity barriers

as needed to control the transport of silt and sediments outside of the limits of

construction.

E. Sediment/erosion control shall be installed around the base of all soil stockpile areas.

F. Sediment/erosion control devices shall be installed along the perimeter of all staging

areas.

G. All disturbed areas, greater than one (1) acre, in which construction activities have

stopped and are not anticipated to resume for a period of three months or longer shall be

temporarily seeded, within five days of stoppage of construction.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


H. All disturbed areas, greater than one (1) acre, in which construction activities have been

stopped and are not anticipated to resume for a period of 21 days, but not longer than

three months shall be temporarily mulched, within five days of stoppage of construction

in accordance with Paragraph 3.4.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Silt Fence Installation

1. Silt fences shall be positioned as specified indicated on the Drawings and as

necessary to prevent movement of sediment produced by construction activities

outside of the limits of construction or as approved.

2. Dig trench approximately 6-in wide and 6-in deep along proposed fence lines.

3. Drive metal-stakes, 8 feet on center (maximum) at back edge of trenches. Stakes

shall be driven 2 feet (minimum) into ground.

4. Hang 4 by 4 woven wire mesh on posts, setting bottom of wire in bottom of

trench. Secure wire to posts with self-fastening tabs.

5. Hang filter fabric on wire carrying to bottom of trench with about 4-in of fabric

laid across bottom of trench. Stretch fabric fairly taut along fence length and

secure with tie wires 12-in O.C. both ways.

6. Backfill trench with excavated material and tamp.

7. Install pre-fabricated silt fence according to MANUFACTURER's instructions.

B. Hay Bale Barrier

1. Bales shall be either wire-bound or string-tied with the bindings oriented around

the sides rather than over and under the bales.

2. Bales shall be placed lengthwise in a single row with the ends of adjacent bales

tightly abutting one another.

3. The barrier shall be entrenched and backfilled. A trench shall be excavated the

width of a bale and the length of the proposed barrier to a minimum depth of 4

inches. After bales are staked and chinked, the excavated soil shall be backfilled

against the barrier. Backfilled material shall conform to the ground level on the

downhill side and shall be built up to 2 inches against the uphill side.

4. Each bale shall be securely anchored by at least two stakes or rebars driven

through the bale. The first stake shall be driven toward the previously laid bale to

force the bales together. Stakes shall be driven deep enough into the ground to

securely anchor the bales.

5. The gaps between each bale shall be chinked (filled by wedging) with straw to

prevent water from escaping between the bales.

C. Turbidity Barriers

1. Turbidity barriers should extend the entire depth of the water.

2. Turbidity barriers should not be placed perpendicular to flow. Barriers should be

installed at an angle to the flow. Angle should be determined on the amount of

flow in the waterway and the MANUFACTURER's recommendation.

3. Turbidity barrier should be 10 to 20 percent longer than the straight line

measurement.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


4. Joints between panels should be kept to a minimum.

5. Barrier should extend to the top of bank. All ends should be secured firmly to the

shoreline.

6. Where significant flow is anticipated, a heavy woven pervious filter fabric may be

substituted.

D. Inlet Protection

1. Inlet protection shall be installed for all catch basins, drop inlets, drop structures,

inlets to drainage pipes, or other structures.

2. A 5-foot strip of sod shall be laid surrounding the perimeter of each structure.

3. A silt fence or haybale barrier shall be installed around the perimeter of the

sodded area.

E. Fabric Formed Concrete Erosion Protection

1. Fabric formed concrete erosion protection shall be installed as shown on the

drawings and in accordance with MANUFACTURER's recommendations.

F. Erosion Control and Excelsior Matting

1. Erosion control and excelsior matting blankets shall be installed as shown on the

drawings and as approved in accordance with MANUFACTURER's instructions.

The area to be covered shall be properly prepared before the blanket is applied.

When the blanket is unrolled, the netting shall be on top and the fibers in contact

with the soil over the entire area. The blankets shall be applied in the direction of

water flow, and stapled. Blankets shall be placed a minimum of three rows (of 4-

ft) wide (total approx. 12-fit width) and stapled together in accordance with

MANUFACTURER's instructions. Side overlaps shall be 6-in minimum. The

staples shall be made of wire, 0.091-in in diameter or greater, "U" shaped with

legs 10-in in length and a 1-1/2-in crown. The staples shall be driven vertically

into the ground, spaced approximately 2 linear feet apart, on each side, and one

row in the center alternately spaced between each side. Upper and lower ends of

the matting shall be buried to a depth of 4-in in a trench. The bottom of the fold

shall be 4-in below the ground surface. Staple on both sides of fold. Where the

matting must be cut or more than one roll length is required, turn down upper end

of downstream roll into a trench to a depth of 4-in. Overlap lower end of

upstream roll 4-inches past edge of downstream roll and staple.

2. To ensure full contact with soil surface, roll matting with a roller weighing 100

pounds per foot of width perpendicular to flow direction after placing matting,

stapling and seeding and sodding. Thoroughly inspect channel after completion.

Correct any areas where matting does not present a smooth surface in full contact

with the soil below.

3.3 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONS

A. Inspections

1. CONTRACTOR shall make a visual inspection of all sedimentation and erosion

control devices (including turbidity barriers) once per week and promptly after

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


every rainstorm. If such inspection reveals that additional measures are needed to

prevent movement of sediment to areas outside the limits of construction,

CONTRACTOR shall promptly install additional devices as needed. Sediment

controls in need of maintenance shall be repaired promptly.

2. CONTRACTOR shall keep a log of all inspections indicating the following:

a. Date and time of inspection

b. Inspector

c. Amount of rainfall

d. Erosion and sediment control devices inspected

e. Condition of sediment and erosion control devices

f. Repairs needed

g. Date repair is completed

B. Device Maintenance

1. Silt Fences

a. Remove accumulated sediment once it builds up to one-half of the height of

the fabric.

b. Replace damaged fabric, or patch with a 2-ft minimum overlap.

c. Make other repairs as necessary to ensure that the fence is filtering all

runoff directed to the fence.

2. Hay Bale Barriers


the hay bales.

b. Replace damaged hay bales.

c. Make other repairs as necessary to ensure that the hay bales are filtering all

runoff directed to the barrier.

3. Inlet Protection


the barrier.

b. Remove all sediment accumulated within the barrier and replace damaged

sod.

c. Make other repair as necessary to ensure that the inlet protection device is

operating properly.

4. Turbidity Barriers

a. Turbidity barriers shall be inspected on a daily basis.

b. Replace damaged fabric, or patch with a 2 foot minimum overlap.

c. Make other repairs as necessary to ensure barriers are effectively

maintaining turbidity levels outside of the barrier within regulatory limits.

3.4 TEMPORARY MULCHING

A. Apply temporary mulch to areas where rough grading has been completed but final

grading is not anticipated to begin within 21 days of the completion of rough grading.

If construction activities are not planned to resume for three months or longer, the

temporary seeding requirements shall be followed.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Straw mulch shall be applied at rate of 2,000 lbs/acre and tackified with latex acrylic

copolymer at a rate of 1 gal/1000 ft2 diluted in a ratio of 30 parts water to 1 part latex

acrylic copolymer mix.

C. After temporary mulching, traffic should be kept to a minimum, except for designated

temporary access roads.

3.5 REMOVAL AND FINAL CLEANUP

A. Once the site has been fully stabilized against erosion, remove sediment control devices

and all accumulated silt. Dispose of silt and waste materials in proper manner. Regrade

all areas disturbed during this process and stabilize against erosion with surfacing

materials as indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16 - 1

SECTION 32 12 16 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hot-mix asphalt paving.


1. Section 31 20 00 "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, fill material, unbound-

aggregate subbase and base courses, and aggregate pavement shoulders.

2. Section 32 13 73 "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at

pavement terminations.

3. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and

Bridge Construction (FDOT Specifications), latest edition.



1. Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not

limited to, the following:

a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location

of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.

b. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic

during installation period and for remainder of construction period.



1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

2. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by FDOT, of approval of each job mix proposed for the

Work.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

B. Material Certificates: For each paving material.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by

FDOT authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable

requirements of FDOT for asphalt paving work.

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard

specifications do not apply to this Section.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively

damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following

conditions are not met:

1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C).

2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C).

3. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at time

of placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Provide materials as required by the FDOT specifications for the asphalt pavement types

indicated on the plans. If no pavement type is indicated the pavement shall be Superpave SP

12.5.

2.2 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense-graded, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by FDOT State

Materials Office and complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where

Project is located.

2. Surface Course: Superpave SP 12.5 with no more than 20 percent Recycled Asphalt

Pavement (RAP).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.

B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft

pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15

tons (13.6 tonnes).


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as

determined by Engineer, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare surface in accordance with FDOT Specifications. In addition, immediately

before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces.

Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

3.3 PLACING HOT-MIX ASPHALT

A. Notify Engineer at least 48 hours prior to commencement of any paving operations.

B. Place asphalt in accordance with FDOT Specifications.

3.4 COMPACTION

A. General: Compact hot-mix paving in accordance with FDOT Specifications.

B. Compaction shall obtain an average density of 92 percent of reference laboratory density

according to FM 1-T 209 as modified by the FDOT Specifications, but not less than 90 percent

or greater than 100 percent.

3.5 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the

following tolerances:

1. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within

the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied

transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm).


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined

according to ASTM D 3549.

C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for

compliance with smoothness tolerances.

D. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and

compacted pavement according to FM 1-T 16.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from

four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared

according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples

according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of

installed pavement, with no fewer than three cores taken.

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear

method according to FM 1-T 238 and correlated with FM 1-T 166.

E. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements

indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.7 WASTE HANDLING

General: Handle asphalt-paving waste according to approved waste management plan.



BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 WHEEL STOPS 32 17 14 - 1

SECTION 32 17 14 - WHEEL STOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL






B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation

indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.

Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WHEEL STOPS

A. Concrete Wheel Stops: Precast, steel-reinforced, air-entrained concrete, 4000-psi minimum

compressive strength, 4-1/2 inches high by 9 inches wide by 72 inches long. Provide chamfered

corners, transverse drainage slots on underside, and a minimum of two factory-formed or -

drilled vertical holes through wheel stop for anchoring to substrate.

1. Surface Appearance: Free of pockets, sand streaks, honeycombs, and other obvious

defects. Corners shall be uniform, straight, and sharp.

2. Mounting Hardware: Galvanized-steel hardware as standard with wheel-stop

manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that pavement is in suitable condition to begin installation according to manufacturer's



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install wheel stops according to manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Install wheel stops in bed of adhesive before anchoring.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 WHEEL STOPS 32 17 14 - 2

C. Securely anchor wheel stops to pavement with hardware in each preformed vertical hole in

wheel stop as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Recess head of hardware beneath top

of wheel stop.



BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 - 1

SECTION 32 17 23 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes painted markings applied to asphalt and concrete pavement.



1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For interior, field-applied, pavement-marking paints,

documentation included printed statement of VOC content.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable

requirements of the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction of the Florida

Department of Transportation (FDOT) for pavement-marking work.

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard

specifications do not apply to this Section.


A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at

a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising for alkyd materials, and not

exceeding 95 deg F. Do not apply traffic stripes and markings when winds are sufficient to

cause spray dust.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. All traffic marking materials shall be one of the products listed on the FDOT Qualified Products

List.

2.2 PAVEMENT-MARKING PAINT

A. Pavement markings shall comply with the requirements of the FDOT Standard Specifications

for Road and Bridge Construction.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23 - 2

B. All stop bars, and stripes or markings located in the public right-of-way, regardless of location,

shall be thermoplastic. All other markings shall be painted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that pavement is dry and in suitable condition to begin pavement marking according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Proceed with pavement marking only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified

with Engineer.

B. Allow paving to age for a minimum of 30 days before starting pavement marking.

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

D. Apply markings in accordance with the requirements of the FDOT Standard Specifications for

Road and Bridge Construction.

3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect pavement markings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.



BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 1

SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Seeding.

2. Hydroseeding.

3. Sodding.

4. Plugging.

5. Sprigging.

6. Meadow grasses and wildflowers.

7. Turf renovation.

8. Erosion-control material(s).

9. Grass paving.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a

pest. Pesticides include insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and

molluscicides. They also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator,

defoliant, or desiccant.

C. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants,

animals, or people. Pests include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents

(gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

D. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified

with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top

surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.


A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.

B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture,

stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and

percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of

packaging.

1. Certification of each seed mixture for turf grass sod. Include identification of source and

name and telephone number of supplier.

C. Product Certificates: For fertilizers, from manufacturer.

D. Pesticides and Herbicides: Product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to

Project.


A. Maintenance Data: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of

turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful

turf establishment.

1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time

supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

2. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened

containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication

of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for

Turf grass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turf grass Sod Transplanting and Installation"

sections in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turf grass Sodding." Deliver sod within 24 hours

of harvesting and in time for planting promptly. Protect sod from breakage and drying.

C. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements,

or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials;

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff; and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,

water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with appropriate certificates.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be

obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TURF GRASS SOD

A. Turf grass Sod: Approved, complying with "Specifications for Turf grass Sod Materials" in

TPI's "Guideline Specifications to turf grass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density,

color, and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when

planted.

B. Turf grass Species: St. Augustine Palmetto.

2.2 FERTILIZERS

A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of

fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea

formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent

phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil

reports from a qualified soil-testing laboratory.

2.3 MULCHES

A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat,

rye, oats, or barley.

2.4 PESTICIDES

A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by the EPA, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as

required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless

authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling the germination

or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Nonselective): Effective for controlling weed growth

that has already germinated.


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting

installation and performance of the Work.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout,

concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,

paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within

a planting area.

2. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture

content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.


C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting

area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting

soil.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and

plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of

soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION

1. Placing Planting Soil: Place and mix planting soil in place over exposed subgrade Reduce

elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

B. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry

before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

C. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded

or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 SODDING

A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or

muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch

or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to soil

or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with soil, eliminate air


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between

pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.

1. Lay sod across slopes exceeding 1:3.

C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after

planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth

of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) below sod.

3.5 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. General: Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming,

replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll,

regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and re-mulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf.

Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes.

Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new

mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.

3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease.

Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of

pesticides and reduce hazards.

B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey

water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm).

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or

mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly

planted areas.

2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch (25 mm) per week unless rainfall

precipitation is adequate.

C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified

height without cutting more than one-third of grass height. Remove no more than one-third of

grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades

bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent

mowings to maintain the following grass height:

1. Mow turf grass to a height of 2 to 2½ inch.

D. Turf Post fertilization: Apply commercial fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry.

1. Use fertilizer that provides actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m)

to turf area.

3.6 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:


BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-

colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and

surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements, and continue

maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

3.7 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents according to

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations.

Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify

Owner before each application is performed.

B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Nonselective): Apply only as necessary to treat

already-germinated weeds and according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.8 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of

vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and

debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted

areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and

remove after plantings are established.

D. Remove non-degradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.

3.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape

Installer. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until

acceptable turf is established, but for not less than the following periods:

1. Sodded Turf: 30 days from date of Substantial Completion.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


111803.10 SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 33 32 13 - 1

SECTION 33 32 13 - SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the submersible non-clog pumps, related

piping, supports, and all other necessary appurtenances as shown on the drawings and

specified in these specifications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, technical data, and pump curves in accordance with Section

01 33 00. Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78

23.


A. All pumps shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. Non-clog Pumps shall be

KSB or approved equal.

1.4 PUMP WARRANTY

A. The pump manufacturer shall warrant the units being supplied to the owner against

defects in workmanship and material for a period of five (5) years. Warranty period

shall begin on the date of project substantial completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install three (3) submersible non-clog sewage pumps

for the existing lift station. Each pump shall be furnished with a stainless steel lifting

cable per manufacturers recommendations based off of wet well depth and a

minimum of 40-60 feet of hypalon jacketed type SPC cable, P-MSHA approved and

sized according to N.E.C. and ICEA standards.

2.2 REQUIREMENTS

Primary Design Point 814 GPM @ 75’ TDH

Minimum Efficiency at Primary Design Point 20%

Maximum Motor Horse Power 25

Voltage 460

Minimum Motor Service Factor/Insulation Class 1.15/ Class F

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



Minimum Pump Solids Passing Capability 3”

Motor Rating FM Explosion Proof

Minimum Motor Rating/Starts per Hour 15

Minimum Motor Bearing Life Guarantee 50,000 hours

(at any usable portion of the pump curve)

Pumps shall be KSB model # KRT E 100-253/184XEG-S or approved equal

2.3 PUMP DESIGN

A. The pumps shall be capable of handling raw, unscreened sewage. The discharge

connection elbow and discharge piping are existing. The pumps shall be

automatically connected to the discharge connection elbow when lowered into place,

and shall be easily removed for inspection or service. There shall be no need for

personnel to enter the wet well to gain access to the pumps. Sealing of the pumping

unit to the discharge connection elbow shall be accomplished by a simple linear

downward motion of the pump. A sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of

the pump unit. The entire weight of the pumping unit shall be guided by no less than

two guide bars and pressed tightly against the discharge connection elbow. No

portion of the pump or the guide support system other than the discharge connection

shall bear directly on the floor of the sump. The pump, with its appurtenances and

cable, shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of

watertight integrity to a depth of 65 ft.

2.4 PUMP CONSTRUCTION

A. Major pump components shall be of gray cast iron, Class 35B, with smooth surfaces

devoid of blow holes and other irregularities. Where watertight sealing is required,

o-rings made of nitrile rubber shall be used. All exposed nuts and bolts shall be of

AISI type stainless steel 316 construction. All surfaces coming into contact with

sewage, other than stainless steel, shall be protected by a factory applied spray

coating of acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primer with an epoxy resin paint finish

on the exterior of the pump. The impeller and seal plate must be constructed of

“wear resistant chromium white iron, no exceptions.

B. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted

with nitrile rubber o-rings. Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by

metal-to-metal contact between machine surfaces. This will result in controlled

compression of nitrile rubber o-rings without the requirement of a specific torque

limit. No secondary sealing compounds, rectangular gaskets, elliptical o-rings, grease

or other devices shall be used.

2.5 CABLE ENTRY SEAL

A. The cable entry seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to insure a

watertight and submersible seal. The cable entry shall be comprised of a single

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



cylindrical elastomer grommet, flanked by washers, all having a close tolerance fit

against the cable outside diameter and the entry inside diameter and compressed by

the entry body containing a strain relief function, separate from the function of

sealing the cable. The assembly shall bear against a shoulder in the pump top. The

cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be separated by a terminal board, which

shall isolate the motor interior from foreign material gaining access through the pump

top. Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems shall not be considered

acceptable.

2.6 MECHANICAL SEAL

A. Each pump shall be provided with a tandem mechanical rotating shaft seal system.

Seals shall run in an oil reservoir. Lapped seal faces must be hydro-dynamically

lubricated at a constant rate. The lower seal unit, between the pump and oil chamber,

shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion resistant

tungsten carbide ring. The upper seal unit, between the oil sump and motor housing,

shall contain one stationary and one positively driven rotating corrosion resistant

tungsten carbide ring. Each interface shall be held in contact by its own spring

system. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor adjustment but shall be

easily inspected and replaceable. The seals shall be capable of operating in either

clockwise or counter clockwise direction without damage or loss of seal.

B. The following seal types shall not be considered acceptable or equal to the dual

independent seal specified: shaft seal without positively driven rotating members, or

conventional double mechanical seals containing either a common single or double

spring acting between the upper and lower units. Cartridge type seal systems shall not

be acceptable.

C. Each pump shall be provided with an oil chamber for the shaft sealing system. The

oil chamber shall be designed to prevent overfilling and to provide lubricant

expansion capacity. The drain and inspection plug, with positive anti-leak seal shall

be easily accessible from the outside. The seal system shall not rely upon the pumped

media for lubrication. The motor shall be able to operate continuously while non-

submerged without damage while pumping under load.

2.7 BEARINGS

A. The pump shaft shall rotate on at least two permanently lubricated bearings with an

L-10 bearing life of 50,000 hours when operating at any usable portion of the pump

curve at maximum product speed. The upper motor bearing shall be a single ball type

bearing to handle radial loads. The lower bearing shall be a two row angular contact

ball bearing to handle the thrust and radial forces. Single row lower bearings shall not

be acceptable.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



2.8 PUMP SHAFT

A. Pump and motor shaft shall be the same unit. The pump shaft is an extension of the

motor shaft. Couplings shall not be acceptable. The pump shaft shall be carbon steel

C1035 and completely isolated from the pumped liquid or AISI type 431 stainless

steel.

2.9 IMPELLER

A. The impeller shall be of wear resistant chromium white iron, dynamically balanced,

double shrouded non-clogging design having a long thrulet without acute turns. The

impeller shall be capable of handling solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge and other

matter found in normal sewage applications. The impeller shall be of a full vane

design. The pump manufacturer shall, upon request, furnish mass moment of inertia

data for the proposed impeller. The impeller shall be capable of passing a minimum

3 inch solid sphere. The fit between the impeller and the shaft shall be a sliding fit

with one key.

2.10 VOLUTE

A. The pump volute shall be a single piece gray cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B, non-

concentric design with smooth passages of sufficient size to pass any solids that may

enter the impeller. Minimum inlet and discharge size shall be as specified.

B. A wear ring shall be installed to provide efficient sealing between the volute and

impeller. The wear ring shall be a stationary ring made of nitrile rubber molded with

a steel ring insert, which is drive fitted to the volute inlet and rotating stainless steel

AISI 316 ring which is drive fitted to the impeller skirt.

2.11 MOTOR DESIGN

A. The pump motor shall be a NEMA H design, induction type with a squirrel cage

rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled, watertight chamber. The stator windings shall be insulated with moisture resistant Class F insulation rated for 180°C (356°F). The stator shall be heat-shrink fitted into the cast iron stator housing. The use of multiple step dip and bake-type stator insulation process is not acceptable. The use of bolts, pins or other fastening devices requiring penetration of the stator housing is not acceptable. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty handling pumped media of 40°C (104°F) and capable of up to 15 evenly spaced starts per hour. The rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be made of cast aluminum. Thermal switches set to open at 125°C (260°F) shall be embedded in the stator lead coils to monitor the temperature of each phase winding. These thermal switches shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor overload protection and shall be connected to the control panel. The junction chamber shall be sealed off from the stator housing and shall contain a terminal board for connection of power and pilot sensor cables using threaded compression type terminals. The use of wire nuts or crimp-type connectors is not acceptable. The motor and the pump shall be produced by the same manufacturer.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



B. The combined service factor (combined effect of voltage, frequency and specific

gravity) shall be a minimum of 1.15. The motor shall have a voltage tolerance of

plus or minus 10%. The motor shall be designed for operation up to 40°C (104°F)

ambient and with a temperature rise not to exceed 80°C. A performance chart shall

be provided upon request showing curves for torque, current, power factor,

input/output kW and efficiency. This chart shall also include data on starting and no-

load characteristics.

C. The power cable shall be sized according to the NEC and ICEA standards and shall

be of sufficient length to reach the junction box without the need of any splices. The

outer jacket of the cable shall be oil resistant chloroprene rubber. The motor and

cable shall be capable of continuous submergence underwater without loss of

watertight integrity to a depth of 65 feet.

D. All pump motors shall be FM approved (Explosion Proof) rated for use in Class 1,

Groups C & D, Division 1 hazardous locations.

E. The motor horsepower shall be adequate so that the pump is non-overloading

throughout the entire pump performance curve from shut-off through run-out.

2.12 PROTECTION

A. All stators shall incorporate thermal switches in series to monitor the temperature of

each phase of the winding. Should high temperature occur, the thermal switches shall

open, stop the motor, and activate an alarm.

B. A leakage sensor shall be provided to detect water in the stator chamber or pump seal

chamber. The Float Leakage Sensor (FLS), a small float switch, shall be used to

detect the presence of water in the stator chamber. When activated, the FLS will stop

the motor and activate an alarm.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall install equipment as required by the manufacturer's written

installation instructions and approved shop drawings unless otherwise directed by the

Engineer.

B. Excess motor and control wire shall be carefully coiled and hung inside the wet well.

These wires shall not be cut and all identification tags shall be in place. Cables shall

be supported with S.S. basket weave type strain reliefs hung in wet well and be

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



routed in a manner that will not interfere with access to any equipment or terminals in

the control panels.

3.2 SPARE PARTS

A. The following spare parts shall be supplied by the contractor for each of the pump

stations:

(1) Set of upper and lower shaft seals

(1) Set of upper and lower bearings

(1) O-ring kit

(1) Volute wear ring

(1) Impeller wear ring

(1) Oil inspection port o-ring

3.3 PUMP TEST

A. The pump manufacturer shall perform the following inspections and tests on each

pump before shipment from factory:

1. Impeller, motor rating and electrical connections shall first be checked for

compliance to the customer's purchase order.

2. A motor and cable insulation test for moisture content or insulation defects

shall be made.

3. Prior to submergence, the pump shall be run dry to establish correct rotation

and mechanical integrity.

4. The pump shall be run for 30 minutes submerged under a minimum of six (6)

feet under water.

5. After operational test No. 4, the insulation test (No. 2) is to be performed

again.

B. A written report stating the foregoing steps have been done shall be supplied with

each pump at the time of shipment upon request.

C. The pump cable end will be sealed with a high quality protective covering, to make it

impervious to moisture or water seepage prior to electrical installation.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


111803.10 LIFT STATION CONTROL PANELS AND INSTRUMENTS 33 32 14 - 1

SECTION 33 32 14 – LIFT STATION CONTROL PANELS AND INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE

The Contractor shall furnish, install, test, and place into service the electrical control

panel and control system components related to the in-plant pump station.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTROL PANELS

A. The control panel shall be NEMA 4X SS enclosure with powder coated white

finish. All cabinet hardware shall be stainless steel. The cabinet shall be sized to

accommodate the equipment required, plus 25% space.

B. Nameplates shall be furnished for the front panel mounted instrument. All

instruments and components shall be tagged on rear with embossed plastic tape

labels.

C. Wiring, where required, shall be general-purpose open type, neatly bundled and

laced or installed in plastic wiring troughs. Wire shall be stranded No. 14 AWG

minimum, with thermoplastic insulation rated for 600V and 90 degrees.

F. All wires entering and leaving the panel shall be terminated at barrier type

terminal strips with surge protection. All terminals shall be tagged and identified.

G. All power, analog, and digital signals shall be protected from surges at the control

panel with suitable surge suppression devices. Panel mounted surge protection

shall be DIN rail mounted with plug in style protectors to allow for easy

replacement. In addition, surge protection devices shall have indicator lights to

indicate if the unit is still operational. Surge suppression shall be manufactured by

Phoenix Contract or acceptable equivalent.

H. All piping and/or wiring installation shall be executed in a workmanlike manner,

and shall be grouped, bundled, supported and routed horizontally and vertically, to

provide a neat appearance.

I. The completed panel shall be factory tested prior to shipment. The factory test

results shall be provided to the Engineer prior to shipment. Field installation by

the Contractor shall consist only of setting the panel in place and making

necessary electrical connections.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020



J. The control panel shall be built in UL approved production in accordance with UL

Guidelines and Standards. The control panel shall bear a UL label. The panel

production facility shall have the following UL certifications: UL 508.

2.2 PANEL MOUNTED DEVICES

A. Indicating lights to be heavy duty, push-to-test type, oil tight, industrial type with

integral transformer for 120 VAC applications. Lenses shall be colored as noted

on drawings or as required by the equipment manufacturers if not specified on the

drawings. Legend plates shall be factory engraved as required. Lights shall be

Allen-Bradley 800H or acceptable equivalent.

B. Momentary pushbuttons to be heavy duty, oil tight, industrial type with full guard

and momentary contact rated at 10 Amps continuous at 120 Vac. Legend plates

shall be factory engraved as required. Pushbutton shall be Allen-Bradley 800H or

acceptable equivalent.

B. Selector switches, on/off and H.O.A. to be heavy duty, oil tight, industrial type

with contact rated at 120 VAC, 10 amps continuous service. Legend plates shall

be factory engraved as required. Switches shall be Allen-Bradley 800H or

acceptable equivalent.

C. All relays shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 750, or acceptable equivalent. Units

shall be hermetically sealed in metal can with octal plug. Contacts to be

120Vac/60Hz at 10 amps. Unit to incorporate lamp in parallel with relay coil.

All relays to be DPDT. Provide hold down clamps for all relays, and MOV

suppressor module.

D. The panel shall be provided with spare parts, one part for each type or model used.

Multiple panels or multiple items need not exceed 10% of the products installed

within the panel. Required spares: 1 combination starter, 2 sets of fuses, 1 set of

circuit breakers and 2 float switches.

E. All exterior control panels designed for exterior mounting shall be provided with

equipment rated for 60º Celsius.

F. Laminated schematics shall be provided inside each control panel for maintenance

purposes.

G. All motor starters shall be manufactured by Allen-Bradley or acceptable

equivalent. All starters shall be across the line type, NEMA rated. No IEC

devices shall be allowed.

H. H-O-A selector switches are required for each motor starter.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020



I. Runtime meters and indicator lights that a motor starter is running are required for

all motor starters.

J. Provide 480V primary / 120V secondary control power transformer mounted

within enclosure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of the service personnel during

construction, testing, and acceptance of the work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. All equipment and devices for the work shall be installed in the locations shown

on the drawings, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and in

compliance with the requirements of these specifications.

3.3 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Include all changes and/or alterations in the control panels prior to final inspection

and acceptance by the owner.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 05 13.54 - 1

SECTION 40 05 13.54 - DUCTILE IRON PROCESS PIPE AND FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals

required to install ductile iron pipe and fittings complete, tested, and ready for use, as

shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein.

1.2 RELATED WORK (REQUIREMENTS)

A. Construction Drawings, Agreement Declarations, Exhibits and other Technical

Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, within twenty (20) calendar days

after receipt of Notice to Proceed, a list of materials to be furnished, and the names of

the suppliers and the date of delivery of materials to the site.

B. Submit shop drawings to the ENGINEER for review, showing the complete laying plan

of all pipe, including all fittings, adapters, valves, and specials along with the

MANUFACTURER's drawings and specifications indicating complete details of all

items. The pipe details shall include a pipe class laying schedule which specifies pipe

class, class coding, joints, station limits, and transition stations, and a list of abbreviated

terms with their full meaning. The pipe class laying schedule shall also show the

required bedding class as required for the pipes pressure class and bury depth according

to the specifications herein. The CONTRACTOR shall provide details of fittings to be

furnished. The above shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval before

fabrication and shipment of these items. The locations of all pipes shall conform to the

locations indicated on the Drawings. In most cases, a certain amount of flexibility in

the positioning of pipes will be allowed. Horizontal and vertical deflections may

require beveled, special deflection; or short pipes. The deflections at joints shall not

exceed 75 percent of that recommended by the MANUFACTURER.

C. Furnish in duplicate to the ENGINEER, prior to each shipment of pipe, submit

MANUFACTURER’s certification and certified test reports that the pipe and linings

and coating for this contract was manufactured and tested in accordance with the ASTM

and ANSI/AWWA Standards specified herein.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be furnished by MANUFACTURER’s who are

fully experienced in the U.S. for the manufacture of the material to be furnished. The

pipe and fittings shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the

best practices and methods and shall comply with these Specifications.


A. All ductile-iron pipe and fittings shall be from a single MANUFACTURER. All

ductile-iron pipe to be installed under this contract may be inspected at the foundry for

compliance with these specifications by an independent testing laboratory provided by

the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall require the MANUFACTURER's cooperation

in these inspections. The cost of foundry inspection of all pipe approved for this

contract will be borne by the OWNER.

B. Inspection of the pipe will also be made by the ENGINEER or other representatives of

the OWNER after delivery. The pipe shall be subject to rejection at any time on

account of failure to meet any of the specification requirements, even though pipes may

have been accepted as satisfactory at the place of manufacture. Pipe rejected after

delivery shall be marked for identification and shall immediately be removed from the

job.

C. Each joint of ductile iron pipe 30” and larger shall be hydrostatically tested at the point

of manufacture to 75% of the 42,000 psi minimum yield strength for ductile iron pipe

for a duration of at least ten (10) seconds. Testing may be performed prior to

machining bell and spigot. Failure of ductile iron pipe shall be defined as any rupture

of pipe wall. Certified test certificates shall be furnished in duplicate to the

ENGINEER prior to time of shipment. The standard 500 psi hydro test will be

performed on 24” and smaller pipe.

1.6 CONNECTION TO EXISTING LINES

A. For connections to the existing lines to which the piping of this Contract must connect,

the following work shall be performed:

1. Exposed buried lines to confirm or determine end connection, pipe material, and

diameter.

2. Furnish and install appropriate piping and make proper connections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings 3-inches through 54-inches for buried service shall meet

the following requirements:

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI A21.51 and AWWA C151. Ductile iron

pipe shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi with a minimum yield

strength of 42,000 psi and a minimum elongation of 10 percent. Thickness of

pipe supplied shall not be less than Pressure Class 150 unless specifically

indicated on the Drawings or specified herein.

2. Unrestrained joint pipe shall be supplied in lengths not in excess of 20 feet.

Unrestrained joint pipe shall be either the rubber-ring type, push-on joint, or

standard mechanical joint pipe as manufactured by the American Cast Iron Pipe

Co., U.S. Pipe and Foundry, or equal.

3. Rubber gaskets shall conform to ANSI A21.11 for mechanical and push-on type

joints. Mechanical joint fittings and restrained joint pipe shall be furnished with

sufficient quantities of accessories as required for each joint.

4. All below ground fittings shall be restrained mechanical or restrained push-on

joints and shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of

ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51, C110/A21.10, ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 or

C111/A21.11 where applicable. Push-on joints for such pipe shall be in

accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Pipe thickness shall be designed

in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50 and C151/A21.51. Restrained

joints shall be designed to withstand vertical and longitudinal forces and be

capable of holding against withdrawal with no axial movement resulting from an

internal hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi.

5. Restrained pipe joints that achieve restraint by incorporating cut out sections in

the wall of the pipe shall have a minimum wall thickness at the point of cut out

that corresponds with the minimum specified wall thickness for the rest of the

pipe.

6. Restrained push-on type pipe joints and fittings shall be suitable for 150 psi

working pressure for purpose as specified above and fabricated of heavy section

ductile iron casting. Gaskets shall meet the material requirements of

ANSI/AWWA C111 for mechanical joint gaskets. Bolts and nuts on mechanical

joint pipe and fittings, below ground shall be low alloy, high strength steel equal

to "Corten" conforming to ANSI A21.11 and A21.15 for Class 125 ANSI B16.1

for the purpose intended. Bolts and nuts on flanged joint pipe and fittings shall be

316 stainless steel. Restrained push-on type joints and fittings for buried pressure

piping shall be as listed below:

a. American Cast Iron Pipe – Flex Ring: 4” – 48”

b. American Cast Iron Pipe – Lok Ring: 42” – 64”

c. U.S. Pipe and Foundry – TR Flex: 4” – 64”

d. U.S. Pipe and Foundry -- U.S. Pipe HP Lok: 30"-64"

e. Engineer Approved Equal

The minimum number of restrained joints required for resisting forces at fittings

and changes in direction of pipe shall be determined from the length of restrained

pipe on each side of fittings and changes in direction necessary to develop ade-

quate resisting friction with the soil as shown on the drawings.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


7. Adapters to connect ductile iron fittings to pipe or fittings of dissimilar materials

shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the pipe

MANUFACTURER recommendations, and as approved by the ENGINEER.

8. Pipe outlets where shown shall be made with tees, or factory welded-on outlets

for above ground piping. Welded-on outlets shall be ductile iron, factory welded

on ductile iron pipe having a minimum Pressure Class 250 for 16-inch to 36-inch

sizes and Pressure Class 250 for 42-inch to 64-inch sizes.

9. Flexible joint pipe shall be ball and socket type self-restraining without the use of

bolts and designed for a maximum working pressure of 250 psi having a class

rating as recommended by the MANUFACTURER. Boltless restraint shall be

achieved by external lugs interlocked into a retainer gland. Each joint shall be

capable of a maximum deflection of 15 deg. Flexible joint pipe shall be USIFLEX

by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company, Flex-Lok Boltless Ball Joint Pipe by

American Cast Iron Pipe Company or equal. Subaqueous canal crossings shall be

either flexible ball-and-joint pipe or Class 53 factory restrained joint pipe, fitting

and accessories.

10. All fittings shall be cast and machined at one foundry location to assure quality

control and test data. The standard grade of iron shall be 70-50-05. Analyses of

the ductile iron shall be made with the chemical limits set in this standard (C110

and/or C153). Results of chemical analyses shall be provided to the ENGINEER

as part of the shop drawings.

B. Ductile iron pipe and fittings 3-inches through 54-inches for above ground service or in

below ground concrete pits shall meet the following requirements:

1. Ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI A21.51 and AWWA C151. Thickness of

pipe shall be a minimum of Class 53 for all sizes of flanged pipe.

2. Flanged ductile-iron pipe shall conform to current AWWA/ANSI Specification

C115/A21.15 and C110/A21.10 with factory-applied screwed long hub flanges

except as otherwise specified hereinafter. Flanges shall be fully machined faced

and drilled after being screwed tight on the pipe, with flanges true to 90 degrees

with the pipe axis and shall be flush with end of pipe conforming to ANSI B61.1,

125 pound std. or Class 250, for the purpose intended. No welding of flanges or

accessories in the field will be acceptable.

3. Wall sleeve with integral water stops, or wall pipe casings with integral thrust

collars shall be continuously welded on each side of the waterstop or thrust collar

and shall be of the sizes and types as shown on the Drawings. Wall sleeves,

where specified, shall be fabricated of Schedule 40 Type 304 stainless steel or

PVC and shall have integral water stops continuously welded on each side of the

waterstop. Seal strips for wall shall be included with all sleeves and shall be Link

Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., Wayne, Michigan, or equal. For wall

sleeves over 36 inches in diameter dual sealstrips shall be provided.

4. Full face type 1/16-inch thick red rubber ring gaskets shall conform to ANSI

A21.11. Ring gaskets shall be of approved composition suitable for the required

service.

5. Pipe and fittings exposed to view in the finished work and to be exterior painted

shall not receive the standard tar or asphalt coat on the outside surfaces but shall

be shop primed on the outside. Should portions of the pipe inadvertently be given

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


the outside bituminous coating instead of the rust inhibitive primer as required for

exposed piping the surfaces shall be sealed with a non-bleeding sealer coat

compatible with the specified primer as evidenced by the Manufacturer’s

published information. Sealing shall be a part of the work of this section.

6. Bolts and nuts on flanged pipe and fittings shall be 316 stainless steel and shall be

drilled to match ANSI B16.1 Class 125 or 250 flanges for the purpose intended.

2.2 LINING AND COATINGS

A. All ductile iron pipe and fittings for wastewater service (including but not limited to raw

sewage lines, and all process lines up to the filters including pressure and gravity mains,

unless otherwise noted, shall have an epoxy phenolic lining on the interior and

bituminous coating on the exterior except for 6 inches back from the spigot end. The

bituminous coating shall not be applied to the first 6 inches of the exterior of the spigot

ends. All pipe and fittings shall be delivered to the application facility without asphalt,

cement lining, or any other lining on the interior surface. Because removal of old

linings may not be possible, the intent of this specification is that the entire interior of

the pipe and fittings shall be as cast without ever having been lined with any substance

prior to the application of the specified lining. Any pipe or fittings furnished for this

project must not have been lined prior to the awarding of the contract for this project.

1. Lining Material - Interior coating shall be Permox-CTF as manufactured by

Permox or Series 431 Perma-Shield as manufactured by Tnemec. Interior lining

shall be applied per manufacturer specifications.

2. The following are the minimum requirements to be met:

a. A permeability rating of zero permeance when a film of at least 40 mils is

tested according to ASTM D1653 or a permeability rating of 0.0 perms

when measured using Method A of ASTM E66 procedure A with a test

duration of 42 days.

b. The material shall contain at least 20 percent by volume of ceramic quartz

pigment in the dried film.

c. The following test and rating/method must be run on ductile iron panels

with the results certified by the lining material supplier of the material being

submitted.

1) Direct Impact: ASTM D2794

2) 3% Sulfuric Acid Immersion @ 120/F: ASTM D714

3) 25% Sodium Hydroxide Immersion @ 140/ F: ASTM D714

4) Deionized Water Immersion @ 160/ F: ASTM D714

5) Moisture and Ultraviolet Light Cycle 8 Hours Light / 4 Hours 100%

Humidity: ASTM G5377

3. Application of Lining – The lining shall be applied by a competent firm with at

least a five-year history of applying linings to the interior of ductile pipe and

fittings.

a. Surface Preparation: Prior to abrasive blasting the entire area which will

receive the protective compound shall be inspected for oil, grease, etc. Any

areas where oil, grease, or any substance which can be removed by solvent

is present shall be solvent cleaned using the guidelines outlined in

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


SSPC-SP-1 Solvent Cleaning. After the surface has been made free of

grease, oil, or other substances, all areas which are to receive the protective

compounds shall be abrasive blasted using compressed air nozzles with

sand or grit abrasive media. The blast media shall strike 100 percent of the

surface area at sufficient force to remove rust and oxides. The entire

surface to be lined shall be struck with the blast media so that all rust, loose,

oxides, etc., are removed from the surface. Only slight stains and specks of

tightly adhering oxides may be left on the surface. Any area where rust

appears before coating must be re-blasted to remove all rust.

b. Lining: After surface preparation and within 8 hours of surface preparation

of the barrel of the pipe from the inside shoulder of the gasket groove to the

end of the interior spigot shall receive a minimum coating of 40 mils dry

film thickness of the protective lining. If flange fittings or pipe are included

in the project the linings must not be used on the face of the flange;

however, full face gaskets must be used to protect the ends of the pipe. All

fittings shall be lined with a minimum of 40 mils of the protective lining.

Push-on type fittings shall be lined from the gasket groove to the gasket

groove. The 40 mils system shall not be applied in the gasket grooves.

c. Coating of Gasket Groove and Spigot Ends: Due to the tolerances involved,

the gasket groove and spigot end up to 6 inches back from the end of the

spigot end must be coated with a minimum of 10 mils dry of coating. This

coating shall be applied by brush to ensure coverage. Care should be taken

that the coating is smooth without excess buildup in the gasket groove or on

the spigot end. All materials for the gasket groove and spigot end shall be

applied after the application of the lining.

d. Number of Coats: The number of coats of lining material applied shall be

as recommended by the lining MANUFACTURER. However, in no case

shall the material be applied above the dry thickness per coat recommended

by the lining MANUFACTURER in printed literature. The time between

coats shall never exceed that time recommended by the lining material

MANUFACTURER. If at any time the lining must be recoated beyond the

lining material MANUFACTURER's recommended recoat time, the surface

of the existing lining shall be roughened sufficiently to prevent

delamination between coats.

4. Inspection:

a. All pipe shall be checked for thickness using a magnetic film thickness

gauge. The thickness testing shall be done using the method outlined in

SSPC-PA-2 film thickness testing.

b. The barrel of all pipe and fittings shall be pinhole detected with a

nondestructive 2,500-volt pinhole test.

c. Each pipe joint and fitting shall be marked with the date of application of

the lining system and with its numerical sequence of application on that

date.

5. Certification: The pipe or fitting MANUFACTURER must supply a certificate

attesting to the fact that the Applicator met the requirements of this specification,

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


that the material used was as specified, and that the material was applied as

required by the specification.

6. Repair: All pinholes and damaged lined areas shall be repaired in accordance

with written repair procedure furnished by the MANUFACTURER of the lining

material so that the repaired area is equal in performance to the undamaged lined

areas.

7. Pipe and fittings exposed to view in the finished work and to be painted shall not

receive the standard tar or asphalt coat on the outside surfaces but shall be shop

primed on the outside. Should portions of the pipe inadvertently be given the

outside bituminous coating instead of the rust inhibitive primer as required for

exposed piping the surfaces shall be sealed with a non-bleeding sealer coat

compatible with the specified primer as evidenced by the Manufacture’s

published information. Sealing shall be a part of the work of this section.

8. All exposed pipe and fittings shall be painted with the Owner’s standard color for

each type of process pipe and labeled with the type of process flow (WAS, RAS,

MLR, AIR, etc.) along with a flow directional arrow at a maximum spacing of

every 10 feet in plain view.

2.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Each length of pipe and each fitting shall be marked with the name of the

MANUFACTURER, size, and class. All gaskets shall be marked with the name of the

MANUFACTURER, size, and proper insertion directions.

B. All above and below ground ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have an identification

color code.

1. Raw sewage force mains and gravity sewer pipe - Green.

2. Reclaimed Water pipe – Purple.

3. Reject Effluent – Green

C. All buried ductile iron pipe shall be painted along its entire length with 2-inch stripes on

at least three quarter points for pipe sizes 12-inches and larger.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLING DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. All mains shall be installed in accordance with recommendations of the pipe

MANUFACTURER and as specified herein.

B. Care shall be taken in the handling, storage, and installation of pipe and fittings to pre-

vent injury to the pipe or coatings. All pipe and fittings shall be examined before

installing, and no pipe shall be installed which is found to be defective. Pipe or fittings

shall not be dropped. All damage to the pipe coatings shall be repaired according to the

MANUFACTURER's recommendations.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


C. All pipe and fittings shall be kept clean and shall be thoroughly cleaned before

installation.

D. Pipe shall be laid to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings with bedding and

backfill as shown on the Drawings. Blocking under the pipe will not be permitted.

E. When installation is not in progress, including lunchtime, or the potential exists for dirt

of debris to enter the pipe, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed with watertight

plugs or other approved means.

F. Under no circumstances shall the pipe or accessories be dropped into the trench.

G. All plugs, caps, bends and other locations where unbalanced forces exist shall be

anchored by restrained joints. The length of pipe for which restrained joints shall be

used are shown on the Drawings.

H. In all cases where ductile iron pipe is installed, a marking tape shall be located above

the top of the pipe.

I. When cutting pipe is required, the cutting shall be done by machine, leaving a smooth

cut at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Cut ends of pipe to be jointed with a bell shall

be beveled to conform to the manufactured spigot end. Cement lining shall be

undamaged.

3.2 PUSH-ON JOINTS

A. Push-on joints shall be made in accordance with the MANUFACTURER's instructions.

Pipe shall be laid with bell ends looking ahead. A rubber gasket shall be inserted in the

groove of the bell end of the pipe, and the joint surfaces cleaned and lubricated. The

plain end of the pipe to be laid shall then be aligned and inserted in the bell of the pipe

to which it is to be joined, and pushed home with a jack or by other means. After

joining the pipe, a metal feeler shall be used to make certain that the rubber gasket is

correctly located.

3.3 MECHANICAL JOINTS

A. Thoroughly clean and lubricate the joint surfaces and rubber gasket with soapy water

before assembly. Bolts shall be tightened to the specified torques. Under no conditions

shall extension wrenches or pipe over handle of ordinary ratchet wrench be used to

secure greater leverage.

3.4 FLANGED JOINTS

A. Flanged joints shall be installed where shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

Extreme care shall be exercised to insure that there is no restraint on opposite ends of

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


pipe or fitting which will prevent uniform gasket compression, cause unnecessary

stress, bending or torsional strains to flanges or flanged fittings. Adjoining push-on

joints shall not be assembled until flanged joints have been tightened. Bolts shall be

tightened alternately and evenly.

3.5 RESTRAINED JOINTS

A. Restrained joints shall be installed at all fittings as shown on the Drawings and specified

herein. The joint assemblies shall be made in accordance with the MANUFACTURER's

recommendations. After installation, apply a heavy bitumastic coating to all bolts, nuts

and accessories.

3.6 FLEXIBLE JOINT PIPE

A. The flexible joint pipe shall be installed in accordance with the MANUFACTURER's

recommendations. In addition, the installed deflection shall be limited to 15 deg. per

joint and provisions shall be made where required to prevent flotation or buoyancy of

the pipe.

3.7 SLEEVE TYPE COUPLINGS

A. Couplings shall be installed where shown. Couplings shall not be assembled until

adjoining push-on joints have been assembled. After installation, apply a heavy

bitumastic coating to all bolts, nuts and accessories.

3.8 CLEANING

A. At the conclusion of the work the CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean all of the new

pipelines.

END OF SECTION 40 05 13.54

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLANT PIPING 40 05 13.55 - 1

SECTION 40 05 13.55 – POLY (VINYL CHLORIDE) (PVC) PLANT PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings for potable and reuse water line.

2. Underground pipe markers.

3. Bedding and cover materials.


1. Construction Drawings, Agreement Declarations, Exhibits and other Technical Specification

Sections apply to this Section.


A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe

(SDR Series).

2. ASTM D3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible

Elastomeric Seals.

3. ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and

Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

4. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic

Pipe.

B. American Water Works Association:

1. AWWA C605 - Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and

Fittings for Water.

2. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings, 4 In.

Through 12 In. (100 mm Through 300 mm), for Water Transmission and Distribution.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.

C. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and inspections.

D. Preconstruction Photographs:

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Submit digital files of colored photographs of Work areas and material storage areas.


A. Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, thrust

restraints, and invert elevations.

C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted

utilities.


A. Valves: Mark valve body with manufacturer's name and pressure rating.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and

protecting products.

B. Block individual and stockpiled pipe lengths to prevent moving.

C. Do not place pipe or pipe materials on private property or in areas obstructing pedestrian or

vehicle traffic.

D. Store PVC materials out of sunlight.

1.7 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements:

1. Verify field measurements prior to ordering pipe.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER PIPING

A. PVC:

1. Comply with AWWA C900, Class 165.

2. Fittings: Comply with AWWA C153.

a. Coating and Linings:

1) Bituminous Coating: Comply with AWWA C110

2) Cement Mortar Lining: Comply with AWWA C104, double thickness

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3. Joints:

a. Mechanical and Push on Joints: Comply with AWWA C111.

2.2 UNDERGROUND PIPE MARKERS

A. Trace Wire:

1. Electronic detection materials for nonconductive piping products.

2. Unshielded, 10 AWG, THWN-insulated copper wire.

3. Conductive tape.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Bedding and Cover:

1. Soil Backfill from above Pipe to Finish Grade:

a. Soil Type S1.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Restrained Joints: As specified in Drawing details.

B. Steel Rods, Bolt, Lugs, and Brackets:

1. Comply with ASTM A36 (A36M) or ASTM A307.

2. Grade A carbon steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution: Requirements for installation examination.

B. Verify that existing utility water main size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Section 01 73 00 - Execution: Requirements for installation preparation.

B. Preconstruction Site Photos:

1. Take photographs along centerline of proposed pipe trench; minimum one photograph for

each 100 feet (15 m) of pipe trench.

2. Show mailboxes, curbing, lawns, driveways, signs, culverts, and other existing Site features.

3. Include Project description, date taken, and sequential number on back of each photograph.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


C. Pipe Cutting:

1. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, and remove burrs.

2. Use only equipment specifically designed for pipe cutting; use of chisels or hand saws is not

permitted.

3. Grind edges smooth with beveled end for push-on connections.

D. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

E. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Bedding:

1. Excavation:

a. Excavate pipe trench as specified in Section 31 23 17 - Trenching for Work of this

Section.

b. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations as indicated on

Drawings.

2. Dewater excavations to maintain dry conditions and to preserve final grades at bottom of

excavation.

3. Provide sheeting and shoring as specified in Section 31 23 17 - Trenching.

B. Piping:

1. Install pipe according to AWWA C605.

2. Handle and assemble pipe according to manufacturer instructions and as indicated on

Drawings.

3. Steel Rods, Bolt, Lugs, and Brackets: Coat buried steel with one coat of coal tar coating

before backfilling.

4. Maintain 6 feet (3 m) horizontal separation of water main from sewer piping according to

F.A.C. 62-555.314.

5. Prevent foreign material from entering pipe during placement.

6. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.

7. Close pipe openings with watertight plugs during Work stoppages.

8. Cover:

a. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 3 feet of cover.

b. Measure depth of cover from final surface grade to top of pipe barrel.

9. Pipe Markers:

a. Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe.

b. Coordinate with trench Work as specified in Section 31 23 17 - Trenching.

C. Backfilling:

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill in minimum lifts of 6 inches, tamp in

place, and compact to 95 percent of maximum density.

2. Place and compact material immediately adjacent to pipes to avoid damage to pipe and

prevent pipe misalignment.

3. Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction

density.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Install pipe to indicated elevation within tolerance of 5/8 inch (20 mm).


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,

and balancing.

B. Pressure test system according to AWWA C600 and following:

1. Test Pressure: Not less than 150 psi.

2. Conduct hydrostatic test for at least two hours.

3. Slowly fill section to be tested with water; expel air from piping at high points. Install

corporation cocks at high points. Close air vents and corporation cocks after air is expelled.

Raise pressure to specified test pressure.

4. Observe joints, fittings, and valves under test. Remove and renew cracked pipes, joints,

fittings, and valves showing visible leakage. Retest.

5. Correct visible deficiencies and continue testing at same test pressure for additional two

hours to determine leakage rate. Maintain pressure within plus or minus 5 psi (34.4 kPa) of

test pressure. Leakage is defined as quantity of water supplied to piping necessary to

maintain test pressure during period of test.

6. Compute maximum allowable leakage using following formula: L = SD x sqrt(P)/C L = testing allowance, gph (L/h) S = length of pipe tested, feet (m) D = nominal diameter of pipe, inches (mm) P = average test pressure during hydrostatic test, psig (kPa) C = 148,000 (794 797)

When pipe under test contains sections of various diameters, calculate allowable leakage from sum of computed leakage for each size.

7. Leakage:

a. If test of pipe indicates leakage greater than allowed, locate source of leakage, make

corrections, and retest until leakage is within allowable limits.

b. Correct visible leaks regardless of quantity of leakage.

C. Compaction Testing for Bedding: Comply with ASTM D1557.

D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace, and retest.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 GATE VALVES 40 05 23.15 - 1

SECTION 40 05 23.15 - GATE VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient-seated gate valves.

2. General duty gate valves smaller than 3 inches.


A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:

1. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

2. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24 - Metric/Inch

Standard.

3. ASME B16.42 - Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150 and 300.

B. ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).

C. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe

Fittings.

2. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

3. ASTM B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General

Applications.

4. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds

and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

D. American Water Works Association:

1. AWWA C500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.

2. AWWA C509 - Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.

E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:

1. MSS SP-70 - Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

2. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Product Data:

1. Submit catalog information, indicating materials of construction and compliance with

indicated standards.

C. Source Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT-SEATED GATE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. American Flow Control.

2. Clow

3. Kennedy

4. M&H

5. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

6. Furnish materials according to Wakulla standards.

B. Description:

1. AWWA C509 3” -12”.

2. AWWA C515 14” – 16”

3. Minimum Working Pressure: 250 psig at 100 degrees F.

4. Maximum Fluid Temperature: 300 degrees F.

5. End Connections: ASME B16.1, ASME B16.5, ASME B16.42, flanged or Mechanical joint.

C. Operation:

1. Non-rising stem 3” to 30” w/ nut for buried applications.

2. Non-rising stem 36” to 48” w/ bevel gear operator and nut for buried applications

3. Non-rising stem 2” to 20” w/ handwheel for exposed applications.

4. Non-rising stem 24” to 48” w/ bevel gear operator and removable handwheel for exposed

applications. Handwheel attached to nut with captive cotter pin.

D. Materials:

1. Wedge: Resilient ASTM A126, cast iron, fully encapsulated with Buna-N.

2. Body and Disc: ASTM A126, cast iron, Buna-N coated.

3. Stem, Stem Nuts, Glands, and Bushings: ASTM B584, bronze.

4. Connecting Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel.

2.2 GENERAL-DUTY GATE VALVES - SMALLER THAN 3 INCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Furnish materials according to Wakulla standards.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. 2 inches and Smaller:

1. MSS SP 80, Class 150.

2. Body and Trim: ASTM B62, bronze.

3. Bonnet: Threaded or Union.

4. Operation: Handwheel.

5. Inside screw with back-seating stem.

6. Wedge Disc: Solid; ASTM B62, bronze.

7. Alloy seat rings.

8. End Connections: Solder or threaded.

C. 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches:

1. MSS SP 70, Class 125.

2. Stem: Non-rising.

3. Body: ASTM A126, cast iron.

4. Trim: Bronze.

5. Bonnet: Bolted bonnet.

6. Handwheel, outside screw and yoke.

7. Wedge Disc: Solid, with bronze seat rings.

8. End Connections: ASME B16.1, ASME B16.5, ASME B16.42, flanged.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. See drawings for required installation accessories.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for testing, inspection, and analysis.

B. Testing: Test gate valves according to AWWA C509.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Support valves in plastic piping to prevent undue stresses on piping.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 PLUG VALVES 40 05 23.21 - 1

SECTION 40 05 23.21 - PLUG VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Eccentric plug valves.



1. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

2. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24 - Metric/Inch

Standard.


B. ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch).


1. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

2. ASTM B62 - Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

D. American Water Works Association:

1. AWWA C517 - Resilient-Seated Cast-Iron Eccentric Plug Valves.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:

1. Submit catalog information, indicating materials of construction and compliance with

indicated standards.

C. Source Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Dezurik.

2. Substitutions: None Allowed.

3. Furnish materials according to MAWSS standards.

B. Description:

1. Type: Non-lubricated, eccentric.

2. Minimum Working Pressure: 150 psig at 300 degrees F.

3. Ports: Port area shall be 100% of nominal pipe area.

4. Stem Bearings: Self-lubricating.

5. Stem Seals: Neoprene; V-ring type.

6. Packing and Gland: Accessible and externally adjustable.

7. End Connections: ASME B16.1, ASME B16.5, ASME B16.42, flanged.

C. Operation:

1. 3 inches and Smaller: Lever.

2. Greater than 3 inches: Worm gear manual operators with handwheel.

3. Furnish gear operators for valves 8 inches and larger, and chainwheel operators for valves

mounted over 5 feet above floor.

D. Materials:

1. Body: AWWA C517, cast iron, lined with elastomer as recommended by valve

manufacturer for service conditions.

2. Plug: Hard Rubber, lined with resilient coating as recommended by valve manufacturer for

service conditions.

3. Seats: Nickel.

4. Stem: Type 316 stainless steel.

5. Stem Bearings: Stainless steel.

6. Seals: PTFE.

7. Connecting Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel.

E. Finishes: As specified in MAWSS standards.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for testing, inspection, and analysis.

B. Performance Testing:

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Operate each valve and actuator from fully CLOSED to fully OPEN to fully CLOSED under

no-flow conditions.

C. Leakage Testing:

1. Test at indicated working pressure to ensure valves are drip-tight. Test with pressure in both

directions for five minutes each way.

D. Hydrostatic Testing:

1. Perform test at twice rated pressure. Test for at least one minute to ensure no leakage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install valves according to AWWA C517 and as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Install plug valves in horizontal piping with stem horizontal; install plug valves in vertical piping

with plug at top when closed.

C. Install such that plugs are on top when OPEN and on pressure side when CLOSED.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING 40 05 53 - 1

SECTION 40 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PROCESS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Nameplates.

2. Tags.

3. Stencils.

4. Pipe markers.

5. Labels.

6. Lockout devices.


1. Section 09 96 36 – Chemical-Resistant Coatings for Metals in Wastewater Facilities

specified by this Section.

2. Section 46 05 53 – Identification for Water and Wastewater Equipment



1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.


A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog literature for each product required.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color-coding for mechanical

identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and

valve manufacturer's name and model number.

D. Samples: Submit one tag, label, and pipe marker for each size used on Project.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and

installation.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Qualifications Statement:

1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance

materials.

B. Extra Stock Materials: Furnish two containers of spray-on adhesive.

C. Tools: Furnish special crimpers and other devices required for Owner to reinstall tags.


A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories.

B. Perform Work according to Wakulla County standards.

C. Maintain 1 copy of each standard affecting the Work of this Section on-Site.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Provide manufacturer recommended nameplate data.

2. Furnish materials according to Wakulla County standards.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


B. Description: Aluminum with engraved black letters on light, contrasting background color.

2.2 TAGS

A. Metal Tags:

1. Description:

a. Aluminum or Stainless-steel construction; stamped letters.

b. Minimum Tag Size and Configuration: 1-1/2 inches; square with finished edges.

B. Information Tags:

1. Description:

a. Clear plastic with printed CAUTION and message.

b. Minimum Tag Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inch.

c. Furnish grommet and self-locking nylon ties.

2. Tag Chart: Typewritten, letter-size list of applied tags and location, in anodized aluminum

frame.

2.3 STENCILS

A. Furnish materials according to Wakulla County standards.

B. Description:

1. Clean-cut symbols.

2. Letters:

a. Up to 2-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1/2-inch-high letters.

b. 2-1/2- to 6-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-inch-high letters.

c. Over 6-inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4-inch-high letters.

C. Stencil Paint: Semigloss enamel.

D. Color-Coding and Lettering Size: Conform to ASME A13.1.

2.4 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color-Coding and Lettering Size: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B. Plastic Pipe Markers:

1. Description:

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


a. Factory-fabricated, flexible, semirigid plastic.

b. Preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering.

c. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.

C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers:

1. Description: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing and printed

markings.

D. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers:

1. Description:

a. Brightly colored, continuously printed plastic ribbon tape.

b. Minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick.

c. Manufactured for direct burial service.

2.5 LABELS


B. Description:

1. Aluminum construction.

2. Minimum Size: 1.9 by 0.75 inches.

3. Adhesive backed, with printed identification.

2.6 LOCKOUT DEVICES

A. Lockout Hasps:

1. Description:

a. Anodized aluminum construction.

b. Furnish hasp with erasable label surface.

c. Minimum Size: 7-1/4 by 3 inches.

B. Valve Lockout Devices:

1. Description:

a. Steel construction.

b. Furnish device preventing access to valve operator and accepting lock shackle.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation

preparation.

B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

C. Prepare surfaces as specified in Section 09 96 36 – Chemical-Resistant Coatings for Metals in

Wastewater Facilities.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Apply stencil painting as specified in Section 09 96 36 – Chemical-Resistant Coatings for Metals

in Wastewater Facilities.

B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.

C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners or adhesive.

D. Labels:

1. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

2. For unfinished covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.

E. Tags:

1. Install tags using corrosion-resistant chain.

2. Number tags consecutively by location.

F. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried

pipe.

G. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

H. Piping:

1. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers.

2. Use tags on piping 3/4-inch diameter and smaller.

3. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure.

4. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.

5. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs, including risers and drops,

adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at

each obstruction.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 BALL VALVES AND TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES 40 05 63.01 - 1

SECTION 40 05 63.01 - BALL VALVES AND TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rubber-seated ball valves.

2. Plastic ball valves.

3. Tapping sleeves and valves.


1. Construction Drawings, Agreement Declarations, Exhibits and other Technical

Specification Sections apply to this Section.


A. American Water Works Association:

1. AWWA C153 - Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings.

B. ASME International:

1. ASME B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250.

2. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch

Standard.


4. ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch.


1. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:

1. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared

Ends.

2. MSS SP-60 - Connecting Flange Joints between Tapping Sleeves and Tapping Valves.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.

C. Field Quality-Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor-furnished tests and

inspections.

D. Preconstruction Photographs:

1. Submit digital files of colored photographs of Work areas and material storage areas.


A. Section 01 77 00 – Closeout Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections,

thrust restraints, and invert elevations.

C. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted

utilities.


A. Valves: Mark valve body with manufacturer's name and pressure rating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RUBBER-SEATED BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Henry Pratt Company.

2. Val-Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp.

3. Engineer Approved equal

4. Substitutions: As specified in Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

5. Furnish materials according to specification and Wakulla standards.

B. Smaller Than 4 Inches:

1. Comply with MSS SP 110.

2. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig at 150 deg. F.

3. Maximum Process Fluid Temperature: 300 deg. F.

4. Body:

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


a. Type: One piece.

b. Material: Stainless steel.

5. Ball: Stainless steel.

6. Port: Full.

7. Seats: Buna-N.

8. Stem: Blowout proof.

9. End Connections: Threaded.

10. Operator: Stainless Steel hand lever or Pneumatically actuated. Refer to manufacturer

recommendation for each installed ball valve

2.2 TAPPING SLEEVES AND VALVES

A. Tapping Sleeves:

1. Manufacturers:

a. JCM Industries, Mueller Company, or equal.

b. Substitutions: As specified in Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Description:

a. Material: Ductile iron or cast iron.

b. Type: Dual compression.

c. Outlet Flange Dimensions and Drilling: Comply with ASME B16.1, Class 125 and

MSS SP-60.

B. Tapping Valves:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Mueller Company, U.S. Pipe Valve & Hydrant Company, or equal.

b. Substitutions: As specified in Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. Description:

a. Comply with AWWA C500.

b. Type: Double disc with non-rising stem.

c. Inlet Flanges: Comply with ASME B16.1, Class 125 and MSS SP-60.

d. Mechanical Joint Outlets: Comply with AWWA C111.

3. Mark manufacturer's name and pressure rating on valve body.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Restrained Joints: As specified in Drawing details.

B. Steel Rods, Bolt, Lugs, and Brackets:

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


1. Comply with ASTM A36 or ASTM A307.

2. Grade A carbon steel

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing utility water main size, location, and invert are as indicated on Drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

B. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. According to MSS SP-110 and MSS SP-60.

B. Tapping Sleeves and Valves:

1. As indicated on Shop Drawings and according to manufacturer instructions.

C. Thrust Restraints:

1. Install tie rods, clamps, setscrew retainer glands, or restrained joints as indicated on

drawings.

2. Protect metal-restrained joint components against corrosion by applying a bituminous

coating or encasing metal area using concrete mortar.

3. Install joint restraint at dead ends of water main.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 SYSTEMS INTEGRATION 409000-1

SECTION 40 90 00 – SYSTEMS INTEGRATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.


1. 40 91 23 – Field Instruments

2. 40 94 50 – Process Loop Descriptions

3. 40 95 13 – Control Panels and Hardware

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The CSI shall be responsible for integrating the furnished equipment, material, and

software into a fully operational plant-wide control system. All components shall meet

the requirements of these specifications.

B. The CSI shall work directly for the Contractor and is responsible for integrating

selected components, PLCs, and incorporating process equipment control systems into

the plant SCADA system.

C. PSI’s shall work directly for their respective process equipment provider and be

responsible for coordinating with the equipment provider to control the equipment and

coordinate with the CSI for communications with the SCADA system. Process

Equipment is defined as: Effluent Discharge Area Valves, In Plant Pump Station, In

Tank Screw Screen, Alum Feed System, Waste Dump System, Magnetic Flow Meter,

Turbidity Meter, etc.

1. Note: The PSI will be designated by the individual process equipment manufacturer

and may be different for each process equipment.

D. The CSI shall provide services as defined herein and shown on the Drawings including,

but not limited to, the following:

1. Develop the control algorithms and code.

2. Develop the HMI graphics for the SCADA system modifications.

3. Develop System Reports.

4. Integrate all of the system components and packaged system data in to the plant

control system.

5. Implement the design and functionally test for each process unit in scope of

contract.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


6. Provide system wide Factory Acceptance Testing and Field Acceptance Testing.

7. Communicate and coordinate with the Contractor on the project construction,

installation, and testing schedules.

8. Provide operator and maintenance training on the operation and maintenance of the

plant control system.

9. Provide field start-up services during the construction period to ensure all devices

are properly installed and configured.

10. Field test all I/O points and control algorithms for compliance with the function

requirements specification, project plans, and project specifications.

11. Provide operation and maintenance manuals for the plant control system.

12. Provide archived system configuration files for disaster recovery purposes.

13. Post Start-Up Services to ensure operation of the facility after initial start-up and

for “As-Built” documentation functions.

E. The PSI’s shall provide services as defined herein and shown on the Drawings


1. Provide and install all instrumentation associated with process equipment.

2. Fiber-to-Ethernet converters within process equipment panels that require

connection to the main SCADA System. Converters shall be coordinated with the

CSI prior to purchase to ensure proper communication between the process panels

and the SCADA System.

3. Provide all required communication devices between process equipment panels and

sub-panels.

4. Communicate with CSI for common plant-wide communication hardware and

protocols.

5. Coordinate with the CSI for type and style of logic code for all programming.

6. Coordinate with the CSI for the SCADA and HMI software used for the plant. All

programming and HMI screens associated with process equipment controls shall

be compatible with the same plant SCADA & HMI system.

7. Provide the Owner and CSI with all associated HMI screens (in digital form), I/O

list, data tags, address tables, etc. associated with their corresponding process

equipment for incorporation into the overall plant-wide SCADA/HMI system.

8. Calibration and start-up of all instruments associated with process equipment.

9. All miscellaneous items required for a complete and fully operational process

system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CSI – Control Systems Integrator

B. HMI – Human Machine Interface

C. PLC – Programmable Logic Controller

D. PSI – Process Systems Integrator

E. SCADA – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020



A. General

1. Shop Drawing submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents.

2. Manufacture of the SCADA System shall not commence until related submittals

have been approved by the Owner & Engineer.

3. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in complete packages grouped to permit review

of related items as generally outlined in Paragraph 1.4B.1, below.

4. Review of Shop Drawings will be for conformance with Contract Documents and

with regard to functions specified to be provided.

5. Final and approved copies of all Shop Drawings shall be provided in AutoCAD

format on a CD-ROM.

B. Submittal Requirements

1. Product information for all sensors/transducers and field and panel instruments.

Include the following:

a. Manufacturer's product name and model number.

b. Instrument tag number from Contract Documents.

c. Manufacturer’s standard catalog product data.

d. Description of construction features.

e. Performance and operation data.

f. Installation and mounting details, instructions and recommendations.

g. Service requirements.

h. Dimensions.

i. Range of each device and calibration information.

j. Descriptions of materials of construction and a listing of NEMA ratings for all

equipment.

C. Panels, Consoles and Cabinets Information

1. Layout Drawings include the following:

a. Front, rear, and internal panel views to scale.

b. Dimensional information.

c. Tag number and functional name of components mounted in and on panel,

console or cabinet.

d. Product information on all panel components.

e. Nameplate location and legend including text, letter size and colors to be used.

f. Location of anchoring connections and holes.

g. Location of external wiring and/or piping connections.

h. Mounting and installation details.

i. Proposed layouts and sizes of graphic display panels.

j. Calculations for heating and cooling.

k. Subpanel layouts and mounting details for all items located inside control

panels.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


l. Calculations of estimated electrical power demand and expected run time of the

Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).

2. Wiring and/or piping diagrams include the following:

a. Name of panel, console or cabinet.

b. Wiring sizes and types.

c. Piping sizes and types.

d. Terminal strip numbers.

e. Color coding.

f. Functional name and manufacturer's designation for components to which

wiring and piping are connected.

3. Electrical control schematics in accordance with NFPA 79 Standards for all circuits

indicated in the Contract Documents. No typical wiring diagrams will be acceptable

and no tables or charts to describe wire numbers will be acceptable.

4. Stock list or Bill of Materials for each panel including tag number, functional name,

manufacturer’s name, model number and quantity for all components mounted in

or on the panel or enclosure.

D. Computer Consoles

1. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the overall size of the console with

the available floor space. A floor plan with all furniture, control panels, and the

console system shall be produced by Contractor and submitted for review that

includes all items specified herein.

2. The console supplier shall provide design and application support by:

a. Determining the console functional design requirements. Coordinate with the

relative equipment suppliers to ensure that all equipment specified to be

mounted in console is installed correctly in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendation.

3. Layout Drawings include the following:

a. Shall be prepared using AutoCAD.

b. Front, rear, end and plan views to scale.

c. Dimensional information.

d. Construction materials.

e. Product information on all console components.

f. Stock lists or Bill of Materials for each console.

g. Location of anchoring connections and holes.

h. Location of external wiring connections.

i. Mounting and installation details.

4. Panel internal point-to-point wiring diagrams, include the following:

a. Name of console.

b. Wiring sizes, types, and numbers.

c. Terminal strip and post numbers for all interconnections.

d. Color coding.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


e. Functional name and manufacturer's designation for components to which

wiring and piping are connected.

5. Submit samples of specified finish materials (work surface with nosing, available

paint colors) to the Engineer for review and selection.

6. The Supplier of the console system shall be responsible for the sizing of the

modular components to accommodate the computer equipment. This coordination

shall be presented in the submittal.


A. SCADA System

1. System Description

a. Detailed block diagram showing system hardware configuration and identifying

model numbers of system components.

b. Software language and organization.

c. Format, protocol and procedures for data highway communications and local

communications with input/ output modules and peripheral devices.

d. Human-machine interfacing details.

e. Control and failure modes.

f. On-line and off-line capabilities for programming, system utilities and

diagnostics.

g. Input/output point listing with I/O module cross-reference identification for

each distributed controller.

h. Data base listing including all input/output points.

i. Suggested detailed format and configuration of all log reports, alarm

summaries, printer outputs, screen displays and graphics.

j. List of spare parts and test equipment.

2. Equipment Hardware

a. Layout drawings showing front, rear, end and plan views to scale of all

processing equipment, I/O components, power supplies and peripheral devices.

b. Construction details, features and procedures.

c. Interconnection diagrams including termination details, cable identification list

and cable length.

d. Plans showing equipment layout in control panels.

e. Installation requirements, instructions and/or recommendations.

3. Software Description

a. Standard technical documentation covering all aspects of the distributed control

system software functions and capabilities, including instruction set description

and programming procedures related to control, monitoring, display, logging,

reporting and alarming functions.

b. Standard technical and instructional documentation covering software for

utility, system support, system documentation, display, communications, data

logging and storage and diagnostic functions.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


c. Detailed functional descriptions of application programs explaining control,

display, logging and alarming features to be provided and functions to be

performed.

d. Documentation describing memory type, size and structure and listing size of

system memory, I/O and Data Table memory and size of memory available for

control programs. Also, define estimated control program memory

requirements and processor execution times and program scan times to perform

the display, logging, reporting and alarm functions required.

e. Documentation describing central monitoring station main and secondary

memory types, size and requirements to perform the display, logging, reporting

and alarming functions required.

f. Documentation for all PLC programming and Human Machine Interface (HMI)

software configuration including features and capabilities, screen display and

printout examples of a fully annotated and cross-referenced ladder diagram and

the ladder diagram elements.

g. Documentation of all PLC programs including the databases to establish

communication between the PLC and SCADA System that are provided

independent of this Contract.

4. System Software Documentation

a. Prepare and submit two copies of preliminary software documentation at least

four weeks prior to the expected initiation of factory testing and shall include

the following as a minimum:

1) Complete hard copies of all ladder diagram and function block program-

ming. Documentation shall include complete external and internal I/O coil,

contact and signal cross-referencing, addressing and rung numbering. Doc-

umentation shall clearly distinguish between internal and real I/O and shall

also incorporate extensive English language to identify contact, coil and

signal functions and for labeling and description of program, sub-program

and rung purpose and action.

2) Complete listing of external and internal I/O address assignments, register

assignments and preset constant values along with functional point descrip-

tions. Also, list all unused/undefined I/O and data table registers available.

3) Complete hard copies of all program documentation for all types of pro-

grams.

4) Detailed system memory map defining memory segments used and spare

memory segments available for system memory, I/O tables, Data Tables and

control program.

5) Complete database listing including listings for log, report and alarm file

setups.

6) Hard copies of all system graphic displays and formats for all logs, reports

and the alarm summary.

7) User's manuals describing procedures and providing examples for use of

operator's consoles, workstations and programming terminal, accessories

and system utility routines to perform control, display and logging program


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


generation, program modification, program verification, diagnostics, pro-

gram documentation, loading and backup and other required system support

functions.


A. SCADA I/O Loop Wiring Diagrams

1. Prepare drawings on a module-by-module basis and include the following

information:

a. Rack numbers, slot number, module type and module terminal point numbers.

Also, include location and identification of all intermediate panel terminal

block and strip numbers to which I/O wiring and power supply wiring is

connected. Identify all power supply circuit numbers and ratings.

b. Wiring sizes, types, wire numbers and color-coding.

c. Location, functional name, tag numbers and manufacturer model numbers of

panel and field devices and instruments to which I/O wiring is connected. For

discrete I/O devices use NFPA 79 electrical symbols tagged with designation

as shown.

d. Manufacturer’s data sheets and catalog literature.

e. Description of on-line diagnostic tests and off-line tests.

f. Dimensional data of equipment.

g. Addressing card and system layout, including special configuration rules and

limitations.

h. Interface and cable data.

i. Hardware manuals.

j. Electrical characteristics and protection provided for each component.

k. Indicated modularity of I/O modules.

l. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for grounding and power conditioning

requirements.

m. Description of how faults are detected, isolated and corrected.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals (Each of these shall be custom written by the

Integrator):

1. Control System Operations Manual

2. Control System Maintenance Manual

3. Laminated Trouble Shooting Guides for both the Operators and the Maintenance

Staff

C. Record Drawings and Documentation:

1. Contractor and CSI shall revise all system Shop Drawings, submittals and software

documentation to reflect as-built conditions in accordance with the requirements of

the Contract Documents and the supplemental requirements below.

2. Copies of all revised Shop Drawings and documentation shall be submitted to the

Engineer to replace outdated drawings and documentation contained in the System


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Half-size black line sets shall be provided for

all drawings larger than 11 by 17-inches. Specific instructions for outdated drawing

removal and replacement shall be provided with the Record Drawing submittal.

3. Half-size black line prints of wiring diagrams applicable to each control panel shall

be placed inside a clear plastic envelope and stored in a suitable print pocket or

container inside each control panel.

4. Updated electronic copies of Record Drawings and Documentation will be

provided in AutoCAD format or the original software. These drawings shall

include loop sheets, system block diagrams, starter schematics, and P&IDs. The

drawings shall indicate all wiring numbers.

5. The CSIs shall provide detailed documentation of all computer code developed for

this project. This documentation shall include but not be limited to: flow charts,

written descriptions, comments in PLC code, and HMI scripting. All software and

code developed for this project shall be considered property of the Owner.

6. All As-Built documentation shall be provided in both paper and electronic formats


A. General:

1. The SCADA System shall be furnished by a single Supplier who shall assume

responsibility for providing a complete and integrated system.

2. All equipment, components and materials required shall be furnished by the single

Supplier who shall assume the responsibility for adequacy and performance of all

items.

3. The Supplier shall identify those system components, which are not of their

manufacture.

4. The Supplier shall supply its company's Quality Assurance Plan, and for

components that are not of its manufacture, the component manufacturer's Quality

Assurance Plan. The plans shall include but not necessarily be limited to: method

of testing, raw material criteria, methods of documentation, station control,

"Burn-In", final tests and serialization coding and packaging.

B. Supplier's Minimum Qualifications:

1. Be a financially sound firm having at least five years continuous experience in

designing, implementing, supplying and supporting instrumentation and control

systems that are comparable to the SCADA System in terms of hardware, software,

cost and complexity.

2. Have manufactured and supported standard lines of digital processing and control

equipment and application software continuously for the last five years.

3. Have in existence at the time of bid, an experienced Engineer and technical staff

capable of designing, implementing, supplying and supporting the SCADA System

and handling the SCADA System submittal and training requirements.

4. Provide system hardware components and software packages of fully developed,

field proven standardized designs and therefore shall furnish a system that is not a

highly unique, custom one-of-a-kind system.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


5. Have a minimum of five years’ experience in hardware application and

programming of distributed microprocessor based controllers and data highway

systems.

6. Provide standard course offerings in general process control applications and in

operation, programming and maintenance of the control system and equipment at a

facility specifically utilized for training purposes. The facility shall have been in

operation continuously for the last two years.

7. Have a thorough working knowledge of wastewater treatment processes and control

philosophy in accordance with standard practices of the wastewater treatment

industry.

8. Have a system of traceability of the manufactured units and purchased components

through production, assembly and testing.

9. Have a system of "Burn-In" for all components and available supportive

documentation.

10. Have a demonstrated record of prompt response to field failures.

11. Have a documented program of failure analysis.

12. Have or will use a UL approved panel shop.

13. Have a record of prompt shipments in accordance with contract obligations required

for previous projects.

C. Supplier's Responsibility:

1. Contractor shall retain the ICS Supplier to undertake the responsibilities specified

below. However, execution of these specified duties by the system supplier shall

not relieve Contractor of the ultimate responsibility for the ICS.

a. Design, fabrication, and implementation of the ICS and all subsystems in

accordance with the Contract Documents and all referenced standards and

codes.

b. Preparation, assembly and correction of all ICS submittals in accordance with


c. Proper interfacing of the ICS hardware, field devices and panels, including

required interfacing with packaged control systems furnished by other

equipment suppliers, and with the plant electrical system.

d. Supervision of the installation of ICS, instruments, panels, consoles, cabinets,

wiring and other components required.

e. Calibration, testing and start-up of the ICS.

f. Training of Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of the monitoring

and control system.

g. Handling of all warranty obligations for the control system components.

h. Maintenance of two reproducible copies of the complete system and running

software at the Supplier's facility for the duration of the warranty period.

Software copies shall be maintained on the bulk storage medium used by the

Supplier for system program development and shall be directly loadable on the

supplied system.

i. Programming of the PLC’s used in the SCADA System in accordance with the

Process Loop Descriptions provided in Section 40 94 50.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


D. Reference Standards:

1. The following organizations have generated standards that are to be used as guides

in assuring quality and reliability of components and systems; govern

nomenclature; define parameters of configuration and construction, in addition to

specific details in the Contract Documents:

a. The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society, (ISA).

b. National Institute of Standards and Technology, (NIST).

c. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., (UL).

d. American Water Works Association, (AWWA).

e. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association, (NEMA).

f. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, (OSHA).

g. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI).

h. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA).

i. Scientific Apparatus Manufacturer’s Association, (SAMA).

j. National Fire Protection Association 79, Annex “D” Standards, (NFPA).

k. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, (IEEE).

l. National Electrical Code, (NEC).

E. The following are the approved as Control Systems Integrator for the project:

1. Automation Control Services, LLC

6281 Technology Drive

Pensacola, FL 32505

(850) 477-8440

2. Southern Flow, Inc.

6445 Industrial Way

Suite A

Alpharetta, GA 30004

(770) 667-5169

3. Control Instruments, Inc.

5253 Oakdale Rd SE

Smyrna, GA 30082

(404) 351-1085

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS (NOT USED)

1.9 TRAINING

A. The CSI shall plan, schedule and conduct a thorough and comprehensive training

program designed to meet the general and specific needs of the Owner’s operating and

maintenance personnel. The training program shall include training on the completed

system at the Owner's site.

B. Training, except that conducted during start-up and maintenance visits by service

technicians, shall be conducted by professional training specialists employed by the

instrumentation and CSI.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


C. The Integrators shall submit a training syllabus to the Engineer as a shop drawing for

approval.

D. As a minimum the Integrators shall provide the following classes for the treatment

facility operators and maintenance staff for operational training and maintenance

trouble shooting.

1. CSI: (1) 8-hour classes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY

A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the CSI during construction, testing, start-up,

calibration and acceptance of the instrumentation and control system. The Contractor

is responsible for a complete and fully operational instrumentation and control system.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. The instrumentation and control system, peripherals, and accessory equipment shall be

installed in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's instructions and located as

shown on the Contract Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.

B. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation, placing and location of system

components, their connections to the process components, panels, cabinets and devices,

as required to complete the work subject to the Engineer's approval. The Contractor

shall be responsible to insure that all field wiring for power and signal circuits between

existing devices, the proposed control system are correctly done in accordance with

best industry practice to insure a satisfactory functioning installation

3.3 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. PLC/HMI PROGRAMMING

1. All PLC code shall be written in either “Function Block” style. The CSI may use

“Ladder Logic” for simple logic functions with the Engineer and Owner’s approval

prior to programming.

2. All PLC / HMI code shall be supplied to the Owner with fully descriptive

comments. All HMI code shall be supplied to the Owner with fully descriptive

screen and tag data.

3. The Integrator shall provide the Owner with a flow chart of all PLC code as well

as a written algorithm of the codes functions.

4. The graphic standards to be used for all HMI equipment shall be coordinated with

the Process Equipment Providers. All control panel screens will be custom.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


5. The Integrator shall provide the Owner with an I/O map of all process variables in

the PLC.

6. All PLC code shall be the property of the Owner.

7. The Contractor shall provide three copies of all commented PLC, HMI, and

Operator Interface code/script/screen layouts to the Owner in electronic format

prior to acceptance by the Owner. Any documentation not containing symbol

information or comments will not be considered acceptable.

B. HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) / REPORTING

1. The Human-Machine Interface software for the SCADA HMI shall be based upon

the existing installation and shall be field verified. The CSI shall be responsible for

providing all necessary licenses, drivers, and required network and software

packages as required, for the configuration as detailed in the project plans. The

Integrator shall be required to provide the necessary HMI screens to monitor and

control the equipment installed in this project. The Integrator shall be required to

submit the proposed HMI screens to the Engineer and Owner for approval a

minimum of eight weeks prior to the factory testing.

2. All available functions represented on the screens shall be easily identified. The

Operator shall not be required to navigate multiple levels of menus to perform a

control function.

3. All alarms generated by equipment installed on the project shall be displayed in the

alarm summary page. The Integrator shall coordinate with the Owner when

configuring the system alarms and subsequent actions. The use of HMI alarm tags

will not be allowed unless sufficient reason is submitted and approved.

3.4 TEST AND ACCEPTANCE

A. The Engineer and Owner shall witness Acceptance Tests, On-site Operability Tests and

System Acceptance Tests.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. All equipment and devices for the instrumentation and control system shall be installed

in the locations shown on the drawings, in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations, and in compliance with the requirements of these specifications.

B. The CSI shall provide installation assistance in their bids. The Contractor shall provide

one instrument electrician to work with the integrator during the installation and

termination of the wiring to the PLCs.

3.6 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS

A. No power shall be activated to any part of the instrumentation and control system until

the Engineer receives a written certified statement by the system supplier that the

installation is complete and ready for energizing. The Contractor is responsible for

proper coordination and scheduling, and any damage to the instrumentation and control

system.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


B. After the installations are completed, the Contractor, shall test each component of the

instrumentation and control system. After all systems are operating properly, the

Contractor shall notify the Engineer and demonstrate the full operation of the system.

The Contractor shall make all necessary adjustments and correct or replace faulty

equipment to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

C. The CSI shall be required to provide all test equipment necessary to test the control

system and computer networks per industry standards.

3.7 FIELD CALIBRATION

A. All instrumentation and controls shall be calibrated in the presence of the Engineer in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to the accuracy specified.

B. The Contractor shall provide field calibration as necessary until the project is

considered Substantially Complete by the Engineer.

3.8 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PERIOD

A. General:

1. During the first year of operation after substantial completion of the entire project,

the Contractor shall provide maintenance and calibration services for the newly

installed instrumentation and control systems.

2. All maintenance and calibration activities shall conform to the manufacturer's

requirements and shall be provided by a certified technician.

3. This work shall include all labor, tools, equipment, materials and all other expenses

at no additional cost to the Owner.

4. Calibration and maintenance shall be performed every three months at a minimum.

5. The CSI shall include 40 man-hours per quarter for the required maintenance

period.

3.9 START-UP SERVICES

A. The CSI shall include 40 man-hours for Start-up in their bids. These hours will be on

site. Any hours not used for Start-up shall be used for Owner-directed field

programming changes. The Contractor shall provide one instrumentation technician to

work with the integrator during the Start-up time.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 FIELD INSTRUMENTS 40 91 23-1

SECTION 40 91 23 – FIELD INSTRUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

Related Sections:

1. 40 90 00 Systems Integration

2. 40 94 00 Process Loop Description

3. 40 95 13 Control Panels and Hardware

1.2 SUMMARY

1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as

shown, specified and required to furnish, install, calibrate, test, start-up and place

into satisfactory operation all field instruments.



Comply with the requirements specified in Section 40 90 00 – Systems Integration

1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)


Comply with the requirements specified in Section 40 90 00 – Systems Integration


Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Furnish primary sensors and field instruments by the named manufacturers or equal

equipment by other manufacturers.

2. The named manufacturers have been specified to establish the standard of quality

and performance of the equipment to be supplied.

3. Obtain all sensors and field instruments of a given type from the same

manufacturer.

4. The primary sensors and field devices shall be interchangeable with similar

function existing primary sensors and field devices to minimize spare parts

inventory.

Manufacturers' Responsibilities and Services:


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


1. Design and manufacture the primary sensors and field instruments in accordance

with the applicable general design requirements specified in Section 40 90 00

System Integration and the detailed Specifications herein.

2. Field supervision, inspection, start-up and training in accordance with the

requirements of Section 40 90 00 System Integration.

Performance requirements

1. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on sea-level conditions.

2. Operating Temperature: 32° F to 104° F.

3. Environment: Wastewater.


Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances

before installation.

Delivery, storage and handling

1. Deliver units as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping

limitations, with protective crating and covering.

2. Lift and support units with the manufacturer’s designated lifting and covering.

Coordination and scheduling

1. Coordinate with the Owner for the location of areas.

2. Coordinate the Dissolved Oxygen System with process equipment manufacturer

for exact placement.

3. Coordinate with the pipe provided for flow meter sizes.

4. Coordinate level range of level transmitters with intended application range and

tank/basin provider.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

1. Endress-Hauser

2. Hach

3. Wallace & Tierman

4. Siemens Milltronics

5. Rosemount

6. Ashcroft


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


2.2 TURBIDITY METER

Range: 0.01 – 4000 NTU

Signal Output: 4 to 20 mA

2.3 ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOW METER

Measured Error: +/- 0.2%

Temp Range: -5 to 50 degrees Celsius

Liner: Hard Rubber

Pressure Class: ANSI B 16.5 Class 150

Headloss: 0 PSI

Display Range: 5 digits with sign and units

Signal Current: 0 to 3000 nA


Display: LC, Backlit, 4 lines, 16 characters each

Size: As shown on mechanical drawings

2.4 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTERS

Range: 125mm – 40 meters

Blocking Distance: 0 –3 meters

Temperature Range: -40 to 80 degrees Celsius

Material: PVDF

Transmitter Supply Voltage: 115VAC +5% -10%


Relay Outputs: 5 Form ‘C’ contacts

Applications: Flow, Level, volume, pump control

Housing: IP65

Operating Temperature: -20 to 60 degrees Celsius

2.5 WARRANTY

The equipment shall be warranted for a period of one year after the installation.

Components failing to perform as specified by the engineers, or as represented by the

manufacture, or proven defective in service during the warranty period, shall be

replaced, repaired or satisfactorily modified by the manufacture without cost to the

Owner when returned to the manufacture.

2.6 SURGE PROTECTION

Each electronic transmitter shall be provided with a Phoenix PLUGTRAB SPD for both

the power and the 4-20 mA signal in a NEMA 4X stainless steel hinged junction box

adjacent to the transmitters.

Provide signal isolators for 4-20mA signals within control panel.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMONSTRATION

Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup

and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance.

Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 01 Section

“Contract Closeout”.

Demonstrate operation of products specified in this Section. Conduct walking tour of

the Project. Briefly identify location and describe function, operation, and maintenance

of each product.

3.2 INSTALLATION

Install according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.3 WORKMANSHIP

All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers’

recommendations and conform to the Contract Documents.

Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

Contractor shall install required electric conduit and cables for all field instruments.

Each electric field instrument shall be supplied with 3#12 in a 1”C to the nearest power

panelboard unless otherwise indicated on the project drawings. In addition, 2-2#18

AWG shield pairs of signal wire in a 1”C shall be provided to the nearest PLC plant

control panel unless otherwise shown on the project drawings.

Each pump shall be provided with a discharge pressure gauge. The discharge pressure

gauge shall be connected to the piping system prior to the pump check valve. Each

pressure gauge shall be supplied with a stainless steel isolation valve and pipe nipple

for connection to the tapped pipe.

All pressure transmitters shall be installed using a stainless steel isolation valve and

stainless steel pipe nipple.

All transmitters shall be provided with sun/rain hoods.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.

Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including

grounding connections, according to manufacturer’s published torque-tightening

values. Where manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A and UL 486B.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020



Manufacturer’s Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service

representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation and

electrical connections, and to report results in writing.

Contractor shall install all equipment and related accessories before having the

manufacturer’s field service. If additional trips are required due to incorrect

installation, Contractor shall pay for the costs for the field services.

3.6 DOCUMENTATION

Manuals: Provide the Owner with original copies of the installation, operation,

maintenance, and calibration manuals as provided with the equipment. In addition

provide the original warranty cards and product literature. Copies of this information

shall not be accepted.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 PROCESS LOOP DESCRIPTIONS 40 94 50-1

SECTION 40 94 50 - PROCESS LOOP DESCRIPTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. 40 90 00 – Systems Integration


3. 40 95 13 – Control Panels and Hardware

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section describes the general function and disposition of each primary process loop.

The CSI shall provide additional functions as needed to adhere to good control and

engineering practices.

B. The process loop descriptions are written descriptions of the basic configuration and/or

programming required to implement the sequential control of the wastewater reclamation

plant unit processes. Finalizing and tuning of strategies, as required, by the process

characteristics shall be accomplished during start-up.

C. The SCADA (supervisory control and data acquisition) system for the proposed plant

shall incorporate the design philosophies as described in the section. It shall be the

responsibility of the CSI to insure that these philosophies are engrained in the proposed

plant control system.

D. The SCADA system shall be implemented such that the operator has the ability to

monitor and control every device that is connected to the plant wide network from the

operator’s human machine interfaces (HMIs) and operator interface terminals (OIT).

E. The SCADA system shall provide the ability for the automated process control at each

process area or packaged system to continue to operate in the event of a network failure.

F. The SCADA system shall be implemented, such that the operator has the ability to

perform local control (‘HAND’ operation) in the event of a process area PLC failure.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Local – monitoring and controls located at the piece of equipment.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


B. Remote – monitoring and controls located away from the piece of equipment (such as an

MCC) and/or programmed in SCADA.

C. RUNNING – discrete input obtained from auxiliary contacts (or data link registers)

provided with the local motor control equipment (i.e., starter, VFC, RVSS, etc.) which

shall close (or change value) when the equipment is running.

D. HOA IN AUTO – discrete input obtained from a dry contact which indicates that the

remote HAND-OFF-AUTO (HOA) selector switch is in the “AUTO” position to permit

remote control by the SCADA system.

1. If the HOA is in “HAND”, all software functions associated with that specific

equipment shall not be available and PLC control of equipment shall be halted.

E. OOR IN REMOTE – discrete input obtained from a dry contact which indicates that the

local ON-OFF-REMOTE selector switch is in the “Remote” position to permit remote

control by the SCADA system.

F. FAULT – discrete input obtained from local motor overload and/or any other shut down

mode such as seal-fail, over-temperature, low oil pressure, high vibration, etc.

G. ESTOP – discrete input obtained from local emergency stop push button.

H. SPEED IN – analog input obtained from local VFC typically shown as 0 – 100%. Speed

range shall be operator adjustable under supervisory password control.

I. OPEN & CLOSED – discrete inputs obtained from limit switches indicating the position

of a valve either opened or closed.

J. HOA (hand-off-auto) – remote virtual selector-switch function that allows the operator

to select the mode of operation in either “HAND” (for remote manual control) or

“AUTO” (for remote PLC control).

1. If the local HOA is in the “AUTO”, this function shall allow the operator to select

to either control that equipment manually or allow the PLC to control automatically.

K. S/S (start/stop) – remote virtual pushbutton function that allows the operator to manually

start and stop equipment. Available if the local HOA is in “AUTO” AND the remote

HOA is in “HAND”.

L. SPEED S/P (setpoint) – remote virtual numeric function that allows the operator to enter

a numeric value from 0 – 100% that sets the speed of the associated motor. If the operator

enters a value greater than 100%, the HMI or OIT shall display an error message and the

motor speed shall remain unchanged. Available if the local HOA is in “AUTO” AND

the remote HOA is in “HAND”.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


M. OPEN/CLOSE – remote virtual pushbutton that allows the operator to manually open or

close a valve, gate, etc. Available if the local HOA is in “AUTO” AND the remote HOA

is in “HAND”.

N. SELSW – remote virtual selector switch that allows the operator to manually select one

or more devices. Selector switch may have more than two selections depending on the

application. Available if the local HOA is in “AUTO”. Availability in remote mode will

depend on application.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS ( NOT USED )

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS ( NOT USED )

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ( NOT USED )

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE ( NOT USED )

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS ( NOT USED )

PART 2 - PRODUCTS ( NOT USED )

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The SCADA system includes the following: process treatment equipment, power

distribution, motor controls, field instruments, HMI Software, HMI server, HMI

workstation, OITs, and a distributed control system.

B. The SCADA system shall allow the operator to monitor the operating status of all

equipment located on the plant that is connected to the SCADA system.

C. The SCADA system shall allow the operator to manually operate any piece of equipment

from any of the Workstations, Servers, or HMI displays located on the plant site.

1. OWNER will provide TCP/IP addresses to the CSI. Coordinate TCP/IP addresses

with Process Systems Integrators for status monitoring/controls as applicable.

D. The SCADA system shall allow the operator to easily change the operating set-points of

any piece of equipment that is automatically operated by the Control System. The

set-point ranges shall be hard coded such that the operator may not be allowed to enter a


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


set-point that allows the equipment to operate out of the range or limits set forth by the

equipment manufacturer. In addition the HMI shall have a configuration screen that

allows an operator with proper security privileges to reset each of the set-points to the

default values originally programmed in the system.

E. The SCADA system shall alarm the system operator when any equipment that was called

to run by the PLC fails to start or stops running for any reason.

F. The SCADA system shall alarm the system operator whenever an alarm condition is

present on any piece of equipment connected to the SCADA system. The CSI shall

coordinate with the OWNER to determine the desired priority level for all alarms as well

as call-out/paging sequencing.

G. Overall requirements of the system operation & SCADA system are as described in the

loop descriptions in these specifications and in the contract drawings.

H. The SCADA system shall automatically discover and re-configure the setting and

parameters of replacement devices connected to the control system network (i.e. variable

frequency controllers, solid-state overloads, soft starts, etc.)

I. The SCADA system shall provide the operator with a software management solution that

performs programmable logic controller program revision changes, programmable logic

controller program archival, network configurations, device configurations, and

programmable logic controller program track and archive software revisions.

3.2 ALARM CONDITIONS

A. All alarm conditions for the proposed equipment shall:

1. Notify the operator of the system alarms by providing audible notification as well

as displaying the alarm on the HMI with all of the associated alarm details.

2. Have the ability to be acknowledged through any of the HMI workstations or

operator interfaces connected to the SCADA system network.

3. Call the “on-call” operator in the event that the alarm is not acknowledged within

a period of time to be determined by the OWNER. In the event the “on-call”

operator does not acknowledge or clear the fault, the SCADA system shall continue

calling operators on the configured call-out list until the alarm is acknowledged or

cleared.

3.3 DATA ARCHIVAL

A. The SCADA system shall store each operation of every piece of equipment.

B. The SCADA system shall also store each start, stop, reset, logon, logoff, and alarm

acknowledgement that an operator performs.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


C. The SCADA system shall store the value of each analog and digital tag/variable such that

the operator can trend plant data.

3.4 EFFLUENT FLOW METER FE/FIT-6002

A. The SCADA System HMI shall be configured to display the following:

1. Instantaneous flow rates. 0 – 100% = 0 – XXX GPM (to be determined)

2. Totalized flow readings for the current 24-hour period, as well as the ability for the

operator to recall the totalized flow for any period over the past 12 months.

3. In the trending area of the HMI, the SCADA shall allow the operator to Trend both

instantaneous flow rates and totalized flow for a period of time of up to 12 months.

4. Flow indication FI-001 shall show the actual flow through the meter.

3.5 TURBIDITY METER AE/AIT-6001 AND AE/AIT-6004

A. The SCADA System shall monitor the turbidity of the water leaving the filters. The

operator shall have the ability to input two turbidity alarm levels (High Turbidity, High

High Turbidity). The “High Turbidity” level shall alarm the operator and provide time

for correction prior to reaching the “High High Turbidity”.

B. Once the “High High Turbidity” level is reached the Effluent Pumps shall be locked out

of service, and the effluent sent to the reject storage tanks until the turbidity reaches the

“High Turbidity” level.

C. The plant operator shall have the ability to turn off the automatic turbidity monitoring

system under password control and be prompted every hour on the hour for a manual

turbidity reading.



BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020




BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020

111803.10 CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE 40 95 13-1

SECTION 40 95 13 – CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.


1. 40 90 00 – Systems Integration


3. 40 94 50 – Process Loop Descriptions

1.2 SUMMARY

A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as

shown, specified and required to furnish, install, calibrate, test, start-up and place into

satisfactory operation all control panels and enclosures.



A. Comply with the requirements specified in Section 40 90 00 Systems Integration.

1.5 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS (NOT USED)


A. Comply with the requirements specified in Section 40 90 00 Systems Integration.


A. Standards, Codes and Regulations

1. Construction of panels and the installation and interconnection of all equipment and

devices mounted within shall comply with applicable provisions of the following

standards, codes and regulations:

a. National Fire Protection Association 79, Annex “D” Standards, (NFPA)

b. National Electrical Code, (NEC)

c. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards, (NEMA)

d. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM)

e. Operational Safety and Health Administration Regulations, (OSHA)

f. Underwriters’ Laboratory, Inc., (UL)


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


g. State and Local code requirements

h. Where any conflict arises between codes or standards, the more stringent

requirement shall apply.

2. All materials and equipment shall be new and all panels shall be built in an

Underwriters’ Laboratory, Inc. (UL) approved panel shop and bear the UL label.

B. General Design Requirements

1. Comply with the requirements of Section 40 90 00 – Systems Integration.

C. Factory Assembly and Testing

1. All control panels shall be factory tested and certified prior to releasing for

shipment. The testing shall consist of, but not limited to, the following:

a. Point to point testing of all wiring prior to application of power

b. The intended supply voltage shall be applied to the control panel and all

components shall be tested for proper operation and calibration.

c. The programmable logic controller and operator interface code shall be loaded,

and each shall be tested for functionality.

d. All components shall be checked to confirm that each device has been installed

per the plans and specifications as well as the Manufacturer’s

recommendations.

e. The enclosure shall be inspected for defects and shall be repaired or replaced as

necessary.

f. All labeling and identification tags shall be verified, be clean and visible.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Furnish instruments and devices by the named manufacturers or equal equipment

by other manufacturers.

2. The named manufacturers have been specified to establish the standard of quality

and performance of the equipment to be supplied.

3. Obtain all instruments or devices of a given type from the same manufacturer.

E. Manufacturers' Responsibilities and Services:

1. Design and manufacture the instruments and devices in accordance with the

applicable general design requirements specified in Section 40 90 00 Systems

Integration and specified herein.

2. Field supervision, inspection, start-up and training in accordance with the

requirements of Section 40 90 00 Systems Integration.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS ( NOT USED)


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all electrical and/or pneumatic components and devices, support hardware,

fasteners, interconnecting wiring and/or piping required to make the control panels

and/or enclosures complete and operational.

B. Locate and install all devices and components so that connections can be easily made

and that there is ample room for servicing each item.

C. Components for installation on panel exterior shall be located generally as shown on

Drawings.

D. Adequately support and restrain all devices and components mounted on or within the

panel to prevent any movement.

E. Provide sub-panels for installation of all relays and other internally mounted

components.

F. All wiring to panel connections from field instruments, devices, and other panels shall

be terminated at master numbered terminal strips, unless otherwise specified.

G. Provide copper grounding studs for all panel equipment.

H. Provide the following convenience accessories inside of each control panel:

1. One 120VAC/20A duplex, GFCI-type receptacle that is accessible from the interior

dead-front panel.

2. One or more 120 VAC fluorescent or LED light fixtures with protective plastic

shield to span across the width of the panel but not less than two-thirds the width

of the panel, as a minimum.

3. One 120 VAC, 20A, door switch to turn on the light.

4. Service light with switch and duplex receptacle shall have its own circuit breaker

and separate power feed.

I. A main circuit breaker shall be provided for each control panel. Sized as indicated on

the drawings.

J. Each control panel shall be provided with a series connected suppression filter system

to protect the programmable logic controller and instrumentation power from high-

frequency noise and electrical transients. The suppression filter shall be a current

technology LoadGuard or ENGINEER approved equal.

K. The bottom 12-inches of free standing panels shall be free of all devices, including

terminal strips, to provide ease of installation and testing.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


L. No device shall be mounted less than 36-inches above the operating floor level, unless

otherwise specified.

M. All control panels shall be designed to operate at the service voltage as indicated in the

project plans.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for identification of panels and components

mounted therein as follows:

1. Nameplates shall be of 3/32-inch thick laminated phenolic type with black matte

finish surface and white letter engraving.

2. Panel identification nameplates to have 1/2-inch high letter engravings.

3. Panel mounted component (e.g., control devices, indicating lights, selector

switches, etc.) identification nameplates to have 1/4-inch high letter engravings.

4. Nameplates shall be attached to the panel face with two stainless steel self-tapping

screws.

5. Nameplate engravings shall include the instrument or equipment tag number and

descriptive title as shown and specified.

B. Tag all internally mounted instruments and devices in accordance with the following

requirements:

1. Tag numbers shall be as listed in the Contract Documents.

2. The identifying tag number shall be permanently etched or embossed onto a

stainless steel tag which shall be fastened to the device housing with stainless steel

rivets or self-tapping screws of appropriate size.

3. Where neither of the above fastenings can be accomplished, tags shall be

permanently attached to the device by a circlet of 1/16-inch diameter stainless steel

wire rope.

4. Identification tag shall be installed so that the numbers are easily visible to service

personnel.

5. Front of panel mounted instruments shall have the tag attached to rear of device.

C. Tagging of the following items shall be accomplished with the use of adhesive plastic

Brady USA, Inc. labels, or equal.

1. Tag all electrical devices (e.g., relays, timers, power supplies) mounted within

control panels and enclosures.

2. Tag all pneumatic lines.

3. Numerically tag all terminal blocks.

4. Numerically tag wiring at each end.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


2.3 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES

A. General:

1. Panels and enclosures shall meet the NEMA requirements for the type specified.

2. Sizes shown on the Contract Drawings are estimates. CONTRACTOR shall furnish

panels and enclosures amply sized to house all equipment, instruments, front panel

mounted devices, power supplies, power distribution panels, wiring, tubing and

other components installed within, as required.

B. Construction Features:

1. Control panels located in field shall be NEMA 4X rated.

a. Panels shall be Type 316L stainless steel construction with a minimum

thickness of 12-gauge for all surfaces (except those areas requiring

reinforcement) having a smooth powder coated white painted finish.

b. Stainless steel screw clamp assemblies on three sides of each door.

c. Rolled lip around three sides of door and along top of enclosure opening.

d. Hasp and staple for padlocking.

e. Provide a clear plastic, gasketed lockable hinged door to encompass all non-

NEMA 4 front of panel instruments.

C. All control panels shall be provided with a mild steel dead front panel capable of

protecting the operator from a bolted fault within the control panel with the outer door

open.

2.4 WIRING

A. Internal wiring shall be Type MTW stranded copper wire with thermoplastic insulation

rated for 600 V at 90ºC for single conductors, color coded and labeled with wire

identification. All wiring shall be clearly marked with an identification number

consistent with the wiring schematic.

B. Wire colors shall be as follows:

1. All ungrounded AC conductors operating at the supply voltage shall be “Black”

2. All ungrounded AC control conductors operating at voltage less than supply shall

be “RED”

3. All ungrounded DC control conductors shall be “Blue”

4. All ungrounded AC control conductors or wires that remain energized when the

main disconnect is in the “OFF” position shall be “Yellow”

5. All grounded AC current carrying conductors shall be “White”

6. All grounded DC current carrying conductors shall be “Blue with a White stripe”

7. All grounded AC current carrying conductors that remain energized when the main

disconnect is in the “OFF” position shall be “White with a Yellow stripe”

8. All ground conductors shall be “Green”

9. A wiring color code legend shall be mounted inside the control panel door.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


C. DC panel signal wiring: No. 18 minimum AWG shielded.

D. DC power wiring: No. 12 minimum AWG.

E. AC signal and control wiring: No. 14 minimum AWG. For wiring carrying more than

15A, use sizes required by NEC standards.

F. Separate and shield low voltage signal wiring from power and control wiring by a

minimum of 6-inches.

G. Group or bundle parallel runs of wire using covered troughs. Maximum bundle size

shall be 1-inch. Troughs shall have 40 percent spare capacity. Install wire troughs

along horizontal or vertical routes to present a neat appearance. Angled runs are not

acceptable.

1. Provide wire troughs manufactured by Panduit or equal.

H. Adequately support and restrain all wiring runs to prevent sagging or other movement.

I. Terminate all field wiring using compression type connectors (soldered type not

acceptable) at 600 V rated barrier type terminal strips and permanently affixed numeric

identifiers beside each connection. Identifiers to be self-stick plastic tape strips with

permanent type, machine printed numbers. For DC field signal wiring, terminal strips

shall be capable of handling No. 12 wiring (minimum).

1. Provide terminal blocks manufactured by Weidmuller, or equal.

J. All wiring shall be installed such that if wires are removed from any one device, power

will not be disrupted to any other device.

K. All alarms generated external to the panel, spare alarm, and repeat contacts shall be

wired out to terminal blocks.

L. For internal component-to-component wiring only, compression type terminal blocks

are acceptable.

M. Terminal strips shall not be located closer than 8” from any side or bottom of the control

panel. This is designed to allow for adequate wire bending radius for field terminations.

N. Provide spare terminals equal in number to 20 percent of the terminals used for each

type of wiring (e.g., DC signal and AC power).

O. Provide a separate terminal for grounding each shielded cable.

P. Use separate 5/16-inch diameter copper grounding studs for instrument signal cable

shields and AC power.

Q. Where wires pass through panel walls, provide suitable bushings to prevent cutting or

abrading of wire insulation.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


R. Wiring for devices mounted on the enclosure door or interior dead front panel shall be

run in spiral wrap to avoid pinch points when opening and closing the enclosure door(s)

or interior panels.

S. Provide fused terminal blocks, which will provide an LED indictor for a blown fuse.

Fused terminal blocks shall be manufactured by Schneider Electric / Square D or equal.

T. Provide complete wiring diagram showing "as-built" circuitry. Diagram shall be

enclosed in transparent plastic and placed in easily accessible pocket built into panel

door.

U. Din Rail shall be manufactured by Weidmuller or equal.

2.5 SURGE PROTECTION

A. Surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic instrumentation system

from surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines. The protection

systems shall be such that the protection level shall not interfere with normal operation,

but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level, and be maintenance free

and self-restoring. Instruments shall be housed in suitable metallic cases, properly

grounded. Ground wires for all surge protectors shall be connected to a good earth

ground and where practical each ground wire run individually and insulated from each

other. These protectors shall be mounted within the instrument enclosure or a separate

junction box (compatible with the area designation) coupled to the enclosure.

B. Panel mounted surge protection shall be plug-in style & DIN rail mounted to allow for

easy replacement. The power and digital I/O signals shall be protected with solid state

surge suppression devices manufactured by Phoenix Contact or ENGINEER approved

equal. MOV only type surge suppression is not acceptable.

C. All analog I/O signals shall be protected by loop powered isolators manufactured by

Phoenix Contact or ENGINEER approved equal.

D. Lightning Protection and surge suppression devices shall be provided for all radio and

telemetry equipment. The Lighting protection and surge suppression devices shall be

manufactured by Phoenix Contact or ENGINEER approved equal.

E. All incoming power to the control panel shall be protected by Phoenix Contacts

Trabtech surge protectors or ENGINEER approved equal rated for the voltage being

supplied. Protection shall be provided for all phase and neutral conductors.

2.6 PLC EQUIPMENT

A. All control panels that perform logic or control functions shall be provided with a

Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). The PLC and associated I/O cards shall be:

1. Main CP: Compact Logix 1769

2. LCP’s: A-B Micrologix 1400


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


B. All PLC shall be supplied with a minimum of 2 Megabytes of available user memory

and shall be provided with a removable 64Megabyte CompactFlash card for nonvolatile

memory.

C. The PLC shall be provided with the following communication ports as a minimum:

one Ethernet communication module (unless otherwise noted). The CSI shall be

required to provide all communication modules as required for communication with

equipment connected to the PLC and for connection to the control system network.

D. The PLC power supply shall be sized to provide 25% spare capacity.

E. All PLC units shall be provided with battery backup. All exterior control panels shall

be provided with a battery back-up system that consists of a power supply / battery

charger and re-chargeable batteries. The use of an off the shelf UPS shall not be

considered acceptable.

F. All industrial Ethernet components shall be provided with removal configuration plugs

which allow for easy replacement and storage of configuration parameters without need

for addition programming software or cables.

2.7 HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI)

A. Manufacturer:

1. Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus 6 1250

2. No equals

B. Specifications:

1. Screen: 12” TFT display

2. Display type: color (TFT)

3. Input type: touchscreen (no keypad)

4. Communications: Ethernet, Rs232

5. Power input: 120VAC

2.8 PANEL MOUNTED DEVICES

A. Selector Switches, Pushbuttons, and Indicating Lights

1. General:

a. Selector switches, pushbuttons and indicating lights shall be supplied by one

manufacturer and be of the same series or model type.

b. Type: Heavy duty with full guard, oil tight, 30.5mm, 120VAC, 10A continuous.

c. Provide legend plate for indication of each switch, pushbutton or light function

(e.g., "OPEN-CLOSED", "HAND-OFF-AUTO").

d. Mounting: Flush mounted on control panel front, unless otherwise noted.

e. NEMA rated to match panel in which mounted.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


2. Selector Switches:

a. Type: Provide selector switches with number of positions as required to perform

intended functions as shown and specified.

b. Contacts:

1) Provide number and arrangement of contacts as required to perform in-

tended functions specified, but not less than one single pole, double throw

contact.

2) Type: Double break, silver contacts with movable contact blade providing

scrubbing action.

3) Rating: Compatible with AC or DC current with devices simultaneously

operated by the switch contacts, but not less than 10A resistive at 120 VAC

or DC continuous.

c. Switch Operator: Standard black knob.

3. Pushbuttons (Standard or Illuminated):

a. Type: Provide momentary lighted and/or unlighted, single and/or dual type

pushbuttons as required to perform intended functions specified and shown.

b. Contacts: Comply with the requirements specified for selector switches.

4. Indicating Lights:

a. Type: Compact, LED type.

b. Lamps: Six volt, long life (20,000 hours minimum).

c. Common, push to test circuitry shall be provided for each panel to

simultaneously test all indicating lights on the panel using a single pushbutton.

5. Button and Lens Colors:

a. Red for indication of closed, on, stopped.

b. Green for indication of open, off (ready), running.

c. Amber for indication of equipment malfunction, process trouble and alarms

(e.g., "HIGH LEVEL", "LOW LEVEL", etc.).

d. Blue for indication of electrical control power on.

6. Rotary Cam Switches:

a. Provide rotary cam switches with number of positions and poles as required to

perform the required signal switching function specified and shown.

b. Contacts:

1) Gold-flashed contacts housed in mechanical contact blocks with number

and arrangement of contacts as required to perform intended functions.

2) Contact Rating: Compatible with AC or DC through-put current of signals

and devices simultaneously operated by the switch contacts, but not less

than 20 A at 600 VAC or 250 VDC continuous.

c. Switch Operator: Standard black knob.

7. Products and Manufacturers:

a. Allen-Bradley 800T

b. Eaton Electrical

c. Cutler Hammer


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


B. Control Relay

1. Type: General purpose, octal plug-in type rated for continuous duty, DPDT.

2. Construction Features:

a. Coil Voltages: 24 VDC or 120 VAC, as required.

b. Contacts:

1) Silver cadmium oxide rated not less than 10A resistive at 120 VAC or 24

VDC continuous.

2) For switching low energy circuits (less than 200 mA) fine silver, gold

flashed contacts rated not less than 3A resistive at 120 VAC or 28 VDC

continuous shall be provided.

c. Relays to have clear plastic dust cover.

d. Relays to have pilot light to show energized coil.

e. Relays to be UL recognized.


a. Allen-Bradley 700-HA

b. IDEC

c. Or equal

C. Time Delay Relay

1. Type: Dial adjustable, plug-in type time delay relay providing delay-on-make,

delay on- break or interval operation.

2. Construction Features:

a. MOS digital circuit with transformer coupled power.

b. Switch selectable ranges as follows:

1) One second.

2) Ten seconds.

3) One minute.

4) Ten minutes.

5) One hour.

6) Ten hours.

c. Minimum Setting: Three percent of range, except 50 ms for one-second range.

d. Setting Knob Accuracy: Ten percent.

e. Contacts:

1) Type: DPDT.

2) Rating: 5 A resistive at 120 VAC, 5 A at 24 VDC.

f. Housing: Plug-in design with dust and moisture resistant molded plastic case.

g. Power Input: 120 VAC or 24 VDC as required.

h. Operating Temperature: 32 degrees F to 130 degrees F.

i. Unit shall have LED to show timing status.

j. Relays to be UL recognized.


a. Automatic Timing and Controls Company.

b. IDEC.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


c. Or equal

D. Power Supplies

1. General: Single unit power supplies, located in control panels, remote terminal units

and field panels as required.

2. Single Unit Required Features:

a. Solid state circuitry

b. Sized for 1.5 times the application requirements

c. DIN Rail mounting

d. Input Power: 120 VAC ±10 percent, 60 Hz

e. Output Power: 24 VDC or as required

f. Line/Load Regulation: ±0.005%

g. Ripple: 0.25 mV RMS

h. Polarity: Floating output

i. Ambient Temperature: -4ºF to 160ºF

j. Response Time: <20μS

k. Overload Protection: Internal preset

l. Include mounting brackets, fuse, and mating connector for AC power plug


a. Sola / Hevi-Duty

b. Or equal

E. Uninterruptible Power Supply

1. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) shall be furnished to provide a reliable source

of uninterruptible power with no break in AC output power during a complete or

partial interruption of incoming line power. UPS shall include audio/visual alarms.

UPS shall be UL listed.

2. Rating: 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 1.4KVA/1.0KW minimum to provide uninterrupted

conditioned power, fully loaded conditions for 4 hours minimum.

3. Description: On line dual track power conditioner and true (0ms transfer time)

uninterruptible power supply providing isolation, line regulation and conditioning,

using sealed 48 VDC maintenance free batteries and switch mode power supply for

uninterrupted power with 0.5 to 0.7 power factor and 2.7 to 3.5 crest factor.

4. Required Features:

a. Lighting and Surge Protection: Inherent 2000: One spike attenuation.

b. Regulation: One to three percent load regulation with less than 2pF effective

coupling capacitance for line to load.

c. Output Waveform: Computer grade sine wave with three percent maximum

single harmonic and five percent maximum total harmonic distortion.

d. Output Frequency: 60Hz ±0.5Hz.

e. Operating Temperature: 34ºF to 104ºF.

f. Relative Humidity: 5% to 90 % non-condensing.

g. Computer Interface: RS232 port for display of 22 meter functions and 15 alarm

functions.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


h. Input Protection: Independent battery charger fuse and DC fuses.

i. Output Protection: Inherently current limited ferro-resonant transformer.

j. Battery Charger: Two-step charger, 8A and 2A.

k. AC Input: 120VAC, 60Hz, single phase, +15%, -20%.

l. AC Output: 12 VAC, 60Hz, single phase, +3%, -3%.


a. Liebert

b. Or equal

F. Digital Indicator

1. General: The digital indicator shall accept an analog input and convert it to scaled

numerical characters for digital display and also provide up to two alarm outputs.


a. Display Height: 0.56-inch.

b. Display Capacity: Four digits with decimal point position jumper selectable.

c. Display Type: Seven segment, red LED.

d. Accuracy: ± 0.05%.

e. Analog Input: 4 to 20mADC.

f. Excitation Output: 15VDC for powering transmitter.

g. Analog Output: Proportional 4 to 20mADC.

h. Alarm Output: Dual with two 2A relays.

i. Temperature Range: 32ºF to 140ºF

j. Power: 120VAC, + 10 to -15%, 5W.

k. Enclosure: NEMA 4 splash proof.


a. Red Lion.

b. Or equal.

G. Analog Indicator

1. General: Indicator Unit shall be a signal monitoring instrument that provides

continuous monitoring of a process variable on a scaled vertical bar display.

Indicator shall match in appearance other panel mounted instruments.

2. Description: Indicator Unit shall display one process variable.


a. Input Signals: 1 to 5VDC (into 10 mega-ohm) or 4 to 20mADC (into 250 ohm

range resistor).

b. Power Required: 21 to 28VDC; nominal input current at 24VDC is 400mA.

c. Displays: One segmented gas-discharge or LED vertical bar display.

d. Display Accuracy: One percent of input span.

e. Scale Length: Approximately 3-inches.

f. Operating Influences:

1) Ambient Temperature: Maintains display accuracy ratings for temperature

change within normal operating conditions.


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


2) Supply Voltage: Maintains display accuracy ratings for supply voltage var-

iation between 21 and 28VDC.

3) Electromagnetic Interference (EMI): Maintains display accuracy ratings

when instrument is subjected to an electromagnetic field of up to ten

volts/meter (when rack-mounted in cabinet with door closed). Display sta-

tion must be installed in panel.

g. Operating Conditions:

1) Ambient Temperature: 41 to 122ºF.

2) Maximum Temperature Variation: 36ºF per hr.

3) Ambient Relative Humidity: 10% to 90% non-condensing.

h. Mounting: Display station installs in a nominal 1-inch by 6-inch panel cutout

and shall match in appearance other panel mounted instruments.


a. Red Lion

b. Or equal

H. Elapsed Time Meter (Hour Meter)

1. General: Unit shall be a powered, non-resettable time indicator, with easy to read

analog figures.


a. Power: 120VAC, or 4 to 40VDC

b. Accuracy: Within one percent

c. Capacity: Up to 99,999.9 hours (automatic recycle at zero); one-tenth hour

resolution

d. Operating Temperature: -40ºF to 155ºF

e. Sealed against dirt and moisture

f. Tamperproof

g. Shock resistant

h. Panel mountable

i. Nameplate below display shall read "TOTAL HOURS"


a. Danaher Industrial Controls Group

b. Eaton Electrical

c. Or equal

I. Circuit Breakers

1. Molded-case circuit breakers shall be of the same AIC rating as the panel or

MCC/Panel to which they are connected/fed from, and shall be required to

selectively coordinate above 0.1 seconds.

2. Miniature circuit breakers

a. UL 489 recognized

b. DIN rail mountable

c. Rating: 277/480VAC at 10kAIC


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


d. “D” curve trip characteristics

e. Cable in-cable out design

f. Products and Manufacturers:

1) Eaton WMZ line

2) Or equal

J. Fuses

1. General: Unless otherwise noted the fuse rating and type shall be determined based

on the equipment (which the fuse is protecting) manufacturer’s recommendations

for overcurrent protection.

2. General purpose fuses. Products and Manufacturers:

a. Ferraz Shawmut UL Power Fuse style

b. Or equal

3. Semiconductor fuses. Products and Manufacturers:

a. Ferraz Shawmut Amp Trap series fuses

b. Or equal

4. Fuse blocks/holders shall be UL-style fuse blocks manufactured by Ferraz

Shawmut or equal.

K. Power Distribution Blocks

1. Block-style distribution blocks shall be provided with polycarbonate safety covers

to provide dead front protection. The safety cover shall have a test prod hole for

testing purposes.


a. Ferraz-Shawmut

b. Or equal

L. Electronic Horn

1. General: The horn shall be of the multi-tone electronic audible type.


a. Internal volume control

b. Field selection of up to 16 different tones

c. Power: 120 VAC or 24 VDC (provide power supply as required)

d. Operating Temperature: 32ºF to120ºF

e. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 4X


a. Panalarm.

b. Or equal.

M. Ethernet Switches


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


1. Fiber-to-Ethernet media converters shall be provided based upon 10/100Mbps TX,

100 Base FX, 1300nm, (6) ports minimum (4 RJ-45 Ethernet and 2 Fiber-Optic),

Fiber-Optic connections via SFP fiber inserts with SC fiber termination connectors,

and unmanaged.


a. Hirschmann RS20

b. Or equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY

A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the work of the service personnel during

construction, testing, and acceptance of the work.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall receive final approval on all panel, enclosure, and

equipment layouts by the ENGINEER prior to fabrication or installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. All equipment and devices for the work shall be installed in the locations shown on the

drawings, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and in compliance

with the requirements of these specifications.

B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating the installation of all equipment

in the proposed locations with all other trades performing work on the project that may

be affected.

C. Install equipment in conformance with NEC.

D. Unless otherwise noted, install indoor NEMA 4X panels on 4-inch concrete pad.

Extend pad 4-inches beyond outside dimensions of base, all sides. Lay grout after panel

sills have been securely fastened down.

E. Unless otherwise noted, install outdoor NEMA 4X panels on a reinforced concrete

pedestal:

1. Minimum Thickness: Eight-inches with No. 4 steel reinforcing bars at 12-inches on

centers, each way.

2. Minimum Size: Twelve-inches larger than outer dimensions of base, all sides.

A. Install anchor bolts and anchor in accordance with Section 03 30 01 - Cast-In-Place

Concrete – Building and Site Flatwork.

3.3 FINAL INSPECTION


BDI/PNS - REI

05/27/2020


A. Include all changes and/or alterations in the control panels prior to final inspection and

acceptance by the OWNER.

B. Any changes and/or alterations in the Control Panels shall be reflected/updated in all

Control Panel Schematics prior to acceptance by the OWNER. This includes all

electronic copies delivered to the OWNER.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 05 53 - 1

SECTION 46 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Nameplates.

2. Tags.

3. Stencils.

4. Labels.

5. Lockout devices.


1. Section 09 96 36 – Chemical-Resistant Coatings for Metals in Wastewater Facilities

specified by this Section.

2. Section 40 05 53 – Identification for Process Piping


A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for preinstallation meeting.

B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work of this Section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for equipment

identification and schedule, including equipment number, location, function, and manufacturer's

name and model number.

D. Samples: Submit one nameplate, label and tag for each size used on Project.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and

installation.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Qualifications Statement:

1. Submit qualifications for manufacturer.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance materials.

B. Extra Stock Materials: Furnish two containers of spray-on adhesive.

C. Tools: Furnish special crimpers and other devices required for Owner to reinstall tags.


A. Perform Work according to Wakulla County standards.

B. Maintain 1 copy of each standard affecting the Work of this Section on-Site.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Furnish nameplates according to equipment manufacturer recommendations.

2. Furnish materials according to Wakulla County standards.

B. Description: Aluminum with engraved black letters on light, contrasting background color.

2.2 TAGS

A. Metal Tags:

1. Description:

a. Aluminum or Stainless steel construction; stamped letters.

b. Minimum Tag Size and Configuration: 1-1/2-inch square with finished edges.

B. Information Tags:

1. Description:

a. Clear plastic with printed CAUTION and message.

b. Minimum Tag Size: 3-1/4 by 5-5/8 inch.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


c. Furnish grommet and self-locking nylon ties.

2. Tag Chart: Typewritten, letter-size list of applied tags and location, in anodized aluminum

frame.

2.3 STENCILS


B. Description:

1. Clean-cut symbols.

2. Letter Height: 1-3/4 inch.

C. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 96 36 – Chemical-Resistant Coatings for Metals in

Wastewater Facilities.

2.4 LABELS


B. Description:

1. Aluminum construction.

2. Minimum Size: 1.9 by 0.75 inch.

3. Adhesive backed, with printed identification.

2.5 LOCKOUT DEVICES

A. Lockout Hasps:

1. Description:

a. Anodized aluminum construction.

b. Furnish hasp with erasable label surface.

c. Minimum Size: 7-1/4 by 3 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Requirements: Requirements for installation preparation.

B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


C. Prepare surfaces as specified in Section 09 96 36.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Identify equipment with metal nameplates.

B. Identify inline pumps and other small devices with tags.

C. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

D. Apply stencil painting as specified in Section 09 96 36 – Chemical-Resistant Coatings for Metals

in Wastewater Facilities.

E. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.

F. Install plastic nameplates with corrosion-resistant mechanical fasteners or adhesive.

G. Labels:

1. Install labels with sufficient adhesive for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

2. For unfinished covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.

H. Install tags using corrosion-resistant chain.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020

K:\1118 Wakulla County\111803.10 McNeil Plant Nutrient Evaluation\Specifications\_Interim_\RFB 111803.10 SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN 46 21 83 - 1

SECTION 46 21 83 – SEPTAGE RECEIVING SCREEN

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The contractor will furnish One (1) In Tank Screw Screen System and controls.

Equipment shall be installed as shown on the plans, as specified herein, as recommended

by the supplier and in compliance with all local, state and federal codes and regulations.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. Screening units and motor controllers shall, as applicable, meet the requirements of the

following industry standards:

• AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute)

• ABMA (American Bearing Manufacturers Association)

• AGMA (American Gear Manufacturers Association)

• NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association)

• NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)

• ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)

• WSC (American Welding Society Code)

• ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)

• NEC (National Electrical Code)

• UL (Underwriters Laboratory Standards

1.3 SUBMITTALS

The following will be submitted for the spiral screw screen/compactor furnished under

this specification:

A. Certificate of Compliance or complete list of all deviations from the drawings and

specifications.

B. Complete installation and assembly drawings, showing the manufacturer’s

dimensions, weights, and loadings.

C. Detailed specifications and data covering materials used, parts, instrumentation

devices, and other accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished will be

submitted for review.

D. Manufacturer’s installation instruction and certification.

E. Operation and maintenance manual.

F. Manufacturer’s warranty agreement.

G. Electrical requirements, schematic diagrams, and details of components included.

H. Manufacturer’s recommended spare parts.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


A. In order to assure uniform quality, ease of maintenance and minimal parts storage, it is

the intent of these Specifications that all equipment called for under this Section will

be supplied by a single manufacturer.

B. Other than the named supplier, all manufacturers proposing equipment described

herein, will provide a detailed submittal package, which will consist, at a minimum, of

all information and details prescribed in Section 1.03 of this specification. All pre-

qualification submittals will be submitted to the Engineer at least 30 days prior to the

bid date.

C. If submitted equipment requires arrangement differing from that indicated on the

drawings or specified, prepare and submit for review complete structural, mechanical,

and electrical drawings and equipment lists showing all necessary changes and

embodying all special features of equipment proposed. Any changes are at no

additional compensation and the Contractor will be responsible for all engineering

costs of redesign by the Engineer, if necessary.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Equipment will be covered against manufacturing defects in materials and workmanship

during normal use and service for a period of one (1) year from date of start up as long as

periodic maintenance procedures are followed and performed. Items specifically not

covered by the one year warranty are labor and consumable wear parts as identified in the

O&M manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. The manufacturer must meet the general intent of these specifications.


• Peak Flow (MGD): 1.15

• Perforations (mm): 6

• Material of constructions: 304 stainless steel

• Power Supply: 460 v/3 p/60 hz

• Motor HP: no greater than 5.0

• Motor rating: TEFC-XP

• Control panel: NEMA 4X SS

2.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. General

1. Equipment provided shall be a fully automatic, self-cleaning screening unit(s) with a

semi-cylindrical, perforated plate media screen basket. Screening unit(s) will be

provided with an angle-of-inclination between 25o and 35o from horizontal.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2. Each screening unit shall be provided with a fixed, semi-cylindrical screen basket,

concentric shaftless spiral screw conveyor, optional screenings washing and optional

screenings compaction zone with single motor drive system.

3. Materials of Construction: All wetted parts shall be constructed from stainless steel,

including the shaftless spiral. Bearings, electrical devices, motor and gear reducer

shall be of the manufacturer’s standard materials.

4. Shop Surface Preparation/Coating: All welds shall be cleaned and passivated to

remove weld spatter, slag and discoloration using glass bead blasting process.

Bearings, electrical devices, motor and gear reducer shall be provided with the

manufacturer’s standard coating system.

B. Tank Assembly

1. The tank shall be constructed from type stainless steel. The tank shall be designed to

withstand the hydrostatic load from the process flow through the unit and provide

support of the screenings basket area. The tank is supplied with footings for

anchoring the unit, and lifting lugs for installation. The tank shall be supplied with

flanged inlet and flanged outlet connection and lifting lugs.

2. The top of the tank shall be enclosed by type stainless steel cover, including a hinged

access door.

3. Screen cover shall have a safety limit switch installed to prevent the screen from

operating with the tank cover in the open position. Screen cover shall be supplied

with connections for mounting the ultrasonic level sensor and vent

C. Screen Basket

1. The screen basket shall be fabricated from type stainless steel perforated plate with a

minimum thickness of 3mm and designed and built to withstand the maximum

possible static hydraulic forces exerted on the screen basket by the liquid flow.

Structural and functional parts shall be sized to prevent deflections or vibrations that

may impair the screening, conveying and compacting operations.

2. The screen basket shall be of a semi-cylindrical shape with perforations around the

entire basket.

3. The screen basket shall be perforated plate with maximum openings of 6 mm.

4. The screen basket shall be cleaned by a nylon brushes attached to the screening

basket zone of the shaftless spiral screw.

D. Spiral Screw Assembly

1. The shaftless spiral screw assembly shall be fabricated of stainless steel with a

diameter of 11.4 inches.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


2. The shaftless spiral screw assembly shall be designed to clean the screening basket

and transport material up the conveyor tube to the discharge of the unit.

3. The shaftless spiral screw shall be provided with a SS backed, stitch welded nylon

continuous brush or a sectional nylon brush or optionally the shaftless spiral screw

shall be provided with an L-shaped brush holder with compression pins at 90 or 180

degree (depending on size) intervals to hold the brush in place.

4. At the compaction/dewatering zone, the shaftless spiral flights shall end and

transition to an integrated shafted dewatering section allowing for compaction of the

screenings. At the discharge point the material shall freely release out of the unit.

E. Screenings Transport Zone

1. The transport tube shall be fabricated from type stainless steel with a minimum

thickness of 3mm.

F. Screenings Compaction Zone Assembly

1. The compaction/dewatering zone housing shall be fabricated from type stainless steel

and shall consist of a open-top rectangular body with fully welded 0.16 inch thick

end plates. The lower end of the housing shall be fitted with a flexible hose

connected to the drain pipe stub to return water from the dewatering/compaction zone

back to the process stream.

2. The compaction/dewatering zone housing shall encase a cylindrical tube with a

perforation diameter of 3mm to 5mm on its underside to allow water to drain from

the pressed screenings. The compaction/dewatering zone tube shall be constructed of

stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 3mm and shall be of the same inner

diameter as the conveyor tube.

3. The compaction/dewatering zone housing shall be furnished with a latched, hinged

stainless steel access cover with a gasket. The access cover shall expose the entire

length and width of the compaction/dewatering and discharge area.

4. A spay bar shall be installed inside the compaction enclosure to keep the compaction

zone clear and rinse any residual solids from the drain area of the enclosure. Spray

bar wash system shall be furnished with control solenoid valve, stainless steel piping

and fittings, flexible reinforced hoses and 0 stainless steel or nylon spray nozzles.

G. Spray Wash System – A centralized washing system shall be provided to connect all

spray wash systems to a common service connection point. The piping manifold shall be

constructed from type stainless steel. Washwater solenoids and manual ball valves shall

be factory installed with the manifold assembly.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


H. Screen Mounting

1. A screen support structure shall be provided to adequately support the screen under

operating conditions. The support stand shall allow the screen to be pivoted out of the

tank for maintenance. The support stand shall be constructed from type stainless

steel.

I. Drive Unit

1. Drive unit shall be directly connected to the main drive shaft via the reducer’s hollow

shaft.

2. The gear reducer shall be bolted to the upper compaction/dewatering zone housing

end plate.

3. Gear reducer shall be a helical gear type. Provide a cast iron frame; design in

accordance with AGMA recommendations for Class II service.

4. The motor shall be TEFC-XP, no greater than 5.0 HP, 1800 RPM, 460 Volt, 3 phase,

60 Hz. The motor shall be NEMA design code B and be direct coupled to the

reducer.

5. The stub shaft shall extend from the gear reducer into the end of the transport tube.

Stub shaft shall be constructed of high strength alloy steel and shall have a protective

epoxy coating.

6. The spiral screw assembly shall bolted to the stub shaft via a flanged connection.

2.4 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND DEVICES

A. In addition to the drive motor, the equipment supplier shall furnish all electrical items

specifically called for in this specification section. The contractor shall supply all other

electrical items, and interconnecting wiring of proper size, including all conduit and

supports required to place the equipment into service.

1. Control Panel: A 460 volt primary control panel shall be provided in a NEMA 4X

SS enclosure with powder coated white finish suitable for wall mounting with the

following components to provide proper operation of the equipment:

a. Main disconnect with through door interlock handle.

b. Step down control transformer.

c. Branch circuit protection.

d. Drive motor starter - reversing.

e. Emergency stop pushbutton.

f. Screen HOA switch.

g. Screen FOR switch, spring return reverse to off.

h. Load monitor shall provide overload protection by sensing motor current

draw.

i. Run and Off indicating lights.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


j. Alarm light indicating over current, and starter overload.

k. Alarm reset pushbutton.

l. Programmable control relay to provide necessary control logic and

monitor equipment mounted electrical devices.

m. Run and alarm auxiliary contacts for use by the customer.

n. UL Label.

B. Solenoid Valves: As required shall be 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz.

C. Local Emergency Stop: If required provide a local emergency stop push button in a

NEMA 4X SS enclosure.

2.5 OPERATION, MONITORING, AND CONTROL

A. Screen Hand Operation: Screen to run continuously.

B. Screen Automatic Operation: Screen to cycle based on the level sensor or repeat cycle

timer. Provide provisions to prevent excessive starting and stopping of the unit. Cycle

timer shall be reset after each run initiated by the level sensor.

2.6 ANCHORAGE AND FASTENERS

A. Anchor Bolts: All anchor bolts shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch diameter and made of

type 304 stainless steel. The equipment supplier shall furnish all anchor bolts, nuts, and

washers required for the equipment.

B. Fasteners: All fasteners shall be type 304 stainless steel. The equipment supplier shall

furnish all fasteners required for the assembly of the equipment.

2.7 SPARE PARTS

A. The following spare parts shall be provided for each screen unit.

1. One (1) set of spare brushes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. The mounting points of the channel shall be level and parallel and of proper size.

3.2 LIFTING AND MOVING EQUIPMENT

B. Lifting points shall be identified. A crane of sufficient capacity must be on site for

unloading the equipment from the truck and placing in the channel for installation.

T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020


3.3 INSTALLATION

C. The installation is the responsibility of the Contractor. Complete installation procedures

are included in the O&M manual shipped with the unit.

3.4 START UP/TRAINING/FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

D. The initial start-up will be performed by a manufacturer’s authorized representative. The

authorized representative will verify the proper operation and installation, and provide

training to the equipment operators. One (1) trip and two (2) days are allotted.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

3.5 Information on minor periodic adjustments and cleaning is contained in the Operating and

Maintenance Manual.


T. Keith Hill, P.E.

BDI/PNS

05/27/2020



APPENDIX A

CSI SUBSTITUTION FORM

© Copyright 2013, CSI,

110 S. Union St., Suite 100, Alexandria, VA 22314 Page ___ of ___ Form Version: September 2013

CSI Form 13.1A

SUBSTITUTION

REQUEST

(After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase) Project:

To:

Re:

Substitution Request Number:

From:

Date:

A/E Project Number:

Contract For:

Specification Title: Section: Page:

Description: Article/Paragraph:

Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone:

History: ☐ New product ☐ 1-4 years old ☐ 5-10 years old ☐ More than 10 years old

Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: ☐ Point-by-point comparative data attached — REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation:

Project: Architect:

Address: Owner:

Date Installed:

Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: ☐ No ☐ Yes; explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ). Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: ☐ No ☐ Yes [Add] [Deduct] days.

Supporting Data Attached: ☐Drawings ☐Product Data ☐ Samples ☐ Tests ☐ Reports ☐

© Copyright 2013, CSI,

110 S. Union St., Suite 100, Alexandria, VA 22314 Page ___ of ___ Form Version: September 2013

CSI Form 13.1A

SUBSTITUTION

REQUEST

(After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase — Continued) The Undersigned certifies:

• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.

• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.

• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.

• Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.

• Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become

apparent are to be waived.

• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.

• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution.

• Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address:

Telephone: Attachments: ☐

A/E’s REVIEW AND RECOMMENDATION

☐ Approve Substitution - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. ☐ Approve Substitution as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. ☐ Reject Substitution - Use specified materials. ☐ Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date: OWNER'S REVIEW AND ACTION

☐ Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. Prepare Change

Order. ☐ Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. Prepare

Change Order. ☐ Substitution rejected - Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: ☐Contractor ☐Subcontractor ☐Supplier ☐Manufacturer ☐A/E

WAKULLA COUNTY OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT … › ITB 2020 16 Bid Documents.pdf · 111803.10...

Documents

Transcript of WAKULLA COUNTY OTTER CREEK WASTEWATER TREATMENT … › ITB 2020 16 Bid Documents.pdf · 111803.10...